Today's Hours: 8:00am - 10:00pm

Books

  • Digital
    Paul Alexander Gonzales, MPAS, PA-C (Physician Assistant, Comprehensive Epilepsy Center, Children's Health, Dallas, Texas).
    Summary: "The first complete review book for all of the PA Rotation Exams! At last! A complete exam review book for the PA Rotation (EOR) exams that specifically addresses PAEA requirements! Presented in a full-color, concise format, The PA End of Rotation Exam Review covers all the information required to succeed on the EOR Exams for Internal Medicine, Family Medicine, Pediatrics, OB/GYN, Surgery, Emergency Medicine, and Psychiatry. Closely following the PAEA EOR Exam blueprint and featuring practice questions, as well as online review questions for each rotation, this practical solution gives PA students everything they need for EOR exam success. Excellent Value: ll PA rotations are covered in a single text. Focused: Content mirrors the PAEA Blueprint for EOR exams, ensuring that students learn the information they need to excel on the exam. Concise: the tabular and outline format is ideal for quick exam study. High-yield: Information and questions are geared toward each EOR exam and cover high-yield topics, ensuring strong preparation. Easy-to-use: Overlapping content between rotations is fully cross-referenced and easy to locate, regardless of the student's current rotation. Full color: High-quality artwork and photos provide must-know visual information, including dermatology images. Online resources: Practice tests--50 review questions per rotation - provide additional practice and review. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience with Enhanced Video, Audio and Interactive Capabilities! Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. Adapt for unique reading needs, supporting learning disabilities, visual/auditory impairments, second-language or literacy challenges, and more"--Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    Jón Eiríksson, Leifur A. Símonarson.
    Summary: This volume sheds new light on the marine fauna and geological setting of the Tjörnes Sequence, North Iceland, which is a classic site for the Pliocene and Pleistocene stratigraphy of the North Atlantic region. Readers will discover descriptions of new data collected by the editors over a period of over three decades on marine faunal assemblages and sedimentology available for palaeoenvironmental reconstructions, as well as the tectonic and stratigraphical relationships on Tjörnes Peninsula. The book includes a comprehensive account of all the collections of marine fossil invertebrate macrofossils and foraminifera known to the editors from the Tjörnes Sequence. It is expected to elucidate sedimentological and faunal changes from relatively stable Pliocene conditions to highly variable and periodically harsh climatic conditions of recurring Quaternary glaciations. The distribution, recent or fossil, of various species is recorded and pertinent ecological and biological features are also discussed. The Tjörnes Sequence records the Neogene migration of Pacific species into the North Atlantic. Researchers in geology, climate science, environmental science and earth science will find this book particularly valuable.

    Contents:
    Chapter1. A Brief Resumé of the Geology of Iceland
    Chapter2. The Marine Realm Around Iceland
    a Review of Biological Research
    Chapter3. The Evolution of the Tjörnes Sedimentary Basin in Relation to the Tjörnes Fracture Zone and the Geological Structure of Iceland
    Chapter4. A Review of the Research History of the Tjörnes Sequence, North Iceland
    Chapter5. Lithostratigraphy of the Tjörnes Sequence in Barmur and Höskuldsvík on the West Coast of Tjörnes, North Iceland
    Chapter6. An Age Model for the Miocene to Pleistocene Tjörnes Sequence, North Iceland
    Chapter7. Systematic Overview of the Pliocene Molluscs and Barnacles of the Barmur Group on Tjörnes, North Iceland
    Chapter8. Foraminifera in the Pliocene Barmur Group on Tjörnes, North Iceland
    Chapter9. Reconstructing the Palaeoenvironments of the Pliocene Barmur Group in the Tjörnes Basin, North Iceland
    Lithostratigraphy of the Upper Part of the Tjörnes Sequence in Furuvík, Breiðavík, Öxarfjörður, and Central Tjörnes Mountains, North Iceland
    Systematic Overview of the Molluscs and Barnacles of the Quaternary Breiðavík Group, North Iceland
    Chapter12. Foraminifera in the Early Pleistocene Part of the Breiðavík Group, North Iceland Knudsen
    Chapter13. Reconstructing the Palaeoenvironments of the Quaternary Tjörnes Basin, North Iceland
    Chapter14. Migration of Pacific Marine Mollusc Fauna into the North Atlantic Across the Arctic Ocean in Pliocene and Early Pleistocene Time.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sondos Albadri, Claire L. Stevens, editors.
    Summary: This book is a practical, comprehensive guide to the management of children and adolescents in general dental practice. A logical, evidence-based approach to oral health is adopted throughout. The commonly encountered oral and dental problems and their diagnosis and treatment are covered in detail, with particular attention to dental caries, dental trauma, developmental anomalies, periodontal problems, and soft tissue conditions. Up-to-date guidance is provided on history taking, dental examination, preventive strategies and advanced behaviour management. In addition the relevance of common medical conditions to dental management is discussed. The book is divided into four sections, each of which focusses on a specific age group, helping the reader to relate clinical issues to the different dental developmental stages. The readily understandable text is supported by many informative colour illustrations and diagrams.

    Contents:
    Birth To 3 Years Old: Growth and Development in Relation to Paediatric Dentistry
    Introduction to the Dental Surgery
    Prevention and Interventions in Oral Health Care in Children. 3 To 6 Years Old: Behaviour Management of the Paediatric Patient for Dental Procedures
    Management of Dental Caries in Primary Teeth
    Dento-Alvoeolar Trauma in the Primary Dentition
    Safeguarding for the Paediatric Patient. 6- 12 Years Old: Medical History and Dental Management of the Young Patient
    Tooth Eruption and Common Disturbances
    Dental Anomalies in the Young Permanent Teeth
    Management of Dental Caries in the Young Permanent Teeth
    Dento-Alvoeolar Trauma in the Permanent Dentition. 12 To 16 Years Old: Periodontal Conditions
    Tooth Surface Loss
    Common Soft Tissue and Hard Tissue Lesions.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Matthew Pitt.
    Summary: Paediatric Electromyography is a single-author textbook which covers the full range of applications of the techniques of nerve conduction and electromyography (EMG) in children from the neonatal period to the late teenage years. It comprises five sections. Section 1 in its first chapter, gives a detailed introduction to the different skills that are needed to effect successful interventions in paediatric EMG. The emphasis here is that paediatric EMG is not simply adult EMG applied to younger subjects.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Basic physiology
    Nerve physiology
    Pathophysiological correlations in neuropathies
    Nerve damage and entrapment syndromes
    Motor unit anatomy and physiology
    Needle EMG findings in different pathologies
    Investigation of channelopathies
    Techniques used to test the neuromuscular junction in children
    Pthophysiological associations in paediatric neuromuscular junction disorders
    Results of the clinical application of SPACE in suspected disorders of the neuromuscular junction
    More advanced techniques.
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Hong Wang, editor.
    Summary: This book introduces the clinical analysis and accompany cases of paediatric Kawasaki disease. It has 14 chapters about typical Kawasaki disease, atypical Kawasaki disease, recurrent, misdiagnosis, and complications involved different systems, such as cardiovascular, digestive, nervous, blood, respiratory, urinary, bone and joints, and endocrine systems complications. In this book, 53 Kawasaki cases are presented with clinical history, physical examination, laboratory findings, diagnosis, treatment and discussion. This book is helpful for clinicians, ultrasonologist, and radiologist to support early diagnosis and proper treatment, which can significantly improve the prognosis of Kawasaki disease.

    Contents:
    Cardiovascular System
    Digestive System
    Nervous System
    Blood System
    Respiratory System
    Urinary System
    Bone and Joint System
    Endocrine System
    IVIG Resistance
    Kawasaki Disease Recurrence
    Missed Diagnosed Cases
    Atypical Kawasaki Disease Cases
    Vaccination Related Case
    Contraversial Cases
    Cardiac Tumor.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Rob Forsyth, Consultant and Senior Lecturer in Child Neurology, Great North Children's Hospital, Newcastle University, UK, Richard Newton, Honorary Consultant Paediatric Neurologist, Royal Manchester Children's Hospital, UK.
    Contents:
    1. Clinical approaches
    2. Neurodiagnostic tools
    3. Signs and symptoms
    4. Specific conditions
    5. Consultation with other services
    6. Emergencies
    7. Pharmacopoeia.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    Benjamin Joseph, James Robb, Randall T. Loder, Ian Torode.
    Summary: The book presents a problem-based, rational approach to the diagnosis of orthopaedic problems in children. It is divided into five sections based on the age at which specific problems may be encountered; the newborn, the neonate and infant, the toddler and the pre-school child, the child in the school-going age and the adolescent. The authors outline a systematic approach to arrive at a tentative diagnosis by asking relevant questions related to the presenting symptom and then performing a thorough clinical examination. They then suggest the most appropriate investigations to confirm the diagnosis. Each chapter deals with the common conditions that may lead to the problem; the rarer causes of the problem are listed at the end.

    Contents:
    The deformed hip
    The deformed femur
    The deformed knee
    The bowed tibia
    The deformed foot
    The inverted foot
    The everted foot
    The deformed shoulder
    The deformed elbow
    The deformed wrist
    The deformed spine
    Anomalies of fingers or toes
    Absence of digits of the hands or feet
    Duplication of fingers
    Duplication of toes
    Deformities of the fingers or toes
    Limb length inequality at birth
    Abnormal body proportions or dwarfism evident at birth
    Decreased movement of an upper or lower limb in the neonate
    Deformities of the neck and limitation of movement of the neck
    The child with multiple deformities
    Acquired deformities of the knee
    In-toeing gait and out-toeing gait
    Toe walking
    The flat foot
    The child with a painless limp
    The delayed walker
    Deformities and limitation of movements of the shoulder girdle
    Deformities and limitation of motion of the forearm
    Deformities and limitation of movements of the wrist
    Brittle bones and frequent fractures
    The child with a painful limp
    The painful hip
    Short stature and altered body proportions
    Gigantism
    Acquired limb length inequality
    The painful hip in adolescence
    The painful knee in adolescence
    The painful foot adolescence. .
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Nick A. Aresti, Matthew Barry, Mark (J.M.H.) Paterson, Manoj Ramachandran, editors.
    Contents:
    Vulnerable Bodies and Embodied Boundaries
    Rural Women?s Bodies and Invisible Hands: Neoliberalism and Population Control in China
    Arrogant Perceptors, World-Travellers, and World-Backpackers: Rethinking María Lugones? Theoretical Framework through Lukas Moodysson?s Mammoth
    Embodied Vulnerability in Large Scale Technical Systems
    Vulnerable Dam Bodies, Water Bodies and Human Bodies
    Toxic Skin and Animal Mops: Ticks and Humanimal Vulnerabilities
    Mothering With Neuroscience in a Neoliberal Age: Child Disorders and Embodied Brains
    Sexual Arousal, Danger and Vulnerability
    The Author?s Body: Almodóvar, auteur, and the Film Object
    Performativity and Expression: The Case of David Cronenberg?s M. Butterfly.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sattar Alshryda, James S. Huntley, Paul A. Banaszkiewicz, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Richard Hain and Satbir Jassal.
    Summary: Now in its second edition Paediatric Palliative Medicine covers all aspects of the care of children with life limiting illnesses, including symptom control, the philosophy and models that support delivery of palliative medicine to children, and the practical delivery of palliative medicine to other professionals and to families.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Randi Zlotnik Shaul, editor.
    Summary: This book provides the reader with a theoretical and practical understanding of two health care delivery models: the patient/child centred care and family-centred care. Both are fundamental to caring for children in healthcare organizations. The authors address their application in a variety of paediatric healthcare contexts, as well as the ethical and legal issues they raise. Each model is increasingly pursued as a vehicle for guiding the delivery of health care in the best interests of children. Such models of health care delivery shape health care policies, programs, facility design, resource allocation decisions and day-to-day interactions among patients, families, physicians and other health care professionals. To maximize the health and ethical benefits these models offer, there must be shared understanding of what the models entail, as well as the ethical and legal synergies and tensions they can create. This book is a valuable resource for paediatricians, nurses, trainees, graduate students, practitioners of ethics and health policy.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Michael Paddock, Amaka C. Offiah.
    Summary: This book provides readers with a comprehensive evaluation of paediatric radiographs in preparation for the demanding Rapid Reporting component of the Fellowship of the Royal College of Radiologists (FRCR) Part 2B examination, where the margin between pass and fail is very narrow. While other resources may include only a handful of paediatric images in a practice reporting packet, this book is dedicated solely to improving paediatric reporting skill and knowledge. It is designed to address an important deficiency identified in the FRCR Part 2B Examiners' Report, in that "many candidates struggle with interpretation of paediatric imaging - even for common paediatric pathologies". The ten practice tests presented, each with 30 images, will assist readers not only in passing the examination but also in the real world when they have to report paediatric radiographs independently. The range of cases covered, from neonate to adolescent, delivers a sound knowledge of both common paediatric fracture patterns and patterns which are subtler but require a definitive answer as to whether they are normal or abnormal. Guidance is also provided on how to describe each abnormality.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Albert Martin Li, Kate Ching-Ching Chan, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide readers with updated information on the diagnosis and management of common sleep disorders in children. An overview of sleep physiology and sleep disorders evaluation followed by an in-depth discussion with illustrative case examples of the most frequent sleep disorders encountered in children. A section on sleep disorders in children with neuromuscular and developmental diseases has also been included. Written by members of the Asia Pacific Paediatric Sleep Alliance and experts from the region, this case-based textbook will be a valuable reference for sleep researchers, paediatricians, and child neurologists, as well as those who are interested in this field of medicine.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Introduction
    1: Functions and Control of Sleep
    1.1 The Need to Sleep
    1.2 Control of Sleep
    1.2.1 Generation of Circadian Rhythm
    1.2.2 Sleep and Arousal
    1.2.3 The NREM and REM Sleep
    1.2.3.1 NREM Circuit
    1.2.3.2 REM Circuit
    1.2.3.3 The Role of Hypocretin/Orexin
    1.3 Functions of Sleep
    1.3.1 Sleep and EEG Recovery
    1.3.2 Sleep, Brain Energy Replenishment, Molecular Regeneration
    1.3.3 Sleep and Toxin Removal Within the Brain
    1.3.4 Sleep and Memory
    1.3.5 Sleep and Immunity 1.3.6 Sleep, Mood, and Emotion
    1.3.7 Sleep: The Developmental Perspective
    References
    2: Sleep Physiology and Architecture
    2.1 Sleep Architecture
    2.2 Sleep Physiology
    References
    3: Sleep Needs: Cross-Cultural Comparisons and Problems with Sleep Deprivation
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Sleep Duration
    3.2.1 Developmental Alteration of Sleep Duration
    3.2.2 Cross-Cultural Difference of Sleep Duration
    3.2.3 Factors Associated with Sleep Duration
    3.2.4 Problems Associated with Decreased Sleep Duration
    3.3 Sleepiness
    3.3.1 Sleepiness vs. Sleep Duration 3.3.2 Factors Associated with Sleepiness
    3.4 Sleep Need Index (SNI)
    3.5 Conclusion
    References
    Part II: Evaluation of Sleep Disorders
    4: Clinical Assessment
    4.1 Preparation
    4.2 History Taking
    4.2.1 Chief Complaint and Associated Symptoms
    4.2.2 Sleep Patterns and Sleep-Wake Schedule
    4.2.3 Treatment History, Medical History, Developmental History, and Psychiatric History
    4.2.4 Family History
    4.3 Physical Examination
    4.3.1 Sleep-Associated Physical Examination
    4.4 Questionnaire and Scale 4.4.1 Bedtime Problems, Excessive Daytime Sleepiness, Awakenings, Regularity and Snoring Screener (BEARS)
    4.4.2 Children's Sleep Habit Questionnaire: Preschool and School Ages (CSHQ)
    4.4.3 Sleep Disturbance Scale for Children (SDSC)
    4.4.4 Pediatric Daytime Sleepiness Scale (PDSS)
    4.4.5 Children's Sleep Comic
    4.4.6 Sleep Diary and Sleep Log
    4.4.7 Structured Interview
    4.5 Laboratory Test
    4.5.1 Blood Test
    4.5.2 Dim Light Melatonin Onset (DLMO)
    4.5.3 Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) Hypocretin (Orexin) Level
    4.6 Imaging Test
    4.6.1 Cephalometry 4.6.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI)
    4.7 Conclusions
    References
    5: Sleep Diagnostics
    5.1 Diagnosis
    5.2 Home Audio and Video Recording
    5.3 Pulse Oximetry
    5.3.1 Technology Behind Pulse Oximetry
    5.3.2 Limitations of Pulse Oximetry
    5.4 Actigraphy
    5.4.1 Indications for Actigraphy
    5.4.2 Limitations
    5.5 Paediatric Polysomnography
    5.5.1 Mechanics of Polysomnography
    5.5.2 Interpretation and Scoring
    5.5.3 Indications for Paediatric Polysomnography
    5.5.4 Limitations of Polysomnography
    5.5.5 Multiple Sleep Latency Test (MSLT)
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    volume editor, Gabor Szinnai.
    Contents:
    Evolution, child development and the thyroid : a phylogenetic and ontogenetic introduction to normal thyroid function / Krude, H.
    Human fetal thyroid function / Polak, M.
    The role of thyroid hormones for brain development and cognitive function / Rovet, J. F.
    Neonatal screening for congenital hypothyroidism / Torresani, T.
    Diagnosis, treatment and outcome of congenital hypothyroidism / Van Vliet, G.; Deladoëy, J.
    Clinical genetics of congenital hypothyroidism / Szinnai, G.
    Central hypothyroidism in children / Garcí́a, M., Fernssndez, A., Moreno, J.C.
    Thyroid hormone cell membrane transport defect / Ramos, H.E.
    Resistance to thyroid hormone / Onigata, K., Szinnai, G.
    Iodine deficiency in children / Pearce, E.N.
    Thyroid autoimmunity / Wiersinga, W.M.
    Clinical aspects of Hashimoto's thyroiditis / Radetti, G.
    Graves' disease in children / Léger, J.
    Thyroid nodules and differentiated thyroid cancer / Bauer, A.J.
    Medullary thyroid carcinoma in children / Viola, D., Romei, C.; Elisei, R.
    Digital Access Karger 2014
  • Print
    WHO Classification of Tumors Editorial Board.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    New Books Shelf (Duck Room)
    RC281.C4 P34 2022
    2
  • Digital
    Alaa Abd-Elsayed, editor.
    Summary: This concise but comprehensive guide covers all common procedures in pain management necessary for daily practice, and includes all topics on the pain medicine curricula of the American Board of Anesthesiology, World Institute of Pain/Fellow of Interventional Pain Practice, and American Board of Pain Medicine. All nerve blocks (head, neck, back, pelvis and lower extremity) are discussed. Pain: A Review Guide is aimed at trainees in pain medicine all over the world. This book will also be beneficial to all practitioners who practice pain.

    Contents:
    Tation
    Temperature modalities
    Manipulation, mobilization, massage, traction
    Casting and splinting
    Exercise therapy
    23. Work Rehabilitation
    Importance of early intervention and early return to work in reducing absence
    Psychosocial factors as the main determinants of disability
    Identification of obstacles to recovery
    Components of successful comprehensive rehabilitation program
    Multidisciplinary approaches for those who do not return to work within a few weeks
    Functional Capacity Evaluation
    24. Complementary Therapies (CAM)
    CAM
    25. Clinical States: Taxonomy
    IASP classification of chronic pain syndromes
    Application and definition of pain terms
    26. Pain in special population
    Pain in Infants, Children, and Adolescents
    Pain in older adults
    Delirium in the elderly
    Pain Issues in Individuals with Limited Ability to Communicate Due to Neurocognitive Impairments
    27. Pain Relief in Persons with Substance use and Addictive Disorders
    Biopharmacologic and neurophysiologic basis of addiction
    Interactions between addiction and pain
    Screening for substance use disorder or addiction in patients with pain
    Principles of comprehensive approach to pain management in patients with addiction
    Pharmacologic treatment of patients with addiction
    Acute pain management of patients with active addiction or in recovery
    Analgesic response to opioids in patients with addiction
    Risks and benefits of opioid use in treatment of chronic/cancer pain in patients with substance use disorder
    Needs of special populations
    Legal, regulatory, reimbursement issues limiting access to care for patients with pain and addiction
    Treatment of withdrawal
    List of addictive drugs and their metabolites in urine
    Impact of alcohol use on pain
    28. Pain Relief in Areas of Deprivation and Conflict
    Variability of availability and access to adequate pain treatment worldwide
    Causes of pain worldwide
    Spect cal principles in clinical assessment, explanation, and treatment
    Common causes, diagnostic evaluation, and treatment in men
    Common causes, diagnostic evaluation, and treatment in women
    Superior hypogastric plexus block
    Ganglion impar block
    16. Surgical Pain Management
    Importance of general health status in preoperative evaluation
    Surgical lesioning of brain, brain stem, spinal cord, peripheral nerves
    Radiofrequency treatment
    Neurolysis
    Spinal cord and peripheral nerve stimulation
    Intrathecal drug delivery
    DRG stimulator
    Cordotomy
    Kyphoplast and vertebroplasty
    17. Nerve conditions
    Complex Regional Pain Syndromes
    Phantom limb pain
    Peripheral neuropathy
    Other nerve conditions as mononeuropathy, mononeurpathy multiplex and others
    18. Central pain
    Central pain
    19. Cancer Pain
    Palliative care
    Hospice care
    Comprehensive evaluation of patients with cancer pain
    Principles of treatment
    Analgesic ladder approach
    Anesthetic approaches
    Surgical and interventional radiologic approaches
    Neurostimulatory approach
    Physical therapy
    Psychological approaches
    Needs of special populations
    Benefit to burden ratio
    Anorexia and cachexia associated with cancer
    20. Pain in Pregnancy and Labor
    Factors influencing the perception of pain in pregnancy compared with the non-pregnant state
    Causes of pain and principles of pain management in pregnancy
    Mechanisms, characteristic, benefits, consequences and management of labor pain
    21. Acute Pain
    Epidemiology of inadequate control
    Physiologic and psychologic effects
    Pharmacologic properties of major classes of drugs used for acute pain management
    Comprehensive plan for optimal perioperative pain management
    Non-pharmacologic treatment
    Clinical outcomes to be evaluated
    Tools for assessment and measurement
    Role of patient and family education
    Treatment of nonsurgical pain
    22. Physical Medicine and Rehabili.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gisèle Pickering, Stephen Gibson, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the reciprocal interactions between pain, emotion and cognition. International experts report on their findings, clinical experience and the most recent literature on the complex relations between these three domains. Clinical, psychological, behavioral and neuroimaging approaches converge towards aiding patients suffering from pain, cognitive impairment or emotional distress. Beyond the pathophysiological aspects of pain, difficulties encountered with patients are analyzed and strategies are proposed to optimize treatment, doctor-patient relationships, and patient well-being. This work will appeal to a broad readership, from clinical medical practitioners to psychologists, nurses and pain specialists.

    Contents:
    Part I Nociception, Pain, Emotion and Cognition Interconnections
    Cognitive Psychology and Neuropsychology of Nociception and Pain
    Emotional Aspects of Chronic Pain
    Cerebral and Spinal Modulation of Pain by Emotions and Attention
    Understanding the Suffering of Others: The Sources and Consequences of Third-person Pain
    Neuroplasticity in the Pain, Emotion and Cognition Nexus
    Part II Measurement Issues
    Tools that Should be Considered in Pain Assessment: Cognitive Factors, Emotion and Personality
    Pain Evaluation in Patients with Cognitive Impairment
    Behavioural/Facial Markers of Pain, Emotion, Cognition
    Part III Management Issues
    Pharmacological Pain Management: For Better or for Worse?
    Psychological Approaches to the Management of Pain, Cognition and Emotion
    Physical Therapy and Exercise: Impacts on Pain, Mood, Cognition, and Function
    Part IV Special Populations
    Phantom Pain: The Role of Maladaptive Plasticity, Emotional and Cognitive Variables
    Pain in Parkinson Patients
    Clinical Pain in Schizophrenia, a Forgotten Area
    The Pain, Emotion and Cognition Nexus in Older Persons and in Dementia.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Sanjong Pangarkar, Quynh G. Pham, Blessen C. Eapen.
    Summary: "Covering the newest trends and treatments in pain care, as well as the pain treatment strategies that have been successfully employed in the past, Pain Care Essentials and Innovations brings you fully up to date with effective treatments for acute and chronic pain. It offers expert guidance on both interventional and non-interventional strategies, provided by respected academic physicians who practice evidence-based medicine at major universities and affiliated ACGME-accredited Pain Medicine Training programs"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Basic science of pain
    Headache
    Central pain syndromes
    Visceral pain: mechanisms, syndromes, and treatment
    Neuropathic pain
    Musculoskeletal pain
    Palliative care and cancer pain
    Complementary and integrative health
    Pain and addiction
    Geriatric pain management
    Cannabis in pain
    Inpatient pain
    Pain care essentials: interventional pain
    Rehabilitation in pain medicine
    Comorbid chronic pain and posttraumatic stress disorder: current knowledge, treatments, and future directions
    Opioids in pain
    Regenerative medicine
    Future research in pain.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Digital
    Hans-Georg Schaible, editor.
    Contents:
    Emerging concepts of pain therapy based on neuronal mechanisms
    The pharmacology of nociceptor priming
    Sodium channels and pain
    Role of nerve growth factor in pain
    Central sensitization in humans: assessment and pharmacology
    Nitric oxide-mediated pain processing in the spinal cord
    The role of the endocannabinoid system in pain
    The role of glia in the spinal cord in neuropathic and inflammatory pain
    Plasticity of inhibition in the spinal cord
    Modulation of peripheral inflammation by the spinal cord
    The relationship between opiods and immune signalling in the spinal cord
    The role of proteases in pain
    Amygdala pain mechanisms
    Itch and pain differences and commonalities
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Kanishka Rajput, Nalini Vadivelu, Alan David Kaye, Rinoo Vasant Shah, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of the, challenges, risk, stratification, and approaches and techniques needed to improve pain control in ambulatory surgery centers (ASCs). It addresses not only the management of acute perioperative pain but also describes modalities that could potentially reduce the risk of evolution of acute pain into chronic pain, in addition to weaning protocols and follow ups with primary surgical specialties and pain physicians as needed. Organized into five sections, the book begins with the foundations of managing ASCs, with specific attention paid to the current opioid epidemic and U.S. policies relating to prescribing opioids to patients. Section two and three then explore facets of multimodal analgesia and non-operating room locations, including the use of ultrasounds, sedation in specific procedures, regional anesthesia, ketamine infusions, and the management of perioperative nausea and intractable pain in outpatient surgery. Section four examines the unique challenges physicians face with certain patient demographics, such as the pediatric population, those suffering from sleep apnea, and those with a history of substance abuse. The book closes with information on discharge considerations, ambulatory surgery protocols, recovery room protocols, and mandatory pain management services. An invaluable reference for all health personnel and allied specialties, Pain Control in Ambulatory Surgery Centers (ASCs) meets the unmet need for a resource that covers optimum pain control in patients undergoing outpatient surgery as well as the urgent ASCs challenges that are presented on an immense scale with national and international impact. .

    Contents:
    Academic and Non-academic Ambulatory Surgery Centers and Hospital Outpatient Departments
    Opioid Epidemic
    Current US Policy for Opioid Prescribing
    Rationale and Goals for Optimal Pain Control in ASCs
    Challenges of Pain Control in Ambulatory Surgery Setting
    Assessment and Optimization of Available Resources for Pain Control
    Benefits of optimum pain control in ASCs
    Structuring Pain Control Regimens in ASCs
    Preoperative Planning
    Comprehensive Pain Management: Opioid Naïve Vs Opioid Tolerant
    Risks and Benefits of Opioids in Chronic/Cancer Pain
    Maximization of non-opioid multimodal therapy in ASCs
    Use of Ultrasound in an Ambulatory Setting
    Use of Regional anesthesia/Neuraxial anesthesia in ASCs
    Ketamine infusions
    Management of Perioperative Nausea and Intractable Pain in Outpatient Surgery
    Sedation for Interventional Pain Procedures
    Sedation and Analgesia for GI Procedures
    Management of Perioperative Pain for IR Procedures
    Management of Perioperative Pain for Bronchoscopy
    Perioperative management of obstructive sleep apnea patients in an ambulatory setting
    Special Considerations
    Management of Pediatric Pain in an Ambulatory Setting
    Pain management in former addicts on MAT (Medication assisted treatment)
    Special Considerations
    Medical Marijuana and Active Substance Abuse
    Special Considerations
    Indwelling Intrathecal Pumps and Spinal Cord Stimulators
    Discharge from Recovery Room in Ambulatory Surgery Centers
    Recovery Room Protocols for nursing in ASCs and HOPDs
    Weaning protocols for Ambulatory Surgery
    Role of a Focused Ambulatory Pain Specialist
    Inclusion of mandatory pain management services in ASCs
    New Vistas: Opioid Sparing Multimodal Therapy in the Post-Operative Period. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Inna Belfer, Luda Diatchenko.
    Contents:
    How do pain genes affect pain experience? / Marshall Devor
    Conservation of pain genes across evolution / Thang Manh Khuong and G. Greg Neely
    Defining human pain phenotypes for genetic association studies / Christopher Sivert Nielsen
    Genetic contributions to pain and analgesia : interactions with sex and stress / Roger B. Fillingim and Jeffrey S. Mogil
    Monogenic pain disorders / Geoff Woods
    Alternative pre-mRNAsplicing of mu opioid receptor gene: molecular mechanisms underlying the complex actions of mu opioids / Ying-Xian Pan
    Discovering multi-locus associations with complex pain phenotypes / Chia-Ling Kuo, Luda Diatchenko, Dmitri Zaykin
    Overlapping phenotypes : genetic contribution to nausea and pain / Charles C. Horn
    A counterpart to pain : itch / Adam P. Kardon and Sarah E. Ross
    Translating genetic knowledge into clinical practice for musculoskeletal pain conditions / Luda Diatchenko, Shad B. Smith, William Maixner
    The human chronic pain phenome : mapping non-genetic modifiers of the heritable risk / Ze'ev Seltzer, Scott R. Diehl, Hance Clarke and Joel Katz.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Maria Assunta Cova, Fulvio Stacul, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses all pain imaging aspects related to both the central nervous system and the body (thorax, abdomen and pelvis), thus updating the international literature on the topic. By adopting a clinical-radiological approach and offering a comprehensive differential diagnosis for a number of painful syndromes (many of which can mimic one other), the work aims to support and enhance the diagnostic management of these patients, suggesting the most appropriate diagnostic algorithm. The book is divided into separate sections for each anatomical macro-area, and the chapters cover the respective topics from both clinical and radiological perspectives. Further, the book includes extensive electronic supplementary material. As such, it offers an invaluable tool for radiologists, neuroradiologists and clinicians working in internal medicine, surgery and neurology, and could also be used in residency programs for these group.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents;
    1: Mechanisms of Pain; 1.1 Peripheral Mechanisms; 1.2 Spinal Mechanisms; 1.3 Central Mechanisms and Pain Matrix; References;
    2: Brain Imaging of Pain; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Structural and Functional Neuroimaging Techniques; 2.2.1 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); 2.2.2 Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI); 2.2.3 PET; 2.2.4 MEG; 2.2.5 NIRS; 2.3 Structural Neuroimaging of Pain; 2.3.1 Central Post Stroke Pain; 2.3.2 Multiple Sclerosis; 2.4 Functional Neuroimaging of Pain; 2.4.1 Pain Network and Connectivity; 2.4.2 Pain in Infants 2.4.3 Chronic Pain2.4.4 Phantom Limb Pain (PLP); References;
    3: Headache: Clinical Features; 3.1 Primary Headaches; 3.1.1 Migraine; 3.1.1.1 Premonitory Phase; 3.1.1.2 Aura; Types of Aura Symptoms; Visual Aura; Sensory Aura; Language Aura; Motor Aura; Less Typical Aura Symptoms; 3.1.1.3 Headache; 3.1.1.4 Postdrome; 3.1.2 Tension-Type Headache; 3.1.3 Trigeminal Autonomic Cephalalgias (TACS); 3.1.3.1 Cluster Headache; 3.1.3.2 Paroxysmal Hemicrania; 3.1.4 SUNCT/SUNA; 3.1.4.1 Hemicrania Continua; 3.1.5 Other Primary Headache Disorders; 3.1.5.1 Primary Cough Headache 3.1.6 Primary Exercise Headache3.1.7 Primary Headache Associated with Sexual Activity; 3.1.8 Primary Thunderclap Headache; 3.1.9 Other Primary Headache Disorders; 3.2 Secondary Headaches; 3.2.1 Subarachnoid Haemorrhage; 3.2.2 Intracerebral Haemorrhage; 3.2.3 Cerebral Venous Thrombosis; 3.2.4 Cervical Artery Dissection; 3.2.5 Brain Tumours; 3.2.6 Intracranial Infections; References;
    4: Imaging of Headache; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Imaging Modalities; 4.3 Imaging Findings; 4.3.1 Primary Headaches; 4.3.1.1 Migraine; Hemiplegic Migraine; Retinal Migraine; Chronic Migraine Migrainous Infarction4.3.1.2 Tension-Type Headache (TTH); 4.3.1.3 Trigeminal Autonomic Cephalalgias (TACs); 4.3.2 Secondary Headaches; 4.3.2.1 Headache Attributed to Trauma or Injury to the Head and/or Neck; 4.3.2.2 Headache Attributed to Cranial or Cervical Vascular Disorder; Ischemic Stroke; Subarachnoid Hemorrhage (SAH); Other Intracranial Hemorrhages; Cervical Carotid or Vertebral Artery Dissection; Cerebral Venous Sinus Thrombosis (CVST); Reversible Vasoconstriction Syndrome (RCVS); Cerebral Autosomal Dominant Arteriopathy with Subcortical Infarcts and Leukoencephalopathy (CADASIL) 4.3.2.3 Headache Attributed to Nonvascular Intracranial DisordersSpontaneous Intracranial Hypotension; Increased Cerebrospinal Fluid Pressure; Intracranial Neoplasia; Chiari Malformation Type I; 4.3.2.4 Headache Attributed to Intracranial Infection; 4.3.2.5 Painful Cranial Neuropathies and Other Facial Pains; Glossopharyngeal Neuralgia; Tolosa-Hunt Syndrome; Optic Neuritis; References;
    5: Trigeminal Nerve: Clinical Features; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Pathophysiology; 5.3 Clinical Features; 5.3.1 Trigeminal Neuralgia; 5.3.2 Classical Trigeminal Neuralgia
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    volume editors, David P. Finn, Brian E. Leonard.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Rajesh Gupta.
    Summary: Pain management is a vast subject and is changing rapidly. Finding a good resource for learning, however, is difficult. Most of the available books are lengthy volumes including many details irrelevant to physicians sitting for examinations or assessment. Furthermore, books aimed at assisting preparation for entire anaesthesia exams typically address pain management in only one chapter or a few pages. This book covers the entire curriculum relating to pain management and will make it easy to learn all aspects of the subject by covering key concepts in a reader-friendly manner. It comprises nine concise and simple chapters that aim to impart the maximum information within a limited space. These chapters address anatomy, assessment of pain, diagnosis of pain, pharmacology, non-pharmacological pain management, acute and chronic pain management, pain management in special groups, and special techniques. Pain Management: Essential Topics for Examinations will be an ideal resource for those who plan to sit for examinations, wherever they are based in the world. In addition, it will be an invaluable reference for higher and advanced pain trainees, residents, and physicians working in chronic pain.

    Contents:
    Pain Pathway
    Nociceptors
    Pain Processing
    Neuropathic Pain
    Patient Evaluation
    Assessment and Measurement of Acute Pain
    Psychological Assessment of Chronic Pain
    Assessment of Neuropathic Pain
    Pain Assessment in Paediatrics
    Assessment of Pain in Elderly
    Imaging
    Sodium Channels
    Potassium and Calcium Channels
    Serotonergic Receptors
    Glutamate and GABA Receptors
    Opioids
    Opioids-Clinical Use
    Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs
    NSAIDs 2
    Antidepressants
    Anticonvulsants
    Topical Agents
    Miscellaneous Drugs
    Placebo and Nocebo Effect
    Acupuncture
    Biofeedback
    Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
    Burns
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Painful Neuropathies
    Phantom Pain Syndromes
    CRPS
    Postherpetic Neuralgia
    Central Pain Syndromes
    Headache
    Fibromyalgia
    Trigeminal Neuralgia
    Pain Management and Substance Abuse
    Epidemiology and Mechanisms of Cancer Pain
    Assessment of Cancer Pain
    Breakthrough Pain
    Mucositis
    Lumbar Radiculopathy
    Lumbar Facet Joint Pain
    Lumbar Spinal Stenosis
    Lumbar Discogenic Pain
    Sacroiliac Joint Pain
    Piriformis Syndrome
    Cervical Radiculopathy
    Cervical Facet Pain
    Radiofrequency Treatment
    Spinal Cord Stimulation.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kimberly A. Sackheim, editor.
    Contents:
    I. Evaluation of the Pain Patient
    Physiology of Pain
    Obtaining a Pain History
    Physical Exam: Approach to the Pain Patient
    Diagnostic Imaging
    Painful Surgical Referrals and Emergencies
    Urine Toxicology Screen
    Opioid Overdose and Withdrawal
    Detoxification From Opiates and Benzodiazepines
    Discharging the Non-Compliant Patient
    II. Medication Management for the Pain Patient
    Non-steroidal Anti-inflammatory Drugs (NSAIDs)
    Muscle Relaxants and Antispasticity Medications
    Neuropathic Antidepressant Medications
    Neuropathic Anticonvulsant Medications
    Opioid Medications
    Topical Analgesic Medications
    III. Clinical Care for the Pain Patient
    Headache
    Facial Pain
    Post Herpetic Neuralgia
    Joint Pain
    Post-Amputation Pain
    Spinal Pain
    Chronic Pelvic and Abdominal Pain
    Neuropathic pain
    Complex Regional Pain Syndrome (CRPS)
    Fibromyalgia
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Cancer Pain
    Palliative Care
    Hospice Medicine
    IV. Pain Management in Patients with Special Circumstances
    Pain Management in Patients with Renal Impairment
    Pain Management in Patients with Hepatic Impairment
    Pain Management During Pregnancy and Breast Feeding
    Pain Management in Geriatric Patients
    Acute Post-Surgical Pain and PCA Management
    V. Interventional Management for the Pain Patient
    Hematologic-altering Medications and Spinal Injections
    Injections in Patient?s with Bleeding Risks and Comorbid Conditions
    Spinal Procedure Injectables
    Radiation Safety and Monitoring
    Cervical Injections
    Thoracic Injections
    Lumbar Injections
    Sacral Injections
    Sympathetic Block Injections
    Neuromodulation
    Intrathecal Drug Delivery Systems
    Joint, Tendon and Nerve Injections
    Regenerative Injection Therapy
    Injection Complications and Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Carl Edward Noe, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on the modern clinical management of acute and chronic pain syndromes. It not only presents information in a clinically illuminating format, but in a manner that is cognizant of the current prescription opioid epidemic. Divided into seven sections, this book covers acute pain, common pain conditions, regional pain problems, interdisciplinary evaluation and treatment, medical treatments and pain in different stages of life. Concluding with the exploration of several special topics, the last section includes an important discussion on the regulatory and legal issues in the use of controlled substances. Chapters are concise and relevant, with an emphasis on treatment based upon evidence from clinical trials and interpretation by practitioners in the field. Expertly written text is further supplemented by high-quality figures, images and tables outlining proven treatments with drug, dose or other information describing details of treatment. Timely, informative, and socially conscious, Pain Management for Clinicians: A Guide to Assessment and Treatment is a valuable reference for clinicians who manage patients with chronic and common pain problems.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Introduction
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Acute Pain
    Chapter 1: Pain Assessment and Treatment for the Trauma and Burn Patient
    Pain Management of the Trauma Patient
    Introduction
    Traumatic Pain Pathologies
    Assessment of Pain in the Trauma Patient
    Opioid Medications
    Non-opioid Medications
    Interventional Pain Procedures
    Non-pharmacological Interventions
    Special Populations
    Summary of Treatments for Trauma Pain (Tables 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4)
    Pain Management for the Burn Patient
    Introduction
    Burn Insult Classification Steroids
    Local Anesthetics
    Gabapentinoids
    Ketamine
    Alpha-2-agonists
    Opioids
    Beta-Blockers
    Potentially Helpful Agents with Less Evidence
    Nonpharmacologic Treatments that May Be Useful
    Future Perioperative Pain Management Modalities
    Opioid-Free Analgesia?
    Charts
    Evidence-Based Treatment
    Strong Evidence
    Weak or Insufficient Evidence
    Emerging or Promising Treatments
    Timing Basic Options
    Enhanced Recovery After Surgery Example Pain Management Protocols
    Inguinal Hernia Repair (Ambulatory: Mild to Moderate Pain Anticipated) Laparoscopic Cholecystectomy (Ambulatory: Moderate Pain Anticipated)
    Open Reduction Internal Fixation Calcaneus (Ambulatory: Severe Pain Anticipated)
    Multilevel Spine Fusion (Hospitalized: Severe pain, Opioid tolerance, and Comorbid Conditions Anticipated)
    Open Thoracotomy (Hospitalized: Severe Pain and Comorbid Conditions Anticipated)
    References
    Chapter 3: Inpatient Pain Management
    Acute Pain Service with Regional and Neuraxial Blocks
    Upper Extremity Pain
    Thoracic Pain
    Abdominal Pain
    Lower Extremity
    Summary of Treatment Principles and Methods Formulation of Individualized Treatment and Rehabilitation Plan
    Evaluation of Medications for Effectiveness, Side Effects, Dependency, and Interactions
    Medications
    Classes of Medications
    Antiepileptics
    Opioids
    Treatment of the Psychological Distress that Often Accompanies Intractable Pain
    Relaxation Training
    Biofeedback
    Group Therapy
    Family Involvement
    Medications
    Serotonin-Norepinephrine Reuptake Inhibitors (SNRIs)
    Tricyclic Antidepressants (TCAs)
    Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors (SSRIs)
    Physical Function/Behavior Modification
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gisèle Pickering, Sandra Zwakhalen, Sharon Kaasalainen, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses relevant issues to enhance pain management nurses need to advocate for effective pain treatment in the elderly. Significant changes in the evolving nursing and healthcare environment require adequate information on this topic, as pain is a very challenging area. As other care professionals, nurses are daily confronted with issues on pain assessment and management. This volume offers an overview within an evolving health environment, in which nurses dealing with pain play a growing role. It showcases best practices in pain assessment and management, details non pharmacological and pharmacological treatments. It also addresses core issues defined by the International Association for the Study of Pain (IASP), such as knowledge translation, that are most relevant for clinical nurses, student nurses, nurse researchers as well as other care professionals.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Charles E. Argoff, Andrew Dubin, Julie Pilitsis.
    Summary: "For more than 30 years, the highly regarded Secrets Series® has provided students and practitioners in all areas of health care with concise, focused, and engaging resources for quick reference and exam review. Pain Management Secrets, 4th Edition, features the Secrets' popular question-and-answer format that also includes lists, tables, and an easy-to-read style - making reference and review quick, easy, and enjoyable"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    I. Overview. Definitions
    Classification of pain
    Basic mechanisms
    Topiceuticals
    II. Clinical approach. History taking in the patient with pain
    Physical examination of the patient with pain
    Pain measurement
    Psychological assessment of chronic patients
    III. Clinical syndromes defined by pain. Neuroimaging in the patient with pain
    Tension-type headache
    Migraine
    Cluster headache
    The paroxysmal hemicranias
    Subarachnoid hemorrhage
    Brain tumor headaches
    Increased and decreased intracranial pressure
    Temporal giant cell arteritis
    Headaches associated with systemic disease
    Trigeminal neuralgia
    Glossopharyngeal and other facial neuralgias
    Low back pain
    Neck and arm pain
    Abdominal pain
    Chronic pelvic pain
    Fibromyalgia and myofascial pain
    IV. Syndromes in which pain is a significant component. Postoperative pain management
    Cancer pain syndrome
    Pain in rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis
    Neuropathic pain
    V. Psychological syndromes
    VI. Special patient populations. Pain in children
    Pain in the older patient
    VII. Pharmacologic management. Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
    Opioid analgesics
    Addiction and pain management
    Regulatory issues
    Adjuvant analgesics
    VIII. Nonpharmologic management. Temporary neural blockade
    Permanent neural blockade and chemical ablation
    Sympathetic neural blockade
    Intraspinal opioids
    Neurostimulatory and neuorablative pocedures
    Psychological constructs and treatment interventions
    Physical modalities: adjunctive treatments to reduce pain and maximize function
    Pain clinics
    Interventional pain management
    Complementary and alternative medicine.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2018
  • Digital
    R. Jason Yong, Michael Nguyen, Ehren Nelson, Richard D. Urman, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Charlotte Allerton.
    Summary: This book presents a contemporary review of the field of Pain Therapeutics, including the historical medicines which still dominate standard of care treatments, as well as the new mechanisms and combinations/reformulations that have dominated the regulatory approvals over the last decade. In addition this book provides a deep review of the key biological mechanisms currently under investigation for their utility into the treatment of pain, such as ion channels, opiates and others. Additional discussion highlights the current challenges of pain research, covering a range of topics from difficulties in identifying new targets from pre-clinical models to the current regulatory and commercial challenges. This background sets the scene for recent scientific changes in pain research, such as the drive for genetic validation of targets and the derivation of human cell platforms from stem cells. Finally the book covers the discovery and development stories for two pain products approved in the last decade. These case studies for Lyrica and the Butrans patch, will give insight into the discovery and development challenges and successes for both an oral and non-oral product.
    Digital Access R Soc Chem 2014
  • Digital
    Michael D. Stein and Sandro Galea.
    Summary: "As a country, the United States overinvests in medical care, often at the expense of the social, economic, and cultural forces that produce health. Indeed, the rise of medicine as a cornerstone of American life and culture has coincided with a social and political devaluation of factors demonstrated to mean more to one's vitality than anything else-influences like where one lives, works, and plays; livable wages that create opportunity for healthy living; and gender and racial equity. As such, this book pushes the conversation around American health toward matters of class, money, and culture. It highlights how the structural components of everyday life ultimately determine who gets to be healthy in today's America. In doing so, it makes a case for reframing the political discourse on public health in less myopic, more effectual terms"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Oxford 2020
  • Digital
    Lynn R. Webster.
    Contents:
    It's personal : pain as a human experience
    More than a survivor : the resiliency of hope
    Caught in a web : the complexity of pain
    Friendly fire : rejecting stigma
    The new scarlet letter : addiction and recovery
    Soul mates : love amid pain
    The God prescription : spirituality and pain
    Everyday saints and unsung heroes : caregiving and care receiving
    Coming of age : self-advocacy
    The chilling effect : opioids and law enforcement
    A human right : toward curing.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Antonio L. Dans, Leonila F. Dans, Maria Asuncion A. Silvestre.
    Contents:
    Evaluation of articles on therapy
    Evaluation of articles on diagnosis
    Evaluation of articles on harm
    Evaluation of articles on prognosis
    Evaluation of systematic reviews
    Evaluation of clinical practice guidelines
    Evaluation of articles on screening
    Literature searches.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Charlotte Lindqvist and Om P. Rajora.
    Summary: Advances in genome-scale DNA sequencing technologies have revolutionized genetic research on ancient organisms, extinct species, and past environments. When it is recoverable after hundreds or thousands of years of unintended preservation, "ancient DNA" (or aDNA) is often highly degraded, necessitating specialized handling and analytical approaches. Paleogenomics defines the field of reconstructing and analyzing the genomes of historic or long-dead organisms, most often through comparison with modern representatives of the same or similar species. The opportunity to isolate and study paleogenomes has radically transformed many fields, spanning biology, anthropology, agriculture, and medicine. Examples include understanding evolutionary relationships of extinct species known only from fossils, the domestication of plants and animals, and the evolution and geographical spread of certain pathogens. This pioneering book presents a snapshot view of the history, current status, and future prospects of paleogenomics, taking a broad viewpoint that covers a range of topics and organisms to provide an up-to-date status of the applications, challenges, and promise of the field. This book is intended for a variety of readerships, including upper-level undergraduate and graduate students, professionals and experts in the field, as well as anyone excited by the extraordinary insights that paleogenomics offers.

    Contents:
    Part1. Concepts, Technical Advances and Challenges
    Chapter1. Technical Advances and Challenges in Genome-Scale Analysis of Ancient DNA
    Chapter2. Paleoproteomics: An Introduction to the Analysis of Ancient Proteins by Soft Ionization Mass Spectrometry
    Chapter3. Ancient RNA
    Chapter4. Ancient Epigenomics
    Part2.
    Chapter5. Ancient Pathogens Through Human History: A Paleogenomic Perspective
    Chapter6. Paleovirology: Viral Sequences from Historical and Ancient DNA
    Chapter7. Reconstructing Past Vegetation Communities Using Ancient DNA from Lake Sediments
    Chapter8. Archaeogenomics and Crop Adaptation
    Chapter9. Herbarium Genomics: Plant Archival DNA Explored
    Chapter10. Paleogenomics of Animal Domestication
    Chapter11. Paleogenomic Inferences of Dog Domestication
    Chapter12. Of Cats and Men: Ancient DNA Reveals How the Cat Conquered the Ancient World
    Chapter13. An Ancient DNA Perspective on Horse Evolution
    Chapter14. Primate Paleogenomics
    Chapter15. Structural Variants in Ancient Genomes
    Chapter16. Genomics of Extinction.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Michel Drancourt, Didier Raoult.
    Summary: "Only recently was it determined that two of the world's most devastating plagues, the plague of Justinian and the medieval Black Death, were caused by distinct strains of the same pathogen. Use of paleomicrobiological techniques led to this discovery. This work is just one example of the historical mysteries that this emerging field has helped to clarify. Others, such as when tuberculosis began to afflict humans, the role of lice in plague pandemics, and the history of smallpox, are explored and further illuminated in Paleomicrobiology of Humans. Led by editors Michel Drancourt and Didier Raoult, the book's expert contributors address larger issues using paleomicrobiology. These include the recognition of human remains associated with epidemic outbreaks, identification of the graves associated with disasters, and the discovery of demographic structures that reveal the presence of an epidemic moment. In addition, this book reviews the technical approaches and controversies associated with recovering and sequencing very old DNA and surveys modern human diseases that have ancient roots."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    1. Demographic Patterns Distinctive of Epidemic Cemeteries in Archaeological Samples / Sacha Kacki
    2. Characterization of the Funeral Groups Associated with Plague Epidemics / Michel Signoli
    3. Paleogenetics and Past Infections: the Two Faces of the Coin of Human Immune Evolution / Didier Raoult
    4. A Personal View of How Paleomicrobiology Aids Our Understanding of the Role of Lice in Plague Pandemics / Didier Raoult
    5. Sources of materials for Paleomicrobiology / Gerard Aboudharam
    6. Paleomicrobiology Data: Authentification and Interpretation / Michel Drancourt
    7. Human Coprolites as a Source for Paleomicrobiology / Matthieu Le Bailly
    8. Ancient Resistome / Jean-Marc Rolain
    9. The History Of Epidemic Typhus / Didier Raoult
    10. Paleopathology of Human Infections: Old Bones, Antique Books, Ancient and Modern Molecules / Olivier Dutour
    11. Past Bartonelloses / Pierre-Edouard Fournier
    12. Paleomicrobiology of Human Tuberculosis / Helen Donoghue
    13. Paleomicrobiology of Leprosy / Mark Spigelman and Mauro Rubini
    14. Past Intestinal Parasites / Matthieu Le Bailly and Adauto Araujo
    15. Paleopathology and Paleomicrobiology of Malaria / Andreas Nerlich
    16. History of Smallpox and Its Spread in Human Populations / Catherine Theves, Eric Crubezy, and Philippe Biagini
    17. Cholera / Donatella Lippi, Eduardo Gotuzzo, and Saverio Caini
    18. Human Lice in Paleoentomology and Paleomicrobiology / Rezak Drali, Kosta Y. Mumcuoglu, and Didier Raoult.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Howard H. Goldman, Richard G. Frank, Joseph P. Morrissey, editors.
    Summary: This handbook is the definitive resource for understanding current mental health policy controversies, options, and implementation strategies. It offers a thorough review of major issues in mental health policy to inform the policy-making process, presenting the pros and cons of controversial, significant issues through close analyses of data. Some of the topics covered are the effectiveness of various biomedical and psychosocial interventions, the role of mental illness in violence, and the effectiveness of coercive strategies. The handbook presents cases for conditions in which specialized mental health services are needed and those in which it might be better to deliver mental health treatment in mainstream health and social services settings. It also examines the balance between federal, state, and local authority, and the financing models for delivery of efficient and effective mental health services. It is aimed for an audience of policy-makers, researchers, and informed citizens that can contribute to future policy deliberations.

    Contents:
    Machine generated contents note: 1. Mental Health Policy: Fundamental Reform or Incremental Change?
    2. Division of Labor: Function Shifts and Realigned Responsibilities in the Evolving Mental Health Services System / Joseph P. Morrissey / Howard H. Goldman
    3. Economic Perspectives on the Organization and Governance of Mental Health Care / Joseph P. Morrissey / Howard H. Goldman
    4. What Is the Meaning of Recovery? / Richard G. Frank / Sherry A. Glied
    5. Balancing Access to Medications and Psychosocial Treatments / Larry Davidson / Timothy Schmutte
    6. Are There Enough Inpatient Psychiatric Beds? / Patricia A. Aredn / Anna Ratzliff
    7. Mandated Community Treatment in Services for Persons with Mental Illness / Marisa Elena Domino / Eric Slade
    8. Shared Decision-Making and Self-Directed Care / Marvin S. Swartz / Jeffrey W. Swanson
    9. Suicide Prevention: Rising Rates and New Evidence Shape Policy Options / Michelle P. Salyers / Yaara Zisman-Ilani
    10. How Should the United States Respond to the Opioid Addiction and Overdose Epidemic? / Michael F. Hogan
    11. Early Intervention in Psychosis: From Science to Services / Keith Humphreys / Harold A. Pollack
    12. Policy Effects on Mental Health Status and Mental Health Care Disparities / Thomas E. Smith / Lisa B. Dixon
    13. Mental Health Insurance Parity: How Full Is the Glass? / Rupinder K. Legha / Lonnie R. Snowden / Jeanne Miranda
    14. Housing for People with Serious Mental Illness / Haiden A. Huskamp
    15. What Is the Role of Schools in the Treatment of Children's Mental Illness? / Josh Leopold
    16. Policy Issues Regarding Employment for People with Serious Mental Illness / Jeff Q. Bostic / Libby K. Nealis / Sharon A. Hoover
    17. Adults with Serious Mental Illnesses Who Are Arrested and Incarcerated / Gary R. Bond / Ellen R. Meara / Robert E. Drake
    18. Gun Violence Prevention and Mental Health Policy / Fred Osher / Michael Thompson
    19. Stigma as a Mental Health Policy Controversy: Positions, Options, and Strategies for Change / Marvin S. Swartz / Colleen L. Barry / Jeffrey W. Swanson
    20. How Shall We Promote Citizenship and Social Participation? / Bernice A. Pescosolido
    21. Evidence-Based Practices or Practice-Based Evidence: What Is the Future? / Michael Rowe / Allison N. Ponce
    22. New Financing Models in Behavioral Health: A Recipe for Efficiency or Under-Provision? / Marcela Horvitz-Lennon
    23. Mental Health Disability, Employment, and Income Support in the Twenty-First Century / Thomas G. McGuire.
  • Digital
    Michael Silbermann, editor.
    Summary: Palliative Care for Chronic Cancer Patients in the Community: Global Approaches and Future Applications offers a much-needed account of the current state of global palliative care in the community - the good, the bad and, especially, the hopeful. This extraordinary compendium, with chapters form 46 countries, edited by Professor Michael Silbermann, tells the remarkable stories of palliative care - from grass-root efforts by volunteers in resource-constrained countries such as India to the full integration of palliative care in high-resource countries such as the United States, the United Kingdom, New Zealand and Australia. What is so unique about this book is that it captures the enormous range and diversity of palliative care efforts: some led by nurses (Iran), some led by governments (Turkey) and many led by local charities and non-governmental agencies. Readers of this textbook can also learn about the challenges of a government-led palliative care initiative in the post-genocide era in Rwanda or the attempts to provide palliative care services in the conflict zones of Iraq, Palestine and Sudan. Contextual issues requiring cultural sensitivity in Afghanistan, Latin America and the Middle East present a real picture of both the exceptional leadership and environmental hardships that palliative care advocates face in their journeys forward. Each of the 53 chapters in the book tells a narrative of the country's own experience, thus creating a source of on the ground information outlining the barriers, challenges and successes as individual efforts progress. Many reports in the book point toward real change and hope as they relate to healthcare providers becoming empowered advocates for their patients. There are high expectations for the role of nurses to continue to grow. Educating and engaging patients, and the families in their care, has had a measurably positive impact on outcomes. The collaborative spirit of this book gives voice to the incredible vision, tenacity and resilience of the teams of professionals and their supporters who work in palliative care, particularly those who work in the community. In addition, it underscores that all future efforts can only be successful with the concerted and continuous commitments of governments, academics and NGOs across and within national boundaries. - HRH Princess Dina Mired President - Union for International Cancer Control (UICC).
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Lieve Van den Block, Gwenda Albers, Sandra Martins Pereira, Bregje Onwuteaka-Philipsen, Roeline Pasman, and Luc Deliens.
    Summary: One of the most challenging roles of the psycho-oncologist is to help guide terminally-ill patients through the physical, psychological, and spiritual aspects of the dying process. Patients with cancer, AIDS, and other life-threatening illnesses are at increased risk for the development of major psychiatric complications, and have an enormous burden of both physical and psychological symptoms. Concepts of adequate palliative care must be expanded beyond the current focus on pain and physical symptom control to include the psychiatric, psychosocial, existential, and spiritual aspects of care. The psycho-oncologist, as a consultant to or member of a palliative care team, has a unique role and opportunity to fulfill this promise of competent and compassionate palliative care for those with life-threatening illnesses. Psychosocial Palliative Care guides the psycho-oncologist through the most salient aspects of effective psychiatric care of patients with advanced illnesses. This handbook reviews basic concepts and definitions of palliative care and the experience of dying, the assessment and management of major psychiatric complications of life-threatening illness, including psychopharmacologic and psychotherapeutic approaches, and covers issues such as bereavement, spirituality, cultural sensitivity, communication and psychiatric contributions to common physical symptom control. A global perspective on death and palliative care is taken throughout the text, and an Appendix provides a comprehensive list of international palliative care resources and training programs. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Palliative Care for Older People : An introduction
    A public health perspective to palliative care for older people: An introduction
    Organization of and policies for palliative care for older people
    Long-term Care Systems
    Development of palliative care in long-term care
    Development of integrated person-centred care in long-term care
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Africa
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Asia
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Australia
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Europe
    Policies on palliative care for older people in North America
    Policies on palliative care for older people in Latin America and the Caribbean
    Socio-cultural and clinical context of dying in old age
    Dying in place in old age: public health challenges
    Symptoms and trajectories experienced by older people approaching and at the end of life: Implications to care
    End-of-life decisions for older patients who are approaching death
    Ethical issues in palliative care for older people
    Cultural issues in palliative care for older people
    Spirituality and spiritual palliative care in older people
    Use and access of palliative care for older people
    Use of generalist and specialist palliative care for older people
    Compassionate communities: Caring for older people towards the end of life
    Palliative care for older people with dementia
    Collaboration between professionals as a necessary condition for palliative care
    Communication and advanced care planning (ACP) in older people
    Innovations in palliative care for older people
    EU civil society initiatives to protect the right to live and die in dignity
    Care pathways for older people in need of palliative care
    A program for advance care planning for older people: Respecting Patient Choices
    Conclusion: What does a public health approach to improving palliative care in older people look like?
    A public health approach to improving palliative care for older people
    Digital Access Oxford 2015
  • Digital
    Massimo Romanò, editor.
    Summary: This book analyzes the main topics of Palliative Care in Cardiac Intensive Care Units (CICU), from the changing epidemiology of patients admitted to the ICU, to the main clinical and ethical issues. The changing epidemiology of patients has led to new and emerging patient needs at the end of life. Care has shifted from acute coronary syndrome patients towards elderly patients, with a high prevalence of non-ischemic cardiovascular diseases and a high burden of non-cardiovascular comorbid conditions: both increase the susceptibility of patients to developing life-threatening critical conditions. These conditions are associated with a significant symptom burden, high mortality rate, and increased length of stay. The main new challenges involve shared decision-making, symptom control (pain, dyspnea, etc.), and ethical issues (withholding/withdrawing life sustaining treatments, deactivation of implanted cardiac devices, palliative sedation), all of which necessitate formal education on end-of-life care. Written by opinion leaders in their respective fields, who share their experience with improving the cultural and clinical competence of medical/nursing teams, this volume is chiefly intended for cardiologists, anesthesiologists, palliative care doctors and nursing staff.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    About the Author
    1: Epidemiology and Patterns of Care in Modern Cardiac Intensive Care Units
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Is There a Background for the Evolution of CICU? From the Blitz-3 to Modern International CICU Registries
    1.3 Aging, Comorbidity, and the Risk of Futility in CICU
    1.4 The COVID-19 Tsunami and Its Effect on CICU
    1.5 Conclusions
    References
    2: The Intensive and Advanced Treatments in the Cardiac Intensive Care Units
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Cardiac Arrest and Post-cardiac Arrest Syndrome 2.3 Advanced Heart Failure and End-Stage Heart Failure
    2.4 Cardiogenic Shock (CS) and Low-Output Syndrome
    2.5 Mechanical Circulatory Supports (MCSs)
    2.6 Heart Replacement Therapies
    2.7 Cardiac Implanted Electronic Devices (CIEDs)
    2.8 Palliative Care in CICU
    2.9 Palliative Inotrope Care
    References
    3: Symptom Assessment and Management
    3.1 The Cardiologist's Palliative Competencies
    3.2 Measuring a Symptom
    3.2.1 Dyspnea
    3.2.2 Pain
    3.2.3 Thirst
    3.3 Cognitive and Mood Disorders
    3.3.1 Fatigue
    3.3.2 Gastrointestinal Symptoms
    References 4: The Meanings of Prognosis: When and How to Discuss It?
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Deciding Between Prognosis and Uncertainty
    4.3 Criteria for Prognosis Definition
    4.4 Communicating Prognosis
    4.5 Barriers to Communication
    4.5.1 The Disease
    4.5.2 The Patient
    4.5.3 Treatment Approach
    4.5.4 The Doctor
    4.6 Conclusions
    References
    5: Informed Consent, Advance Directives, and Shared Care Planning
    5.1 Introduction
    5.2 Legal and Ethical Aspects
    5.3 Shared Care Planning and Advance Directives in Cardiology
    5.4 Conclusions
    References 6: Withholding or Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatments
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Forgoing Life-Sustaining Treatments: The Clinical Practice
    6.3 Physician Preferences
    6.4 Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatment: Arguments in Favor
    6.5 Withholding Life-Sustaining Treatment: Arguments in Favor
    6.6 Withdrawing or Withholding Life-Sustaining Treatments: Means or Goals?
    6.7 Forgoing Life-Sustaining Treatments: How to Do
    6.7.1 Ethical Principles
    6.7.2 Decision to Forgo Life-Sustaining Treatments: Theoretical Approach 6.7.3 Decision to Forgo Life-Sustaining Treatments: The Goals
    6.7.4 Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatments: Basics in Clinical Practice
    6.8 Conclusions
    References
    7: Deactivation of Cardiac Implantable Electronic Devices (CIEDs) at the End of Life
    7.1 Introduction
    7.2 Implantable Cardioverter-Defibrillators (ICDs)
    7.2.1 Ethical Problems
    7.2.2 Information and Patient Awareness
    7.2.3 The Opinion of Physicians and Nurses
    7.3 Cardiac Pacemaker (PM)-Cardiac Resynchronisation Therapy-Pacemaker (CRT-P)
    7.4 Conclusions
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Kathleen O. Lindell, Sonye K. Danoff, editors.
    Summary: This book details the benefits of palliative care to improve the lives of patients with serious lung disease and their caregivers. Palliative care is specialized medical care for people living with a serious illness. This type of care is focused on providing relief from the symptoms and stress of a serious illness, and is often described as "an extra layer of support" for patients and their caregivers, as patients with malignant and nonmalignant lung disease experience great symptom burden and have advanced care planning needs. This book has three main objectives: Define the role of palliative care in advanced lung disease Incorporate a patient-centered perspective in describing symptom burden and interventions to improve quality of life Provide current initiatives to expand evidence-based practice and improve access to palliative care Written by leading experts in palliative care and respiratory medicine, the chapters seek to answer those objectives by first defining and describing palliative care, advanced lung disease, and inadequate palliative care in this patient population. Patient reported outcomes, quality of life, and interventions to help deal with the psychological toll of serious illness are then detailed, as well as pharmacological and non-pharmacological interventions for symptom management. Detailed information is additionally provided on current research studies and management for several lung diseases, including COPD, ILD, Lung Cancer, Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension, Neuromuscular disease, and pediatric lung disease. The more administrative aspects of palliative care programs are then covered with an example of a specialty palliative care program for advanced lung disease and advice on how to address policy that promotes palliative care. Finally, palliative care's role during a pandemic is thoughtfully considered. This book is an ideal guide for clinicians, nurses, hospital administrators, teachers, students to help them understand and fill unmet care needs that many patients with serious lung disease experience.

    Contents:
    Palliative Care in Lung Disease
    An Introduction to Advanced Lung Disease
    Inadequate Palliative Care in Lung Disease
    Patient-Centeredness & Patient Reported Measures (PRM) in Palliation of Lung Disease
    Quality of Life in Chronic Lung Disease
    Breathlessness
    Preparatory and anticipatory grief, anxiety and depression in life-limiting lung disease
    Symptom Management in Advanced Lung Disease
    Communication in Palliative Care
    Palliative Care in COPD
    Palliative care in interstitial lung disease
    The Role of Palliative Care in Lung Cancer
    Palliative care in patients with neuromuscular diseases
    Palliative Care in Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
    Palliative Care for Children with Lung Diseases
    Specialty Palliative Care Program ILD
    Withdrawal of Mechanical Ventilation: Considerations to Guide Patient and Family Centered Care and the Development of Health Care Policy
    Palliative Care during a Pandemic.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Bernd Alt-Epping, Friedemann Nauck, editors.
    Summary: Palliative care provides comprehensive support for severely affected patients with any life-limiting or life-threatening diagnosis. To do this effectively, it requires a disease-specific approach as the patients? needs and clinical context will vary depending on the underlying diagnosis. Experts in the field of palliative care and oncology describe in detail the needs of patients with advanced cancer in comparison to those with non-cancer disease and also identify the requirements of patients with different cancer entities. Basic principles of symptom control are explained, with careful attention to therapy for pain associated with either the cancer or its treatment and to symptom-guided antineoplastic therapy. Complex therapeutic strategies for palliative cancer patients are highlighted that involve both cancer- and symptom-directed options and address a range of therapeutic aims. Issues relating to drug use in palliative cancer care are fully explored, and a separate section is devoted to care in the final phase. A range of organizational and policy issues are also discussed, and the book concludes by considering likely future developments in palliative care for cancer patients. Palliative Care in Oncology will be of particular interest to palliative care physicians who are interested in broadening the scope of their disease-specific knowledge, as well as to oncologists who wish to learn more about modern palliative care concepts relevant to their day-to-day work with cancer patients.

    Contents:
    1. Disease-specific oncology - disease-specific palliative care
    2. Oncological and palliative care for patients with lung cancer and patients with breast cancer: two opposite ends of a spectrum
    3. Palliative care for patients with haematological malignancies
    4. Definition, pathophysiology, and assessment of pain
    5. Therapy of cancer-related pain and cancer therapy-related pain
    6. Radiation therapy in patients with non-curable cancer
    7. Symptom management: the nursing view
    8. The Liverpool Care pathway for the dying patient
    9. The final phase
    10. Options and problems of drug application in patients with advanced cancer
    11. Drug interactions in palliative cancer care and oncology
    12. Outpatient and inpatient structures: what does it need to integrate palliative care services?
    13. Early palliative care
    14. Psycho-oncology and palliative care: two concepts that fit into comprehensive cancer care
    15. Cancer therapy in developing countries: the role of palliative care
    16. Emergencies in oncology and crises in palliative care
    17. Palliative care for patients participating in experimental or clinical oncology studies
    18. The future of oncology palliative care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Joanne Wolfe, Barbara L. Jones, Ulrika Kreicbergs, Momcilo Jankovic, editors.
    Summary: This textbook is the first to focus on comprehensive interdisciplinary care approaches aimed at enhancing the wellbeing of children with cancer and their families throughout the illness experience. Among the topics addressed are the epidemiology of pediatric cancer distress, including physical, emotional, social, and spiritual dimensions; the role of the interdisciplinary team; communication and advance care planning; symptom prevention and management; care at the end of life; family bereavement care; and approaches to ease clinician distress. The contributing authors are true experts and provide guidance based on the highest available level of evidence in the field. The book has not only an interdisciplinary but also an international perspective; it will appeal globally to all clinicians caring for children with cancer, including physicians, nurses, psychosocial clinicians, and chaplains, among others.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of suffering in childhood cancer
    Impact of cancer on the child, parents, siblings and community.- The interdisciplinary oncology team and the role palliative care consultation.- Communication in pediatric palliative oncology
    The relationship between cancer-directed therapy and the pediatric oncology experience
    Easing physical distress
    Easing psychological distress
    Easing existential distress
    Easing social distress
    Care at the end of life
    Family bereavement Care
    Easing clinician distress.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Marianne Matzo, Deborah Witt Sherman.
    Summary: Palliative Care Nursing, Fifth Edition, delivers advanced empirical, aesthetic, ethical and personal knowledge. This new edition brings an increased focus on outcomes, benchmarking progress, and goals of care. It expounds upon the importance of the cross-disciplinary collaboration introduced in the previous edition. Every chapter in Sections I, II, and III includes content written by a non-nursing member of the interprofessional team. Based on best-evidence and clinical practice guidelines, this text presents comprehensive, targeted interventions responsive to the needs of palliative and hospice patients and family. Each chapter contains compassionate, timely, appropriate, and cost-effective care for diverse populations across the illness trajectory.

    Contents:
    Understanding Palliative Care
    Caring for the whole Person and His or Her Family
    Physical Health: Threatening Diseases
    Physical Health: Symptom management.
    Digital Access R2Library 2019
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    edited by Neha Vapiwala, Joshua Jones, Kavita Dharmarajan.
    Summary: Offering practical, comprehensive coverage of the many nuanced technical and clinical aspects of this growing field, Palliative Radiation Oncology provides up-to-date clinical guidance in a thorough yet concise manner. In an easy-access format, it integrates basic science, pathologies, and research with clinical applications, covering different ways to approach problems, tumor assessment, precise target definition, and dosing-specific guidelines to minimize side effects/toxicities while balancing with desired outcomes.

    Contents:
    Foundations and principles of palliative care in oncology
    Techniques and modalities
    Foundations and principles of palliative radiation by body site or special population
    Management of symptoms and treatment-related toxicities.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Kate Aberger, David Wang, editors.
    Summary: Rooted in everyday hospital medicine, Palliative Skills for Frontline Clinicians addresses the challenges of delivering complex care to patients living with serious illnesses. Spanning emergency medicine, internal medicine, surgery and various subspecialties, each chapter reads like a story, comparing usual care with a step-by-step palliative-based approach. This case-based book features a multidisciplinary, palliative-trained authorship, including neurologists, nephrologists, emergency physicians, surgeons, intensivists, and obstetricians. Divided into four parts, Palliative Skills for Frontline Clinicians outlines common clinical scenarios across settings and specialties to highlight unmet needs of patients with potentially terminal illnesses. Each case is broken down into the usual standard approach, and delves into detail regarding different palliative interventions that can be appropriate in those scenarios. These are meant to be practice changing; down to the actual words used to communicate with patients. In addition to the books focus on the principles of palliative care and the "art" of treating the patient, approaches to communication with the patients families for the best long-term outcomes are discussed. Concise and pragmatic, Palliative Skills for Frontline Clinicians is meant to be practice changing. It provides readers with both a new conceptual framework, as well as actual words to communicate with patients and medication doses for symptom management. It is an invaluable resource for non-palliative trained clinicians who wish to strengthen their palliative care skills.

    Contents:
    Part I: Emergency Medicine
    High Yield Approach to the ED Goals of Care Conversation
    A Palliative Approach to End Stage COPD
    This POLST Makes No Sense
    Treating Pain and Prognosticating in Metastatic Cancer
    Complex Pain Management and Goals of Care in a Debilitated Cancer Patient
    To Intubate or Not to Intubate: Ask the Right Questions
    ED Approach to the Hospice patient
    Part II: Inpatient Internal Medicine
    "We cant let him starve": Artificial Nutrition in Patients with Advanced Dementia
    Shared Decision-Making in the Setting of a Large Ischemic Stroke
    Prognostication and Goals of Care in Advanced Parkinsons Disease
    Saying Yes to Aggressive Measures: The Role of Neuropalliative Care in Critically Ill Patients with Potential for Recovery
    "I am a Fighter": Recognizing and Responding to Cancer Metaphors
    "What does the awake ventilated patient really want?": Shared-decision making in the ICU
    A Mothers Love
    Support Despite Disagreeing with Goals of Care
    End-Stage Renal Disease and Shared Decision-Making Dilemmas
    Discontinuing Continuous Renal Replacement Therapy (CRRT) in the Intensive Care Unit
    Teaching Learners How to Approach Family Decisions as a Process
    Part III: Surgery
    Trach/PEG Consult in the ICU
    Rescinding DNR Orders in the Operating Room
    A Threshold Moment, Preserving Patient Dignity, and the Value of a Time Limited Trial
    Between a Rock and a Hard Place: Anticipating Poor Surgical Outcomes while Honoring Patient Autonomy
    Surgery for the Hospice Patient: When is it Appropriate?
    Non-Operative Approach To Caring For The Ischemic Limb
    Placing a Feeding Tube in a Patient with Dementia
    Malignant Bowel Obstruction In A Dying Patient: To Operate Or Not?
    Geriatric Trauma Decision-Making Based on Functional Outcomes
    Part IV: Specialty Medicine
    Decision by Surrogates for a Patient with a Psychiatric History
    Palliative Approach to Patients with Concurrent Seriou s Illness and Substance Use Disorder
    Responding To Spiritual Suffering And Hope During A Goals Of Care Conversation
    Trisomy 18: Early And Concurrent Palliative Care Enhances Delivery And Neonatal Planning
    Navigating Colleagues and Parents in the Pediatric ICU.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Matthias W. Wichmann, Guy Maddern, editors.
    Summary: Palliative surgery can greatly contribute to improving symptom control and quality of life for terminal cancer patients. Owing to the advanced stage of the disease, however, this type of surgery is also associated with significant morbidity and mortality. It is therefore important for surgeons to have a sound understanding of the medical and scientific background underlying treatment decisions in palliative surgery, a foundation that this book provides. The opening chapters examine the relationship between palliative medicine and palliative surgery and address general issues including pain management and anesthesiological considerations. The role of palliative surgery in a wide range of disease settings is then thoroughly explored, including detailed information on surgical techniques and their indications and outcomes. This book will be an invaluable resource for all who wish to learn more about the emerging role of palliative surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Bernhard Reichert.
    Contents:
    Basic principles
    Shoulder complex
    Elbow complex
    Hand
    Hip and groin region
    Knee joint
    Foot
    Soft tissues
    Posterior pelvis
    Lumbar spine
    Thoracic spine and thoracic cage
    Cervical spine
    Head and jaw.
  • Digital
    Bernhard Reichert.
    Contents:
    Basic principles
    Shoulder complex
    Elbow complex
    Hand
    Hip and groin region
    Knee joint
    Foot
    Soft tissues
    Posterior pelvis
    Lumbar spine
    Abdominal Regional
    Thoracic spine and thoracic cage
    Cervical spine
    Head and jaw.
  • Digital
    Christophe Le Tourneau, Maud Kamal, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction: Rationale for Precision Medicine Clinical Trials.- The Key Role of Pathology in the Context of Precision Medicine Trials
    Basis for Molecular Genetics in Cancer
    Microarrays Based Molecular Profiling to Identify Genomic Alterations
    High Throughput Technologies: DNA and RNA Sequencing Strategies and Potential
    Bioinformatics for Precision Medicine in Oncology
    Assessment of Biomarkers? Predictive Value of Efficacy
    Designs for Evaluating Precision Medicine Trials
    Conclusions and Perspectives: Challenges for the Clinical Implementation of Precision Medicine Trials.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Eve Hoover, Kimberly Carter, Robyn Sears, Sarah Bolander.
    Digital Access R2Library 2022
    Limited to 2 simultaneous users
  • Print
    by Dwayne A. Williams.
    Summary: Easy to follow and redesigned algorithms and charts that help to organize medicine for maximum retention, especially for visual learners. Essential information for medical examinations, important correlations for clinical rotations and useful material for practicing clinicians. Not only will you quickly establish your strengths, but you will quickly improve on your areas of weakness. -- Publisher description

    Contents:
    Cardiovascular
    Pulmonary Disorders
    Gastrointestinal/Nutritional
    Musculoskeletal/Rheumatology
    EENT (Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat) Disorders
    Reproductive, obstetrics & gynecology
    Endrocrine
    Nephrology & urology
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatry & Behavioral science
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Infectious Diseases
    Hematologic Disorders
    Pharmacology
    Pediatric blueprint topics.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R697.P45 W55 2017
    1
  • Print
    Williams, Dwayne A.
    Contents:
    Book A.
    1. Cardiovascular System
    2. Pulmonary system
    3. Gastrointestinal system/nutritional
    4. Musculoskeletal system
    5. EENT (eyes, ears, nose, & throat) disorders
    6. Reproductive system (male and female)
    Index
    Book B. 7. Endocrine
    8. Renal system
    9. Genitourinary system (male and female)
    10. Neurologic system
    11. Psychiatry and behavioral disorders
    12. Dermatologic system
    13. Infectious Diseases
    14. Hematologic system
    15. Pediatric pearls
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R697.P45 W55 2019
    2
  • Print
    Dwayne A. Williams.
    Contents:
    Book A.
    1. Cardiovascular System
    2. Pulmonary system
    3. Gastrointestinal system/nutritional
    4. Musculoskeletal system
    5. EENT (eyes, ears, nose, & throat) disorders
    6. Reproductive system (male and female)
    Index
    Book B. 7. Endocrine
    8. Renal system
    9. Genitourinary system (male and female)
    10. Neurologic system
    11. Psychiatry and behavioral disorders
    12. Dermatologic system
    13. Infectious Diseases
    14. Hematologic system
    15. Pediatric pearls
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    R697.P45 W55 2022
    2
  • Digital
    Kulwinder Dua, Reza Shaker, editors.
    Contents:
    Elevated Amylase and Lipase: Physiology Including Non-Pancreatitis Related Elevations
    Acute Pancreatitis
    Chronic Pancreatitis
    Recurrent Acute Pancreatitis
    Steroid-Responsive Chronic Pancreatitides: Autoimmune Pancreatitis and Idiopathic Duct Centric Chronic Pancreatitis
    Pancreas Adenocarcinoma and Ampullary Cancer
    Neuroendocrine Tumors of the Pancreas
    Cystic Lesions of the Pancreas
    Bile Duct: Brief Anatomy, Investigations Used
    Gallstone Disease
    Choledocholithiasis including Acute Cholangitis
    Benign Biliary Strictures
    Cholangiocarcinoma
    Autoimmune Liver Diseases: Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
    Gallbladder Cancer
    Motility Disorders. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Abha Goyal, Rema Rao, Momin T. Siddiqui, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on all aspects of pancreatic pathology, from key features of benign and malignant lesions to diagnostic pearls for differential diagnosis of encountered entities in pancreatobiliary fine needle aspirations and small biopsies. Chapters include a brief introduction and a practical approach to diagnose benign and malignant lesions. The key cytomorphologic features and main differential diagnoses are also summarized in concise tables. Richly colored images complement the text and represent key findings pertaining to the text discussion. An important and current chapter on molecular testing proves to be very useful for the readership for their daily practice in this era of targeted therapy. Written by experts in the fields, all authors contribute their collective experience of preeminent cytopathology service spanning a long time span. Pancreas and Biliary Tract Cytohistology serves as a practical resource for cytotechnologists, cytopathologists and pathologists who are practicing cytopathology and rendering diagnoses on small biopsy samples on pancreatic lesions.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Editors; Contributors;
    1: Indications and Techniques of Fine-Needle Aspiration of the Pancreas; Introduction; Diagnostic EUS; EUS-FNA; EUS-FNA Techniques; Position and Number of Passes; Needle Choice; Histology and Fine-Needle Biopsy; Suction; Stylet; On-Site Cytopathology; Complementary Techniques; Summary; References;
    2: Reporting of Pancreatico-biliary Cytopathology; Diagnostic Categories; Nondiagnostic; Negative; Atypical; Neoplastic; Neoplastic: Benign; Neoplastic: Other; Suspicious for Malignancy; Positive/Malignant; Risk of Malignancy Impact of Pap Society GuidelinesReferences;
    3: Cytology of Normal Pancreas; Introduction and Approach to Pancreaticobiliary Fine-Needle Aspiration; Anatomy and Embryology of Pancreas; Cytology of Normal Pancreas; Benign Ductal Cells; Important Cytologic Features; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Benign Acinar Cells; Important Cytologic Features; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Islet Cells; Important Cytologic Features; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Contamination; Important Cytologic Features Benign Duodenal EpitheliumBenign Gastric Epithelium; Benign Mesothelial Cells; Benign Hepatocytes; Differential Diagnosis and Pitfalls; Approach to Pancreatic EUS-FNA Cytology; References;
    4: Nonneoplastic Solid Mass Lesions of the Pancreas; Introduction; Chronic Pancreatitis; Background; Imaging and Gross Findings; Key Cytomorphologic Features; Key Histologic Features; Differential Diagnosis; Autoimmune Pancreatitis; Background; Imaging and Gross Findings; Key Cytomorphologic Features; Key Histologic Features; Differential Diagnosis; Paraduodenal Groove Pancreatitis; Background Imaging and Gross FindingsKey Cytomorphologic Features; Key Histologic Features; Intrapancreatic Accessory Spleen; Background; Imaging and Gross Findings; Key Cytologic Features; Histologic Features; Differential Diagnosis; Intrapancreatic Reactive Lymph Node; Key Cytomorphologic Features; Sarcoidosis; Background; Key Cytologic Features; Histologic Features; References;
    5: Pancreatic Ductal Adenocarcinoma and Its Variants; Introduction and Clinical Presentation; Radiographic Features and Fine Needle Aspiration; Pancreatic Cancer Precursors: Pancreatic Intraepithelial Neoplasia (PanIN) Important Cytologic FeaturesHistologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis (Cytology and Histology); Ancillary Testing and Molecular Signature; Ductal Adenocarcinoma, Conventional Type; Important Cytologic Features; Well-Differentiated PDCA; High-Grade PDCA; Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis; Ancillary Testing and Molecular Signature; Undifferentiated (Anaplastic) Carcinoma; Important Cytologic Features and Histologic Correlation; Differential Diagnosis; Ancillary Testing and Molecular Signature; Undifferentiated Carcinoma with Osteoclast-Like Giant Cells
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Duck-Jong Han, Takashi Kenmochi, Yi-Ming Shyr, editors.
    Summary: This book is the first to provide a thorough overview of the experience of pancreas transplantation in Asian countries, including in particular Korea, Taiwan, and Japan. Recent trends are identified and attention drawn to differences in comparison with the United States and Europe. Such differences relate, for example, to the history of pancreas transplantation, the operative procedure, and the organ-sharing system. In addition, the insulin-secreting ability of pancreatic islet cells is thought to vary depending on race. Beyond these aspects, the coverage also encompasses ABO-incompatible living donor pancreas transplantation, which is very rarely performed elsewhere in the world. By introducing the number, technique, and outcomes of pancreas transplantation in Asian countries, the book will hopefully further stimulate the pancreas transplantation program in this region and beyond. It will be of value for all medical professionals in the field and will be informative for diabetic patients receiving insulin treatment in Asia.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. History of pancreas transplantation.-a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    3. Indication of pancreas transplantation(Donor and Recipient)
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    4. Pre operative evaluation
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    5. Surgical aspect of pancreas transplantation
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    6. Post operative management(general care,immunosuppressant, graft monitoring etc)
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    7. Outcomes
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    8. Complication
    a. General/Japan/Korea/Taiwan
    9. Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Elizabeth D. Thompson, Ralph H. Hruban, Kiyoko Oshima.
    Summary: "New in the Differential Diagnosis in Surgical Pathology series, this abundantly illustrated title helps you systematically solve tough diagnostic challenges in pancreatic and biliary pathology. It uses select images of clinical and pathological findings, together with succinct, expert instructions and diagnostic pearls, to guide you through the decision-making process. By presenting material according to the way pathologists actually work, this user-friendly volume helps you quickly differentiate commonly confused entities that have overlapping morphologic features. Presents nearly 100 differential diagnoses in pancreatic and biliary pathology, including the most common entities as well as selected rare diseases. Provides concise, bulleted summaries of clinical and pathological findings and relevant pictorial examples on the corresponding pages. Features 1,000 high-quality, full-color images of similar-looking lesions side by side for easy comparison with respect to clinicopathologic features and ancillary tests. Includes more than 30 detailed chapters on the pancreas, as well as coverage of the ampulla, extrahepatic bile duct, and gallbladder. Ideal for practicing pathologists, pathologists in training, residents, and medical students"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    John P. Neoptolemos, Raul Urrutia, James L. Abbruzzese, Markus W. Büchler, editors.
    Summary: In organizing the second edition of this renowned Handbook, Dr. Neoptolemos and his co-editors have produced and updated a revised edition to the distinguished Major Reference Work devoted to pancreatic cancer. Like its preceding edition, the second edition continues to have a widespread appeal among clinicians, pathologists and basic scientists, who are now struggling to understand this complex and rapidly expanding field. Because of the recent and vast growth in both the clinical and scientific research being done in pancreatic cancer, (there is currently an unprecedented investment by academia and industry in this field), each research's knowledge of other specialty areas outside his or her own is often quite limited. The aim of the new edition is to place the tangible advances, including new developments in surgical approaches with regards to resection techniques, the state of laparoscopic approaches, the growing impact of surgical approaches in the management of recurrent pancreatic cancer, controversies in the management of IMPN as the precursor lesion for PDAC and others - readily at hand. The second edition focuses on advances that will not become dated, and the editors have chosen authors, who are the very best in each area.

    Contents:
    Section: The Nature of Pancreatic Cancer
    Cell Cycle Machinery and Its Alterations in Pancreatic Cancer
    Animal modelling of Pancreatitis-to-Cancer Progression
    Stromal Inflammation in Pancreatic Cancer: Mechanisms and Translational Applications
    Familial Pancreatic Cancer
    Section: Clinical Management of Pancreatic Cancer
    Therapeutic Endoscopy in the Management of Pancreatic Cancer
    Controversies in Pathology Reporting and Staging
    Staging and Postoperative Outcomes Using the International Study Group of Pancreatic Surgery (ISGPS) Classifications
    Borderline Respectable Pancreatic Cancer
    New Japanese Classification of Pancreatic Cancer
    Arterial Resection in Pancreatic Cancer
    Treatment of Recurrent Pancreatic Cancer After Surgery
    Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Pancreatic Cancer
    Differential Therapy Based on Tumor Heterogeneity in Pancreatic Cancer
    Neoadjuvant Chemoradiation for Operable Pancreatic Cancer: the Importance of Local Disease Control
    Section: New Directions
    Development of Novel Therapeutic Response Biomarkers
    Clinical Applications of Genomics and Proteomics in Pancreatic Cancer
    Approaching Pancreatic Cancer Phenotypes via Metabolomics
    Circulating Tumour Cells
    Cancer Exosomes for Early Pancreatic Cancer Diagnosis and Role Metastasis
    Metabolism in Pancreatic Cancer
    Secondary Screening for Inherited Pancreatic Ductal Adenocarcinoma
    Role of Radiotherapy in Locally Advanced Pancreatic Cancer
    Evolution of Pancreatic Cancer Surgery
    Multiparameter Modalities for the Study of Patients in the Setting of Individualized Medicine
    Epigenetic Pharmacology
    Precision Medicine Based on Next Generation Sequencing and Master Controllers.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Manoop S. Bhutani, Matthew H.G. Katz, Anirban Maitra, Joseph M. Herman, Robert A. Wolff, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, state-of-the-art overview of pancreatic cancer. The text presents new data about risk factors and genetic predisposition for pancreatic cancer, highlights current screening strategies and preliminary results, and reviews diagnosis and staging of pancreatic cancer, with a focus on imaging evaluations, laparoscopy, endoscopic ultrasound-guided biopsies, and biomarkers. The book also spotlights emerging paradigms in pancreatic cancer management, such as minimally invasive surgical approaches and emerging radiation approaches, and provides valuable insight into the role of nutrition and early integration of supportive/palliative care for pancreatic cancer patients. Written by experts in the field, Pancreatic Cancer: A Multidisciplinary Approach is an invaluable resource for physicians and researchers with an interest in pancreatic cancer.

    Contents:
    Pancreatic Cancer at a Glance
    Risk Factors and Genetic Predisposition
    Pancreatic Cancer and Diabetes Mellitus
    Pancreatic Cancer Screening
    Diagnosis and Staging of Pancreatic Cancer
    Imaging Evaluations: Pancreatic Protocol CT and MRI, PET-CT
    Laparoscopy
    Role of Gastroenterologists: Endoscopic Ultrasound (EUS), EUS-guided Biopsy
    Role of Ca 19-9 in Diagnosis/Staging and Management
    Management of Locally Advanced/ Metastatic Disease
    Medical Oncology
    Radiation Oncology
    Management of Resectable and Borderline Resectable Disease
    Surgery
    Medical Oncology
    Radiation Oncology
    Endoscopic Management of Pancreatic Cancer Symptoms
    Jaundice/Biliary Obstruction: ERCP/EUS BD
    Gastric Outlet Obstruction: Antroduodenal Stenting, Venting PEG, EUS-guided Gastrojejunostomy
    Pain Control: Celiac Plexus Neurolysis
    Emerging Paradigms in Pancreatic Cancer
    Minimally Invasive Surgical Approaches
    EUS-Guided Local Therapies
    Imaging Based Biomarkers for Pancreatic Cancer
    Liquid Biopsies in Pancreatic Cancer
    Molecular Profiling and Precision Medicine for Pancreatic Cancer
    The Prospects of Immunotherapy in Pancreatic Cancer
    Microbiome in Pancreatic Cancer
    Early Drug Development in Pancreatic Cancer
    Mechanisms and Evidence on Pancreatic Cancer Prevention
    Nutrition in Pancreatic Cancer
    Prioritizing the Patient Experience: Early Integration of Supportive/Palliative Care in Pancreatic Cancer Management
    Patient Reported Outcomes and Quality of Life
    Alternative/Integrative Medicine in Pancreatic Cancer. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Sun-Whe Kim, Hiroki Yamaue, editors.
    Summary: This book provides state of the art knowledge on a broad range of clinical issues in pancreatic cancer, covering topics from screening and pathophysiology to surgical treatments. In particular, the focus is on current controversies and on evidence-based surgical techniques. Further aspects considered include the management of precancerous lesions, diagnostic methods, perioperative care and nonsurgical treatment. The description of surgical methods is supported by many helpful illustrations and important technical issues are carefully addressed. Determination of resectability and extent of surgery is also discussed. Based on recent developments in surgical techniques, some surgeons are performing more and more radical operations. It is essential, however, that surgical strategy is based on the best available evidence and surgeons will find that this book offers valuable help in achieving this aim. In addition, it will be a great asset in clinical practice for all who are involved or interested in the management of pancreatic cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Hans G. Beger, MD, FAS ; Akimasa Nakao, MD, PhD, FACS ; John P. Neoptolemos, MA, MB, BDChir, MD, FRCS, FMedSci ; Shu You Peng, MD, FACS, FRCSG, ESA ; Michael G. Sarr, MD.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    George H. Sakorafas, Vassileios Smyrniotis, Michael G. Sarr, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a thorough overview of the detection of PCNs using modern imaging techniques and a clear guide to the recognition of the different subtypes of PCN based on their radiologic and histopathologic features. This volume will serve as an excellent aid to the selection of optimal therapeutic strategies based on preoperative diagnosis. A further important feature is the emphasis placed on radiologic, clinical, and surgical correlations. Pancreatic cystic neoplasms (PCNs) have been increasingly recognized during the past decade, mainly because of the widespread use of modern imaging modalities for the investigation of often unrelated abdominal symptoms. The three most common subtypes of PCN are serous cystic neoplasms, mucinous cystic neoplasms, and intraductal papillary mucinous neoplasms. These subtypes have distinct radiologic and histopathological features, and their biological behavior differs greatly. Accurate preoperative diagnosis is of prime importance in selecting the optimal therapeutic strategy: while serous cystic neoplasms are almost always benign, and may be treated conservatively, mucinous cystic neoplasms and intraductal papillary mucinous neoplasms have malignant potential, warranting an aggressive surgical approach, i.e., pancreatectomy. Pancreatic Cystic Neoplasms will be of great interest to surgeons, gastroenterologists, radiologists, oncologists, and pathologists, and also to internists and residents in these specialties.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Classification
    Serous cystic neoplasms
    Mucinous cystic neoplasms
    Intraductal Papillary Mucinous Neoplasms
    Rare cystic neoplasms
    Diagnostic evaluation
    Imaging
    Cross sectional Imaging
    US, CT, MRI
    Endoscopic ultrasonography
    ERCP / MRCP
    Intraductal ultrasonography / ductoscopy
    FNA and analysis of the cystic fluid
    Cytology
    Biochemical analysis
    Treatment
    Indications for surgery
    Surgical treatment
    Adjuvant therapy
    Follow-up
    Prognosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Atif Zaheer, Elliot K. Fishman, Meredith E. Pittman, Ralph H. Hruban, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Miriam Ramírez-Domínguez.
    Contents:
    Historical Background of Pancreatic Islet Isolation / Miriam Ramírez-Domínguez
    The Different Faces of the Pancreatic Islets / Midhat H.Abdulreda, Rayner Rodriguez-Diaz, Over Cabrera, Alejandro Caicedo, Per-Olof Berggren
    Isolation of Mouse Pancreatic Islets of Langerhans / Miriam Ramírez-Domínguez
    Pancreatic Islets: Methods for Isolation and Purification of Juvenile and Adult Pig Islets / Heide Brandhorst, Paul R.V. Johnson, Daniel Brandhorst
    Isolation of Pancreatic Islets from NonHuman Primates / Dora M. Berman
    Necessities for a Clinical Islet Program / Wayne John Hawthorne
    Clinical Islet Isolation / Wayne John Hawthorne, Lindy Jane Williams, Yi Vee Chew
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Mihir S. Wagh, Peter V. Draganov, editors.
    Contents:
    Classification of Pancreatic Lesions
    Pancreatic Adenocarcinoma
    Less Common Solid Tumors of Pancreas
    Cystic Lesions of the Pancreas
    Autoimmune pancreatitis
    Pancreatitis-related pancreatic masses: Chronic Pancreatitis
    Radiographic imaging
    EUS Imaging in the Diagnosis of Pancreatic Masses
    Contrast-enhanced EUS
    Endoscopic Ultrasonography: Role of EUS Sampling in Solid Pancreas Lesions
    Endoscopic Ultrasonography: Role of EUS sampling in Cystic lesions
    Role of ERCP in Diagnosing Pancreatic Masses
    Endoscopic Retrograde Cholangiopancreatography (ERCP): Pancreatoscopy for the evaluation of pancreatic neoplasia
    Recent Advances in Cytologic and Histologic Specimen Evaluation, FISH and Molecular Markers
    Evaluation and Surveillance Strategies for Patients at Increased Risk of Pancreatic Cancer
    Differential Diagnosis and Diagnostic Evaluation Algorithm
    Surgery for Solid Pancreatic Neoplasms
    Radiation Therapy for Pancreatic Cancer
    Chemotherapy
    Endoscopic therapy: ERCP based therapy
    Endoscopic therapy: EUS-based therapy
    Endoscopic Therapy of Gastric Outlet Obstruction
    Management of Cystic Lesions of the Pancreas
    Recent Advances and Novel Treatments of Pancreatic Masses.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    volume editors, Barbara A. Centeno, Jasreman Dhillon.
    Summary: "This book provides a comprehensive review of entities that may be encountered in pancreatic cytology. It is designed for cytotechnologists, pathology trainees, pathologists, and cytopathologists. It is also a useful guide for advanced endoscopists performing EUS-guided FNA, and surgeons and oncologists treating patients with pancreatic disease wanting to understand their pathology reports"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to pancreatic pathology and fine-needle aspiration cytology / Dhillon, J.
    Processing of fine-needle aspiration specimens from pancreatic lesions / Dhillon, J.
    Imaging of pancreatic tumors / Morse, B., Klapman, J.
    Normal components and contaminants / Dhillon, J.
    Non-neoplastic masses of the pancreas / Centeno, B.A., Thomas, S.
    Non-neoplastic and neoplastic cysts of the pancreas / Centeno, B.A., Thomas, S.
    Pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma / Betancourt, M., Dhillon, J.
    Non-ductal tumors of the pancreas / Dhillon, J.
    Metastases, secondary tumors, and lymphomas of the pancreas / Centeno, B.A.
    Mesenchymal tumors of the pancreas / Dhillon, J.
    Digital Access Karger 2020
  • Digital
    Terumi Kamisawa, Hisami Ando, editors.
    Summary: From embryology to epidemiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, complications, treatment and prognosis, this book provides a comprehensive overview and the latest evidence-based data on pancreaticobiliary maljunction (PBM), a congenital malformation in which the pancreatic and bile ducts join anatomically outside the duodenal wall. Resulting in various pathologic conditions, such as biliary cancer and pancreatitis, immediate prophylactic surgery is recommended upon diagnosis. The standard operative procedure for congenital biliary dilatation (CBD) is extrahepatic bile duct resection with bilioenteric anastomosis, but the optimal treatment of adult patients with PBM without biliary dilatation remains highly debatable. This book, written by pioneering editors and authors provides latest data, sheds new light on the disease. With abundant figures to aid understanding, Pancreaticobiliary Maljunction and Congenital Biliary Dilatation appeals to a wide readership, especially adult and pediatric surgeons, physicians including gastroenterologists and endoscopists, as well as radiologists and pathologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by David B. Adams, Peter B. Cotton, Nicholas J. Zyromski, John Windsor.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology and genetics of pancreatitis / David C Whitcomb
    Pathobiology of the acinar cell in acute pancreatitis / Stephen J Pandol
    Locoregional pathophysiology in acute pancreatitis: pancreas and intestine / Alistair BJ Escott, Anthony J Phillips, John A Windsor
    Pathophysiology of systemic inflammatory response syndrome and multiorgan dysfunction syndrome in acute pancreatitis / Pramod Kumar Garg
    Diagnosis, prediction, and classification / Efstratios Koutroumpakis, Georgios I Papachristou
    Medical treatment / Andree H Koop, Timothy B Gardner
    Nutritional treatment in acute pancreatitis / Maxim S Petrov
    Gallstone pancreatitis: diagnosis and treatment / Marsela Sina, Gregory A Coté
    Treatment of local complications / Stefan AW Bouwense, Thomas L Bollen, Paul Fockens, Marc GH Besselink for the Dutch Pancreatitis Study Group
    Treatment of systemic complications and organ failure / Alexsander K Bressan, Chad G Ball
    Specific treatment for acute pancreatitis / Li Wen, Muhammad A Javed, Kiran Altaf, Peter Szatmary, Robert Sutton
    Sequelae of acute pancreatitis / Nicholas J Zyromski, Lucas McDuffie
    History of chronic pancreatitis / Peter A Banks
    Epidemiology and pathophysiology: epidemiology and risk factors / Dhiraj Yadav, Julia Greer
    Epidemiology and pathophysiology: genetic insights into pathogenesis / David C Whitcomb
    Pancreatic stellate cells: what do they tell us about chronic pancreatitis? / Minoti V Apte, Zhihong Xu, Ron C Pirola, Jeremy S Wilson
    Autoimmune pancreatitis: an update / Thiruvengadam Muniraj, Raghuwansh P Sah, Suresh T Chari
    Etiology and pathophysiology: tropical pancreatitis / Rajesh Gupta, Sunil D Shenvi, Ritambhra Nada, Surinder S Rana, Deepak Bhasin
    Mechanisms and pathways of pain in chronic pancreatitis / Dana A Dominguez, Kimberly S Kirkwood
    Imaging of chronic pancreatitis / Ferenc Czeyda-Pommersheim, Bobby Kalb, Diego Martin
    Endoscopic ultrasonography in chronic pancreatitis / Brenda Hoffman, Nathaniel Ranney
    Pancreatic enzyme replacement therapy (PERT) / Ravi K Prakash, Alexander Schlachterman, Chris E Forsmark
    Nutritional treatment: antioxidant treatment / Ajith K Siriwardena
    Pancreatogenic diabetes: etiology, implications, and management / Dana K Andersen
    Nutrition without a pancreas: how does the gut do it? / William Lancaster, Matthew Kappus, Robert Martindale
    Endoscopic management of chronic pancreatitis / Wiriyaporn Ridtitid, Stuart Sherman
    Shocking and fragmenting pancreatic ductal stones / Rupjyoti Talukdar, Duvvur Nageshwar Reddy
    Endoscopic management: celiac plexus blockade / Vikesh K Singh
    A brief history of modern surgery for chronic pancreatitis / Michael G Sarr, Charles F Frey, Thomas Schnelldorfer
    Surgery for chronic pancreatitis: indications and timing of surgery / Philippus C Bornman, Dirk J Gouma, Jake E J Krige
    Chronic pancreatitis: surgical strategy in complicated diseases / Philippus C Bornman, Jake E J Krige, Sandie R Thomson
    Surgery for chronic pancreatitis: pancreatic duct drainage procedures / Dirk J Gouma, Philippus C Bornman
    Surgical management: resection and drainage procedures / Tobias Keck, Ulrich Wellner, Ulrich Adam
    The role of pancreatoduodenectomy in the management of chronic pancreatitis / Kristopher P Croome, Michael B Farnell
    Total pancreatectomy and islet cell autotransplantation: patient selection / Sydne Muratore, Martin Freeman, Greg Beilman
    Total pancreatectomy and islet cell autotransplantation: the science of islet cell preservation, from pancreas to liver / Appakalai N Balamurugan, Melena D Bellin
    Total pancreatectomy and islet cell autotransplantation: long-term assessment of graft function / Giuseppe Garcea, Ashley Dennison.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Timothy B. Gardner, Kerrington D. Smith, editors.
    Summary: This clinical casebook provides a comprehensive yet concise state-of-the-art review of pancreatic disease. Presented in a case-based format, each case focuses on a different varient of pancreatic disease and pancreatic cancer, with sections on diagnosis and early detection, management of the disease, and treatment of complications from the disease. The role of neoadjuvant therapy for pancreatic cancer and emerging treatment algorithms for chronic pancreatitis are also highlighted in the text. Written by experts in the field, Pancreatology: A Clinical Casebook is a valuable resource for clinicians, surgeons, and researchers interested in caring for patients with pancreatic disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Andreas Musolff, Ruth Breeze, Kayo Kondo and Sara Vilar-Lluch.
    Summary: "The COVID-19 pandemic has led to a host of critical reflections about discourse practises dealing with public health issues. Situating crisis communication at the centre of societal and political debates about responses to the pandemic, this volume analyses the discursive strategies used in a variety of settings. Exploring how crisis discourse has become a part of managing the public health crisis itself, this book focuses on the communicative tasks and challenges for both speakers and their public audiences in seven areas: - establishment of discursive and political authority - official governmental and expert communication to the public - public understanding of government communication - legitimation of public health management as a 'war' - judging and blaming a collective other - cross-national comparison and rivalry - empathy and encouragement Covering global discourses from Asia, Europe, the Middle East, North and South America, and New Zealand, chapters use corpus-based data to cast light on these issues from a variety of languages. With crisis discourse already the object of fierce national and international debates about the appropriateness of specific communicative styles, information management and 'verbal hygiene', Pandemic and Crisis Discourse offers an authoritative intervention from language experts"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    List of Figures
    List of Tables
    List of Contributors
    Introduction, Andreas Musolff, Ruth Breeze, Kayo Kondo and Sara Vilar-Lluch
    Part I: The Discourse of Authority in a Global Crisis: Who Defines (If There Is) a Pandemic?
    1 COVID-19 Press Conferences Across Time: World Health Organization vs. Chinese Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Dennis Tay
    2 Exploring the Multimodal Representation of COVID-19 on the Official Homepage of World Health Organization (WHO): A Social-Semiotic Approach, Amir H. Y. Salama
    3 COVID-19 Representations in Political Statements: A Corpus-Driven Analysis, Alexandra Papamanoli and Themis P. Kaniklidou
    4 How Autocrats Cope with the Corona Challenge: Belarus vs. Russia, Daniel Weiss
    5 Counting Coronavirus: Mathematical Language in The UK Response to Covid-19, Lee Jarvis
    Part II: The Discourse of Crisis Management: How is the Public Meant to and How Does it Understand the Pandemic?
    6 "Coronavirus Explainers" for Public Communication of Science: Everything the Public Needs to Know, María José Luzón
    7 'COVID Warriors: An Analysis of the Use of Metaphors in Children's Books to Help them Understand Covid-19, María Muelas-Gil
    8 Corona in the Linguistic Landscape, Neele Mundt and Frank Polzenhagen
    9 Political Comedy and the Challenges of Public Communication during the Covid-19 Crisis: A Corpus-Based Study of Last Week Tonight's Coverage of the Pandemic, Virginia Zorzi
    10 Social Reaction to a New Health Threat: The Perception of the COVID-19 Health Crisis by British and Spanish Readerships, Sara Vilar-Lluch
    11 How to Pass this Exam? Dealing with COVID-19 through Metaphors in Turkish Online Public Discourse, Melike Bas and Esranur Efeoglu-Özcan
    Part III: The Discourse of 'War' against the Pandemic: How to 'Fight' COVID-19?
    12 When Wars are Good: Emotional Unpacking Anti-Coronavirus Measures, Molly Xie Pan and Joanna Zhuoan Chen
    13 Legitimising a Global Fight for a Shared Future: A Critical Metaphor Analysis of the Reportage of COVID-19 in China Daily, Yating Yu. 14 Metaphoric Framings of Fighting COVID-19, Mariana Neagu
    15 From an Invisible Enemy to a Football Match with the Virus: Adjusting the COVID-19 Pandemic Metaphors to Political Agendas in Serbian Public Discourse, Nadežda Silaški and Tatjana Đurovic
    16 Are Health Care Political Responses Gendered? A Case Study, Fabienne Baider and Maria Constantinou
    17 "War against COVID-19": Is the Pandemic as War Metaphor Helpful or Hurtful?, Andreas Musolff
    Part IV: The Discourse of Judgement and Rivalry: Blaming Other/s for the Pandemic and Comparing National Performances
    18 "Chinese Virus": A Multimodal Critical Discourse Analysis of U.S. Government Communication about COVID-19 and its Impact on Chinese and Asian Americans in the U.S., Peiwen Wang and Theresa Catalano
    19 'Those Lunatic Zombies': The Discursive Framing of Wuhan Lockdown Escapees in Digital Space, Janet Ho and Emily Chiang
    20 Identity as Crime: How Indian Media's Coverage Demonised Muslims as Coronavirus Spreader, Aaquib Khan
    21 Media Discourse in Slovenia and in the Slovenian-Italian Cross-Border Area during the COVID-19 Pandemic, Vesna Mikolic
    Part V: The Discourse of Empathy and Encouragement: How to Foster Solidarity among Doctors, Patients and Health Experts
    22 Agency in End-of-Life Conversations during the COVID-19 Pandemic, Dariusz Galasinski and Justyna Ziólkowska
    23 Doctors' Empathy and Compassion in Online Health Consultations during the COVID-19 Pandemic in Japan, Kayo Kondo
    24 "Masks aren't Comfortable or Sexy, but...": Exploring Identity Work on Dr Mike's Instagram during the First Phase of the COVID-19 Pandemic, Kim Schoofs, Dorien Van De Mieroop, Stephanie Schnurr, Haiyan Huang and Anastasia Stavridou
    25 Choosing to Stay Fit? Glocalized Ideologies of Health and Fitness during a Pandemic, Ulrike Vogl, Geert Jacobs, Karin Andersson and Jesper Andreasson
    26 Unite against COVID-19: Jacinda Ardern's Discursive Approach to the Pandemic, Marta Degani
    Index.
  • Digital
    Hervé Tettelin, Duccio Medini, editors.
    Summary: This open access book offers the first comprehensive account of the pan-genome concept and its manifold implications. The realization that the genetic repertoire of a biological species always encompasses more than the genome of each individual is one of the earliest examples of big data in biology that opened biology to the unbounded. The study of genetic variation observed within a species challenges existing views and has profound consequences for our understanding of the fundamental mechanisms underpinning bacterial biology and evolution. The underlying rationale extends well beyond the initial prokaryotic focus to all kingdoms of life and evolves into similar concepts for metagenomes, phenomes and epigenomes. The books respective chapters address a range of topics, from the serendipitous emergence of the pan-genome concept and its impacts on the fields of microbiology, vaccinology and antimicrobial resistance, to the study of microbial communities, bioinformatic applications and mathematical models that tie in with complex systems and economic theory. Given its scope, the book will appeal to a broad readership interested in population dynamics, evolutionary biology and genomics.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Genomic diversity and the pan-genome concept
    Chapter 1: The pan-genome: a data-drivendiscovery in biology
    Chapter 2: The prokaryotic species concept and challenges
    Chapter 3: Bacterial guide on how to design a diversified gene portfolio
    Chapter 4: A review of pan-genome tools and recent studies
    Part 2: Evolutionary biology of pan-genomes
    Chapter 5: Structure and dynamics of bacterial populations: pan-genome ecology
    Chapter 6: Bacterial microevolution and the pan-genome
    Chapter 7: Pan-genomes and selection: the public goods hypothesis
    Chapter 8: A pan-genomic perspective on the emergence, maintenance and predictability of antibiotic resistance
    Part 3: Pan-genomics: an open, evolving discipline
    Chapter 9: Metapangenome: at the crossroad of pangenomics and metagenomics
    Chapter 10: Pan-genome flux balance analysis towards pan-phenomes
    Chapter 11: Bacterial epigenomics: epigenetics in the age of population genomics
    Chapter 12: Eukaryotic pan-genomes
    Chapter 13: Computational strategies for eukaryotic pan-genome analyses.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Antonio Egidio Nardi, Rafael Christophe R. Freire, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Eric Sowey, Peter Petocz.
    Contents:
    Part I Introduction
    Why is statistics such a fascinating subject?
    How statistics differs from mathematics
    Statistical literacy- essential in the 21st century
    Statistical inquiry on the web
    Part II Statistical description
    Trustworthy statistics are accurate, meaningful and relevant
    Let's hear it for the standard deviation!
    Index numbers- time travel for averages
    The beguiling ways of bad statistics I
    The beguiling ways of bad statistics II
    Part III Preliminaries to inference
    Puzzles and paradoxes in probability
    Some paradoxes of randomness
    Hidden risks for gamblers
    Models in statistics
    The normal distribution: history, computation and curiosities
    Part IV Statistical inference
    The pillars of applied statistics- estimation
    The pillars of applied statistics- hypothesis testing
    'Data snooping' and the significance level in multiple testing
    Francis Galton and the birth of regression
    Experimental design- piercing the veil of random variation
    In praise of Bayes
    Part V Some statistical byways
    Quality in statistics
    History of ideas: statistical personalities and the personalities of statisticians
    Statistical eponymy
    Statistical 'laws'
    Statistical artefacts
    Part VI Answers
    Answers to the chapter questions.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Peter Lanzer, editor.
    Summary: Vascular management and care has become a truly multidisciplinary enterprise. As a result of scientific progress, the number of specialists involved in the treatment of patients with vascular diseases is steadily increasing. While in the past, treatments were delivered by individual specialists, in the twenty-first century a team approach is without doubt the most effective strategy. Depending on the clinical manifestations, cardiologists, cardiac surgeons, vascular specialists, angiologists, radiologists, vascular surgeons, neurologists, neurointerventionalists, lipidologists, blood coagulation specialists, and diabetologists, to name but a few, may be involved. In order to promote professional excellence in this dynamic and rapidly evolving field, a shared knowledge base and interdisciplinary standards need to be established. PanVascular Medicine, 2nd edition℗ℓhas been designed to offer such an interdisciplinary platform, providing vascular specialists with state-of-the-art descriptive and procedural knowledge. Basic science, diagnostics, and therapy are all comprehensively covered. In a series of succinct, clearly written chapters, renowned specialists introduce and comment on the current international guidelines and present up-to-date reviews of all aspects of vascular care.℗ℓ℗ℓ℗ℓ℗ℓ℗ℓ

    Contents:
    Knowledge and Skills
    PanVascular domain
    Vascular Biology, Molecular Biology and Genetics
    Clinical Vascular Physiology and Pathophysiology
    Prevention
    Vascular Diagnosis
    X-ray Angiography and Venography
    Epidemiology and Risk Factors
    Nosology
    Coronary Artery Disease
    Cerebrovascular Disease
    Peripheral Artery Disease
    Vascular Disease of the Lungs
    Vascular Disease of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Renovascular Disease
    Urogenital Vascular Disease
    Peripheral Venous Disease
    Vascular Pharmacology
    Catheter-based and Surgery-related Management Instrumentation
    Access, Hemostasis
    Coronary ? Interventional
    Coronary: Surgery
    Cerebrovascular ? Interventional
    Cerebrovascular: Interventional
    Aortic: Interventional Surgery
    Aortic, Visceral: Interventional
    Aortic, Visceral: Surgery
    Peripheral, Arterial
    Interventional
    Peripheral, Arterial ? Surgery
    Peripheral, Venous . Interventional and Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Martha Bishop Pitman, Lester James Layfield.
    Contents:
    Overview of Diagnostic Terminology and Reporting
    Category I: Non-Diagnostic
    Category II: Negative (for Malignancy)
    Category III: Atypical
    Category IV: Neoplastic-Benign
    Category IV: Neoplastic-Other
    Category V: Suspicious (for Malignancy)
    Category VI: Positive or Malignant
    Appendix A: Template for Cyst Diagnosis
    Appendix B: Mucinous Etiology
    Appendix C: Useful Ancillary Tests.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Shantanu Bhattacharya, Sanjay Kumar, Avinash K Agarwal, editors.
    Summary: This volume provides an overview of the recent advances in the field of paper microfluidics, whose innumerable research domains have stimulated considerable efforts to the development of rapid, cost-effective and simplified point-of-care diagnostic systems. The book is divided into three parts viz. theoretical background of paper microfluidics, fabrication techniques for paper-based devices, and broad applications. Each chapter of the book is self-explanatory and focuses on a specific topic and its relation to paper microfluidics and starts with a brief description of the topics physical background, essential definitions, and a short story of the recent progress in the relevant field. The book also covers the future outlook, remaining challenges, and emerging opportunities. This book shall be a tremendous up-to-date resource for researchers working in the area globally.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; About the Editors; 1 A Historical Perspective on Paper Microfluidic Based Point-of-Care Diagnostics; Abstract; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Paper Microfluidics: Historical Perspective; 1.3 Outline; References; 2 Fluid Transport Mechanisms in Paper-Based Microfluidic Devices; Abstract; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Fluid Transport; 2.2.1 Classical Lucas-Washburn Equation (Capillary Flow); 2.2.2 Darcy's Law for Fluid Flow; 2.2.3 Fluid Transport in the Porous Media of Varying Cross Section/Arbitrary Shape; 2.2.4 Radial Fluid Transport in Porous Media 2.2.5 Diffusion-Based Fluid Transport; 2.2.6 Lateral Flow Immunoassay (LFIA); 2.3 Summary; References; 3 Fabrication Techniques for Paper-Based Microfluidic Devices; Abstract; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Fabrication Methods; 3.2.1 2D Fabrication Methods; 3.2.2 Flexographic Printing; 3.2.3 3D Fabrication Methods; 3.3 Comparison of Various Fabrication Methods; References; 4 Flow Control in Paper-Based Microfluidic Devices; Abstract; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Fluid Flow Through Porous Substrates; 4.2.1 Lucas-Washburn Equation; 4.2.2 Darcy's Equation for Fluid Flow 4.2.3 Richard's Equation for Partially Saturated Flows; 4.3 Controlling the Fluid Flow in Paperfluidic Devices; 4.3.1 Techniques to Achieve Flow Control Without Valves; 4.3.1.1 Changing the Channel Dimensions; 4.3.1.2 Creation of Alternate Flow Paths; 4.3.1.3 Changing the Surface Wettability; 4.3.1.4 Changing the Properties of the Porous Substrate; 4.3.1.5 Increasing the Resistance to Fluid Flow Using Physicochemical Barriers; 4.3.1.6 Electrostatic Interactions Between Device Components; 4.3.1.7 Varying the Channel Dimensions for Specific Introduction of Reagents 4.3.2 Techniques to Achieve Flow Control Utilizing Valve-Like Tools; 4.3.2.1 Dissolvable Species; 4.3.2.2 Mechanical Tools Which Connect or Disconnect Channels; 4.3.2.3 Wax-Based Valves; 4.3.2.4 Fluidic Diodes; 4.3.2.5 Automatically Actuated External Valves; 4.4 Challenges to Translation of Flow Control-Based Paperfluidic Devices; References; 5 Paper Microfluidic Based Device for Blood/Plasma Separation; Abstract; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Physiological Hemodynamics and Porous Media Hemodynamics; 5.3 Recent Advances in Paper Based Blood Plasma Separation Devices; 5.4 Summary and Future Perspectives
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Norman P. Salzman.
    Contents:

    v. 1. The Polyomaviruses.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    QR406 .P36
    1
  • Digital
    Jianghui Hou.
    Summary: The Paracellular Channel: Biology, Physiology and Disease serves as the first volume to offer a cohesive and unifying picture of the critical functions of paracellular channels (tight junctions) in different tissues. This new class of ion channel utilizes a completely different mechanism to create ion passage pathways across the cell junction. This volume outlines common principles that govern the organization and regulation of these diverse cellular structures, describes the methodology of study, and highlights the pathophysiologic consequence of abnormal structure and functions of the paracellular channels in human diseases. Coverage includes biochemical, biophysical, structural, physiologic analyses of the paracellular channel, and new technologies for recording and characterization.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Paracellular channel formation
    Paracellular channel recording
    Paracellular cation channel
    Paracellular anion channel
    Paracellular water channel
    Paracellular channel in organ system
    Paracellular channel in human disease
    Paracellular channel as drug target
    Paracellular channel evolution
    Perspective.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2019
  • Digital
    Howard Friel and Sally Frautschy.
    Contents:
    Monotargeting versus multitargeting
    The Pleiotropic pharmacology of plant polyphenols
    Primary prevention of Alzheimer's disease
    Secondary prevention of Alzheimer's disease
    Treatment mechanisms in mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease
    Pleiotropic theory
    Dose-adherence and intent-to-treat.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Gaafar Ragab, Luca Quartuccio, Hadi Goubran, editors.
    Summary: This book presents paraproteinemia and the highly complex scientific information behind it to clinicians in a way they can understand and, ultimately, apply to their diagnostic and treatment practices. Paraproteinemia or dysproteinemia is characterized by the overproduction of an immunoglobulin by clonal expansion of cells from the B cells lineage which includes the plasma cells. The resultant monoclonal protein can be composed of the entire immunoglobulin or of its components. The identification and categorization of the different representatives of this group of disorders have traveled a long distance, but despite its high prevalence there is surprisingly limited evidence, in some areas, to guide the best clinical practice both at the time of diagnosis and during follow up. This book seeks to fill that gap. The book is divided into three sections, introductory chapters, disease entities and experimental therapies. The text guides clinicians through these diseases and disorders. The group of renal diseases attributed to deposition of monoclonal immunoglobulins or their components are arranged as one disease category in order to simplify the understanding of these complicated diseases in plasma cell dysplasia. In emulation of this practical approach, at a larger scale, the volume editors and chapter authors attempt to encompass the whole spectrum of the paraproteinemias in this text. This will have the dual benefit of offering the audience a panoramic view of this group of disorders and simultaneously keeping them focused on its individual representatives. There have been many recent advances in diagnosis, risk stratifications, and management of many members of this group of diseases and they are explored in depth here. This is an ideal guide for rheumatologists, hematologists, nephrologists, immunologists, oncologists, and relevant trainees caring for patients with paraproteinemia and related disorders.

    Contents:
    The phenomenon of Paraproteinemia
    B Cell in Health and Disease
    Immunoglobulins, structure and function
    The Bone marrow as a hotbed for Plasma Cell activation
    Animal Models in Monoclonal Immunoglobulin Related Diseases
    An Approach to The Diagnosis of Paraproteinemia
    Amyloidosis: Pathogenesis, types and diagnosis
    Amyloidosis: Clinical Manifestations and Treatment
    Primary Light Chain (AL) Amyloidosis
    Monoclonal Immunoglobulin Deposition Disease
    Multiple Myeloma
    Monoclonal Gammopathy of Undetermined Significance (MGUS) & Highlight on Monoclonal Gammopathy of Neurological Significance (MGNS)
    Monoclonal Gammopathy of Renal Significance: An Insight
    Waldenstrom Macroglobulinemia
    IgG4 Related Disease Overview: Pathology, Clinical picture and Treatment
    Type I cryoglobulinemia
    Paraproteinemias associated with Autoimmune Diseases
    Infections and Paraproteinemia
    Paraproteinemia In Autoinflammatory Diseases
    Paraproteins associated with malignancy
    Monoclonal Gammopathies with Miscellaneous Associations
    Novel and Experimental Clone-directed Therapies
    Non-Pharmacological Management of Paraproteinemia.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Heinz Mehlhorn, Sven Klimpel, editors.
    Summary: Rivers are the "blood vessels" of all living organisms on earth - they live in the water, drink the water or use it to spread into new regions in order to avoid overcrowding in specific locations. Since the early beginnings of human life on earth, riverbanks have been used as settlement sites, to provide food and for transport. However, since the oldest human cultures many agents of diseases have also spread along these rivers. Written by leading international parasitologists and physicians, this book discusses the involvement of rivers in the spread of diseases, but also their contributions to the development and destruction of human cultures. Examining past and current data, it shows how important and vulnerable river regions are and how they are increasingly endangered by pollution.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Important rivers and their worldwide contributions to epidemics on earth
    Chapter 2: Conquering the God of Plague in China: a tale of over 60 years
    Chapter 3: Cholera (Blue skin disease) and its history
    Chapter 4: Spreading of cholera along rivers in early times of the USA before detection of the agents of disease
    Chapter 5: Human cercarial dermatitis (HCD) or swimmer's itch along rivers and lakes
    Chapter 6: Blood sucking leeches
    not only nasty but also dangerous and helpful
    Chapter 7: Important foodbornetrematodiases in Lower Mekong River Basin
    Chapter 8: Important protozoan diseases in Lower Mekong River Basin
    Chapter 9: Free-living amoebae and associated drug resistant bacteria in surface waters-A public health concern?
    Chapter 10. Nile River, Impact on Human Health in Egypt from Pharaohs until now
    Chapter 11: Epidemic status of schistosomiasis control in Guangdong province. Chapter 12: Konna
    a help for a self-help project at the Niger River in Mali
    Chapter 13: Leishmaniasis in Israel and Palestinian territories
    Chapter 14: Past and present of tropical diseases in the Amazon river
    Chapter 15: Brazil's big river projects and their impact on the occurrence of tropical diseases
    Chapter 16: The major rivers and the genesis of the recent area of ticks Ixodes persulcatus in Western Siberia
    Chapter 17: The Main River and Main-Danube Canal
    a hub for Ponto-Caspian parasite invasion
    Chapter 18: "Father Rhine"
    from the Alps to the North Sea
    Chapter 19: The River Rhine as hotspot of parasite invasions
    Chapter 20: Free-living amoebae in rivers and ponds and their multiple role in environmental health.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Christopher Peacock, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, WA, Australia.
    Contents:
    The eukaryotic pathogen databases : a functional genomic resource integrating data from human and veterinary parasites
    From sequence mapping to genome assemblies
    Sequencing and annotation of mitochondrial genomes from individual parasitic helminths
    A beginners guide to estimating the non-synonymous to synonymous rate ratio of all protein-coding genes in a genome
    Exploiting genetic variation to discover genes involved in important disease phenotypes
    Identification and analysis of ingi-related retroposons in the trypanosomatid genomes
    Approaches for studying mRNA decay mediated by SIDER2 retroposons in Leishmania
    Gene suppression in schistosomes using RNAi
    Construction of Trypanosoma brucei illumina RNA-seq libraries enriched for transcript ends
    Techniques to study epigenetic control and the epigenome in parasites
    The genome-wide identification of promotor regions in Toxoplasma gondii
    RNA-seq approaches for determining mRNA abundance in Leishmania
    Protein microarrays for parasite antigen discovery
    A transposon-based tool for transformation and mutagenesis in Trypanosomatid protozoa
    Separation of basic proteins from Leishmania using a combination of free flow electrophoresis (FFE) and 2D electrophoresis (2-DE) under basic conditions
    Proteomic analysis of posttranslational modifications using iTRAQ in Leishmania
    Large-scale differential proteome analysis in Plamsmodium falciparum under drug treatment
    Use of ¹³C stable isotope labelling for pathway and metabolic flux analysis in Leishmania parasites
    Molecular genotyping of Trypanosoma cruzi for lineage assignment and population genetics
    Screening Leishmania donovani complex-specific genes required for visceral disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Sven Klimpel, Thomas Kuhn, Julian Münster, Dorian D. Dörge, Regina Klapper, Judith Kochmann.
    Summary: This textbook provides a comprehensive, reliable and practical guide to the dissection and parasitological examination of marine fish and cephalopods. The first part provides a general introduction, presenting basic information on: parasitology, ecology of the marine environment, history and methods of fisheries and aquaculture, as well as the ecology of marine fish and cephalopods and the impact of parasites on hosts. In turn, the second part provides general information on the morphology and anatomy of marine fish and cephalopods using the example of abundant morphotypes (including e.g. habitus photos of the body cavity and internal organs). The third part covers the relevant parasitic groups, their ecology (e.g. lifecycles, transmission), related diseases, and detection. The fourth part, a comprehensive methods section, provides essential protocols and applications of common dissection methods (for roundfish, flatfish and cephalopods) and stomach content analyses, as well as parasite preservation, preparation and molecular identification. Basic calculations of the most common infection and ecological parameters are also introduced. The book's fifth and final part provides information on health risks associated with fish and cephalopod consumption, as well as the prevention of human infection through the correct handling and processing of fish samples. The appendix provides e.g. blank sheets for recording fish dissections and parasitological examinations.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Anatomy and morphology of fish and cephalopods
    Chapter 3. Parasitic groups
    Chapter 4. Techniques
    Chapter 5. Food safety considerations
    Appendix
    Register.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editors, Nico J. Smit, Niel L. Bruce and Kerry A. Hadfield.
    Summary: This book offers the first comprehensive review of parasitic Crustacea, which are among the most successful and diverse parasites. Starting with an introductory chapter, followed by an historic overview and topic-specific chapters, each presenting a different aspect of parasitic crustacean biology, it enables readers to gain a better understanding of how these parasites function and allows direct comparisons between the different parasitic crustacean groups. The authors also discuss, in depth, the adaptations and interactions that have made parasitic Crustacea as successful as they are today, covering topics ranging from the history of their discovery, their biodiversity, phylogeny, evolution and life strategies to their role as vectors, or hosts of other organisms, and their significance in ecological processes. Consisting of ten chapters from leading international experts in the field, this volume offers a one-stop resource for all researchers, lecturers, students and practitioners.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. History of Discovery of Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 3. Biodiversity and Taxonomy of the Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 4. Adaptations and Types of Crustacean Symbiotic Associations
    Chapter 5. Life Cycle and Life History Strategies of Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 6. Effects of Parasitic Crustacea on Hosts
    Chapter 7. Parasitic Crustacea as Vectors
    Chapter 8. Hypersymbionts and Hyperparasites of Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 9. Unravelling the Evolutions of the Rhizocephala: A Case study for Molecular Based Phylogeny in the Parasitic Crustacea
    Chapter 10. The Ecological Significance of Parasitic Crustaceans.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Monica Florin-Christensen, Leonhard Schnittger, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an in-depth yet concise overview of the most common and emerging protozoa that cause diseases in both farm animals and companion animals. As outlined in the concise introduction, pathogenic protozoans represent an evolutionary highly diverse and little understood group of disease-causing microorganisms. For each of the featured parasitic unicellular eukaryotes, it discusses the morphology, lifecycle, epidemiology and host-pathogen interactions. In addition, the book highlights the latest developments in diagnostic methods, as well as prevention and treatment strategies. Thorough information on genomes and genetic manipulation strategies for some of the protozoa covered in this book is also included. Infections involving parasitic protozoa can cause productivity losses and/or reduce the quality of life of infected animals. Some infections are zoonotic, posing an on-going public health threat. In most cases, prevention and treatment are either non-existent or need considerable improvement. On the other hand, a great deal of research has recently been conducted on these organisms, yielding valuable new information on their global distribution and revealing the mechanisms of host-pathogen interactions at the molecular level - and essential insights that can be used for the development of new control tools. This book includes extensive information on both basic aspects and recent scientific discoveries on these protozoa and thus constitutes a unique resource for students, veterinarians, and researchers alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    College of American Pathologists Microbiology Resource Committee ; Bobbi S. Pritt.
    Summary: "User-friendly guide containing more than 70 full-color identifications of parasites commonly found in the clinical laboratory plus detailed descriptions of the most significant morphologic elements, ecology, and clinical significance."-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    volume editor, Maria Luisa Brandi.
    Contents:
    Primary hyperparathyroidism / Masi, L.
    Asymptomatic primary hyperparathyroidism / Clarke, B.L.
    Normocalcemic hyperparathyroidism / Corbetta, S.
    Familial and hereditary forms of primary hyperparathyroidism / Cetani, F., Saponaro, F., Borsari, S., Marcocci, C.
    Familial hypocalciuric hypercalcemia and neonatal severe hyperparathyroidism / Vannucci, L., Brandi, M.L.
    Parathyroid carcinoma / Cetani, F., Pardi, E., Marcocci, C.
    Nonparathyroid hypercalcemia / Goltzman, D.
    Secondary and tertiary hyperparathyroidism / Messa, P., Alfieri, C.M.
    Hypoparathyroidism / Hakami, Y., Khan, A.
    Classification of hypoparathyroid disorders / Cianferotti, L.
    Clinical presentation of hypoparathyroidism / Giusti, F., Brandi, M.L.
    Inactivating PTH/PTHrP signaling disorders / Mantovani, G., Elli, F.M.
    Conventional treatment of hypoparathyroidism / Marcucci, G., Brandi, M.L.
    A new era for chronic management of hypoparathyroidism : parathyroid hormone peptides / Marcucci, G., Brandi, M.L.
    Digital Access Karger 2019
  • Digital
    Mahmoud F. Sakr.
    Summary: The book offers a comprehensive overview of all parathyroid gland disorders both, benign and malignant. It emphases established concepts, presents the ongoing controversies, challenges and debates on diagnosis and treatment of different parathyroid gland disorders, with a view of clarifying some uncertainties, making suggestions to resolve others, and establishing strategies to reach therapeutic success.In addition to general information on parathyroid gland embryology, surgical anatomy, histology and physiology, the chapters explore hyperparathyroidism, osteitis fibrosa cystica, hypoparathyroidism, hungry bone syndrome, the importance of calcium in the human body and differential diagnosis of hypercalcemia. The last chapters investigate post-thyroidectomy hypocalcemia, thyroid cancer, recent intra-operative localizing tools, and illustrate new techniques of parathyroidectomy, as well as parathyroid transplantation. The book will be an invaluable and indispensable source of knowledge and reference for all specialists and trainees entrusted with the care of patients suffering from parathyroid disease.

    Contents:
    Parathyroid Glands: Historical Review
    Embryology of the Parathyroid Gland
    Surgical Anatomy of the Parathyroid Gland
    Histology of the Parathyroid Gland
    Physiology of the Parathyroid Gland
    Calcium: Why is it Important? Hyperparathyroidism (HPT)
    Osteitis Fibrosa Cystica
    Hypoparathyroidism
    Metabolic Syndromes of Parathyroid Failure
    Hungry Bone Syndrome
    Post-thyroidectomy Hypocalcemia: Incidence and Risk Factors
    Post-thyroidectomy Hypocalcemia: Clinical Presentation
    Post-thyroidectomy Hypocalcemia: Prevention
    Parathyroid Transplantation
    Parathyroid Cancer
    Intra-operative tools in Parathyroidectomy
    Parathyroidectomy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Adrian Covic, David Goldsmith, Pablo A. Ureña Torres, editors.
    Summary: This concise book provides practical strategies to help nephrologists and endocrinologists correctly diagnose and treat the various forms of parathyroid disease they may encounter in the management of chronic kidney disease. Each chapter deals with various topics related to parathyroid gland anatomy and physiology, as well as diagnostic tests and their particularities in regard to chronic disease. The book highlights the range of therapies used for the treatment of secondary hyperparathyroidism, and critically analyses the latest research in the field. Providing an up-to-date review of the current literature, including innovations in both medical and surgical treatment and current indications for parathyroidectomy, this practice-oriented book is an excellent resource for nephrologists, endocrinologists, endocrine surgeons and family medicine physicians.

    Contents:
    Parathyroid glands in CKD: anatomy, histology, physiology and molecular biology in CKD
    PTH regulation by the Klotho/FGF23 axis in CKD
    Parathyroid Imaging in Patients with Renal Hyperparathyroidism
    PTH regulation by phosphate and miRNAs
    Relation between PTH and biochemical markers of MBD
    Effect of PTH on the Hematologic System
    Control of secondary hyperparathyroidism (SPHT) by older and newer vitamin D compounds
    Parathyroidectomy in Chronic Kidney disease
    Relation between PTH and the risk of mortality in CKD.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Karen Bearss, Cynthia R. Johnson, Benjamin L. Handen, Eric Butter, Luc Lecavalier, Tristram Smith, and Lawrence Scahill.
    Summary: The RUBI Autism Network has developed and tested a structured parent training manual for children with autism spectrum disorder and disruptive behaviours. The manual is based on principles of applied behaviour analysis and is designed for therapists to use with parents of children with autism spectrum disorder and co-occurring challenging behaviours, such as tantrums, noncompliance, difficulties with transitions, and aggression.
    Digital Access Oxford [2018?]
  • Digital
    Karen Bearss, Cynthia R. Johnson, Benjamin L. Handen, Eric Butter, Luc LeCavalier, Tristram Smith, Lawrence Scahill
    Summary: "Parent training for disruptive behavior is an 11-session intervention for parents who wish to learn how to reduce disruptive behaviors and increase adaptive skills in their children with ASD. Each session introduces effective behavior change strategies and includes easy-to-use worksheets, checklists, and take-home activities to help parents apply what they have learned. By participating in this intervention with a trained therapist, parents can help their children overcome behavior problems, promoting happier kids and families."--Back cover
    Digital Access Oxford 2018
  • Digital
    Suanne Kowal-Connelly.
    Summary: "Puberty is tough on kids--and maybe even more so on parents! Parenting Through Puberty explains the physical and emotional changes you can expect to see in your child. Dr. Kowal-Connelly covers the nitty-gritty of adolescents' changing bodies, and, critically, addresses the emotional toll puberty can take, covering issues of moodiness, body image, and self-esteem. Dr. Kowal-Connelly's reassuring advice also includes ways to encourage your tween or teen to embrace a healthy, active lifestyle in these crucial years, with tips on exercise and nutrition"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I. The physical changes. The basics of physical growth during puberty
    Body image is everything
    Variations of puberty growth and growing pains
    Part II. The emotional changes. Understanding the emotional and intellectual stages of puberty
    Moodiness, depression, and anxiety: what parents need to know
    The value of your child's one-on-one time with the pediatrician
    Part III. A time to value health and wellness. Taking control of weight issues
    Living with a chronic condition
    The effects of puberty on exercise and sports performance
    Caring about health and wellness
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Print
    by B.C. Gruenberg...
    Contents:
    v
    .1. For parents of children under school age.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    O656 .G88
    1
  • Digital
    Shiri Sadeh-Sharvit and James Lock.
    Contents:
    Understanding the risk of the offspring of parents with eating disorders
    The broader context of the transition to parenthood in adults with eating disorders and their partners / Shiri Sadeh-Sharvit, Madeline R. Sacks, James D. Lock
    The development of typical and atypical feeding and eating processes in children and youth / Shiri Sadeh-Sharvit, Madeline R. Sacks, James D. Lock
    Two families seeking help
    Overview of parent-based prevention
    Adapting parent-based prevention to diverse family structures and backgrounds
    Treatment planning and real-time evaluation using assessment tools
    Phase one : setting up joint goals
    Session 1 : gearing up
    Session 2 : the family meal
    Session 3 : embracing change
    Phase two : distinguishing the parental eating disorder from parental functioning
    Session 4-5, 7-8 : individual sessions with the affected parent
    Session 6 : a conjoint meeting with both parents
    Phase three : enhancing parental efficacy and family resilience
    Parent-based prevention in action : Stacey and Rob
    Parent-based prevention in action : Dave and Gabby.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Giuseppe Vallar and H. Branch Coslett.
    Summary: "The Parietal Lobe, Volume 151, the latest release from the Handbook of Clinical Neurology series, provides a foundation on the neuroanatomy, neurophysiology and clinical neurology/neuropsychology of the parietal lobe that is not only applicable to both basic researchers and clinicians, but also to students and specialists who are interested in learning more about disorders brought on by damage or dysfunction. Topics encompass the evolution, anatomy, connections, and neurophysiology, the major neurological and neuropsychological deficits and syndromes caused by damage, the potential for improvement via transcranial stimulation, and the role of the parietal in the cerebral networks for perception and action"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Neuro-anatomy and neurophysiology of the parietal lobe. The history of the neurophysiology and neurology of the parietal lobe
    The evolution of the parietal lobe: rats, monkeys, apes and humans
    Cortico-cortical and cortico-subcortical connections of the parietal lobe
    Somatosensory maps
    The parietal lobe and pain perception
    The parietal lobe and the vestibular system
    Multisensory and sensorimotor maps
    The parietal lobe "reach" region
    Section 2: Neurological and neuropsychological deficits after parietal lobe damage. Somatosensory deficits
    Pain syndromes and the parietal lobe
    Optic ataxia
    Simultanagnosia and balint's syndrome
    Perceptual deficits of object identification: the apperceptive agnosias
    Unilateral spatial neglect
    Disorders of body knowledge
    Constructional apraxia
    Limb apraxia
    Language deficits
    Memory deficits
    Gerstmann's syndrome
    Parietal lobe epilepsy
    Transcranial stimulations of the parietal lobe for improving neurological deficits
    Section 3: The parietal lobe and brain networks for action and perception
    The "dorsal" parietal stream
    Action systems in the human brain
    Parietal lobe and tool use
    Parieto-frontal networks for eye-hand coordination and movements
    The parietal lobe and memory
    The parietal lobe "mirror" neuron system.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Dorothy L. Rosenthal, Eva M. Wojcik, Daniel F.I. Kurtycz, editors.
    Contents:
    Pathogenesis of Urothelial Carcinoma
    Adequacy of Urine Specimens (Adequacy)
    Negative for High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Negative)
    Atypical Urothelial Cells (AUC)
    Suspicious for High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Suspicious)
    High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (HGUC)
    Low Grade Urothelial Neoplasia (LGUN)
    Other Malignancies Primary and Metastatic and Miscellaneous Lesions
    Ancillary Studies in Urinary Cytology
    Cytopreparatory Techniques
    Clinical Management, Including Microscopic Hematuria.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Dorothy L. Rosenthal, Eva M. Wojcik, Daniel F.I. Kurtycz, editors.
    Summary: The first edition of The Paris System for Reporting Urinary Cytology introduced a completely new paradigm for detecting bladder cancer by urine cytology. This system concentrated on defining morphological characteristics of the most clinically significant form of bladder cancer, High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma. This new approach has been widely accepted throughout the world, and has become part of the daily practice of cytology. Considering that the first edition of The Paris System (TPS) introduced a new model of urinary cytodiagnosis, verification and expansion of initial material and data were anticipated. Based on evolving knowledge and readership requests, the group of highly experienced authors have created a new edition of TPS. This second edition includes areas and issues not originally covered. A new chapter on urine cytology of the upper tract, a rarely addressed topic, has been introduced. Furthermore, the issue of cellular degeneration is discussed in the criteria of all diagnostic categories. Examples of standardized reports are included in each chapter. Most importantly, a separate chapter presents data defining the risk of malignancy (ROM) for each diagnostic category to inform clinical management. New high quality images augment those of the first edition to better illustrate diagnostic clues and potential pitfalls. In addition to chapters on diagnostic criteria, current concepts of pathogenesis of bladder cancer, specimen adequacy and preparation, and ancillary tests are covered in separate chapters. A bonus to the volume is a comprehensive history of urine as the earliest diagnostic sample of human disease, richly illustrated with artworks from major museums. Written by internationally recognized authorities, this comprehensive and evidence-based guide to urine cytology is supported by the newest data confirming the original concept and significance of diagnostic criteria defining High Grade Urothelial Carcinoma. TPS is an essential tool for anyone who is practicing urinary cytology, including cytotechnologists, pathologists-in-training and practicing pathologists. This book should find a place in every cytology laboratory throughout the world. The Concept has been endorsed by the American Society of Cytopathology, and the International Academy of Cytology.

    Contents:
    Pathogenesis of Urothelial Carcinoma
    Adequacy of Urine Specimens (Adequacy)
    Negative for High-Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Negative)
    Atypical Urothelial Cells (AUC)
    Suspicious for High-Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (Suspicious)
    High-Grade Urothelial Carcinoma (HGUC)
    Low-Grade Urothelial Neoplasia (LGUN)
    Cytology of the Upper Urinary Tract
    Other Malignancies Primary and Metastatic and Miscellaneous Lesions
    Ancillary Studies in Urinary Cytology
    Cytopreparatory Techniques
    Risk of Malignancy (ROM) and Clinical Management.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Myung K. Park.
    Summary: Park's Pediatric Cardiology for Practitioners is the essential medical reference book for the ever-changing field of pediatric cardiology. Comprehensive in its content, it provides the practical guidance you need to diagnose and manage children with congenital and acquired heart disease. From history and physical examination through preventative treatment and the management of special problems, the fully revised 6th edition incorporates all of the latest concepts in cardiology, distilled in a way that is understandable to pediatricians, family practitioners, NPs, and PAs alike. Apply the latest knowledge and methods with coverage of surgical techniques in pediatric cardiology, the application of interventional non-surgical techniques, blood pressure standards, and cardiac arrhythmia treatments. Easily grasp the latest techniques with helpful line drawings throughout. Select the best approaches for your patients with extensive coverage of special problems, including congestive heart failure and syncope.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Myung K. Park, Mehrdad Salamat.
    Summary: "Providing authoritative, everyday guidance in the diagnosis and management of children with congenital and acquired heart disease, Park's Pediatric Cardiology for Practitioners is the go-to reference of choice for pediatricians, family practitioners, NPs, and PAs--as well as medical students, residents, and fellows. The 7th Edition of this core text comprehensively covers every aspect of pediatric cardiology in an easy-to-read, practical manner for the non-specialist"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Basic tools in routine evaluation of cardiac patients. History taking
    Physical examination
    Electrocardiography
    Chest radiography
    Part 2: Special tools in evaluation of cardiac patients. Noninvasive imaging tools
    Other noninvasive investigation tools
    Invasive procedures
    Pathophysiology. Fetal and perinatal circulation
    Pathophysiology of left-to-right shunt lesions
    Pathophysiology of obstructive and valvular regurgitation lesions
    Pathophysiology of cyanotic congenital heart defects
    Part 4: Specific congenital heart defects. Left-to-right shunt lesions
    Obstructive lesions
    Cyanotic congenital heart defects
    Miscellaneous congenital cardiac conditions
    Vascular ring
    Chamber localization and cardiac malposition
    Part 5: Acquired heart disease. Primary myocardial disease
    Cardiovascular infections
    Acute rheumatic fever
    Valvular heart disease
    Cardiac tumors
    Cardiovascular involvement in systemic diseases
    Part 6: Arrhythmias and atrioventricular conduction disturbances. Cardiac arrhythmias
    Disturbances of atrioventricular conduction
    Cardiac pacemakers and implantable cardioverter-defibrillators in children
    Part 7: Special problems. Congestive heart failure
    Systemic hypertension
    Pulmonary hypertension
    The child with chest pain
    Syncope
    Palpitation
    Dyslipidemia and other cardiovascular risk factors
    Athletes with cardiac problems
    Cardiac transplantation
    Appendices. Miscellaneous
    Blood pressure values
    Cardiovascular risk factors
    Normal echocardiographic values
    Drugs used in pediatric cardiology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2021
  • Print
    Roger L. Albin.
    Summary: "Description and discussion of the many aspects of Parkinson disease (PD) is dogged by the fact that PD is an ambiguous concept. What we call PD is an etiologically and clinically heterogeneous meta-syndrome overlapping a number of other disorders. Definitions, diagnostic criteria, and classification schema provide essential common vocabularies for communication among clinicians and researchers. Definitions, diagnostic criteria, and classification schemes for PD, however, are constructs imposed on variable and imperfectly understood disease biology. Difficulties with formulation of PD definitions, diagnostic criteria, and classification schemes include historical and contemporary use of competing definitions of PD, disease heterogeneity, the existence of disorders with overlapping clinical and pathological features, and ambiguous use of the terms disease and syndrome. For the purposes of exposition and discussion in this book, an inclusive, perhaps vague, definition of PD is employed:"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Definition, History, Nosology, and Classification
    Epidemiology
    Pathology
    Pathophysiology I : Basal Ganglia Architecture and The Standard Model
    : Pathophysiology II : Neurotransmitter System Dysfunctions
    Genetics of Parkinson Disease
    Pathogenesis
    Prodromal Parkinson Disease
    Clinical Features I : Initial Evaluation
    Clinical Features II : Non-Motor Features
    Clinical Features III : Natural History
    Pharmacology I : L-Dopa Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Pharmacology II : Treating Parkinson Disease
    Surgery
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC382 .A43 2023
    1
  • Digital
    Lars P. Klimaschewski.
    Summary: What happens in the brain when we are ageing? How does neuronal cell death occur when we become forgetful? Which new therapies are available to combat the death of brain cells? This non-fiction book informs those interested in neuroscience and medicine about the latest findings on the therapy of neurodegeneration with a focus on Alzheimer's dementia and Parkinson's disease. Supported by illustrative drawings, Lars P. Klimaschewski presents the latest developments in neurobiological research on ageing in a comprehensible way and reports exciting news from the Alzheimer's and Parkinson's laboratories worldwide. From the contents Introduction to brain development: Why do we need billions of nerve cells? What distinguishes our cerebral cortex from that of other mammals? - Ageing and neurodegenerative diseases: Why are nerve cells lost? The normal ageing process; B-synuclein: A key protein in Parkinson's disease; Dementia and Alzheimer's disease: The amyloid and tau pathology; Viral infections in neurodegenerative diseases: Does Covid-19 lead to neurodegeneration? - Saving or replacing nerve cells: Stem cell, immune or antisense therapies? The author Prof. Dr. med. Lars P. Klimaschewski is a professor at the Medical University of Innsbruck, head of the Institute of Neuroanatomy there and the author of numerous papers on neuronal degeneration and regeneration.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    1 Introduction to Brain Development: Why do We Need so Many Nerve Cells?
    1.1 Neurons and Glia in the Central Nervous System
    1.2 What Happens During Brain Development?
    1.3 Evolutionarily Old Brain Parts are Simpler in Structure than the Neocortex
    1.4 What Distinguishes the Left from the Right Brain?
    1.5 Brain Development in Childhood and Adolescence
    1.6 The Child's Brain is Enormously Plastic and can Still Heal
    1.7 Is a Large Brain "Smarter" than a Small One?
    1.8 Absolute and Relative Brain Weight 1.9 With the Second Evolutionary Leap, Our Brain Reaches its Maximum Size
    1.10 Neural Stem Cells Remain Capable of Dividing for a Long Time
    1.11 The Frontal Lobe is Especially Important for Higher Brain Functions
    1.12 The Prefrontal Cortex Encodes Human Specific Properties
    1.13 Brain Performance in Comparison
    Further Reading
    2 Aging and Neurodegenerative Diseases: Why do Nerve Cells Die?
    2.1 The Normal Aging Process
    2.1.1 Mechanisms of Cellular Aging
    DNA Telomeres Determine the Number of Cell Divisions
    Aging Cells Maintain a Chronic Inflammation The Importance of Protein Homeostasis for Cellular Aging
    Self-cleaning of Nerve Cells
    Two Sides of a Coin: Oxygen Radicals
    Endogenous Radical Scavengers Protect Our Nerve Cells
    Chronic Inflammatory Processes in the Brain
    2.1.2 Neuronal Cell Death
    How do neurons die?
    2.1.3 Blood Supply of the Aging Brain
    Barrier Disorders are Not Uncommon in the Elderly
    2.2 Parkinson's Disease
    2.2.1 General Pathomechanisms
    The Problem with Parkinson's Begins in the Lower Brainstem
    2.2.2 Special Morphology of Affected Neurons
    Special Requirements for Highly Branched Neurons Many Amine-releasing Neurons are Constantly Active and Therefore More Easily Stressed
    2.2.3 Specific Causes of Parkinson's Disease
    2.2.4 Alpha-synuclein: A Key Protein in Parkinson's Disease
    Fibrils Are More Dangerous Than Aggregates
    Aggregates Are Not Only Found in Nerve Cells
    2.2.5 The Prion Theory of Parkinson's Disease
    Cranial Nerves Transport Pathological Proteins into the Brain
    The Difficulties of a Clear Pathogenesis of Parkinson's Disease
    2.3 Dementia and Alzheimer's Disease
    2.3.1 How Does Alzheimer's Disease Manifest Itself?
    2.3.2 General Pathomechanisms
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Patrik Verstreken.
    Contents:
    The neurogenetics of Parkinson's Disease and putative links to other neurodegenerative disorders / C.M. Lill, C. Klein
    Electron transport train / L. Aerts, V.A. Morais
    Mitochondrial fission and fusion / V.L. Hewitt, A.J. Whitworth
    Axonal mitochondrial transport / E. Shlevkov, T.L. Schwarz
    Mitophagy / L. King, H. Plun-Favreau
    Autophagy / P.A. Lewis, M. Perez-Carrion, G. Piccoli
    Endocytosis and synaptic function / S.F. Soukup, P. Verstreken, S. Vilain
    Neuroinflammation as a potential mechanism underlying Parkinsons Disease / C. Cebrián, D. Sulzer
    Protien translation in Parkinson's Disease / J.W. Kim, L. Abalde-Atristain, H. Jia, I. Martin, T.M. Dawson, V.L. Dawson.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joseph Jankovic, MD, Eduardo Tolosa, MD.
    Summary: Top experts from all over the world have been brought together by the editors, to give a world of expertise on this important subject, with a strong emphasis on therapy and management.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Kapil D. Sethi, Roberto Erro, Kailash P. Bhatia, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses the challenges in the differential diagnosis and management of paroxysmal movement disorders. It provides the latest information on the genetics and pathophysiology, neurophysiology and neuroimaging of the core group of disorders in the field, namely the paroxysmal dyskinesias (PxD). Focused and concise, this guide features chapters that discuss other conditions that may be paroxysmal such as, episodic ataxia, startle syndromes and other more complicated groups of paroxysmal movement disorders such as ATP1A3 spectrum disorders. A chapter on secondary (acquired) paroxysmal dyskinesia highlights medical and other disorders that may result in paroxysmal dyskinesia. The book features a particularly nuanced chapter that discusses recent discoveries in the genetic aspects of PxD, relaying that paroxysmal dyskinesias are not channelpathies, but in fact are synaptophies and transportopathies. Additionally, expertly written chapters are supplemented by high quality images, tables, and videos. Paroxysmal Movement Disorders: A Practical Guide is primarily written to educate the reader on how to make a syndromic diagnosis of paroxysmal movement disorders and how to build the diagnostic work-up accordingly, as well as how to manage patients with paroxysmal movement disorders.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Paroxysmal Dyskinesia: Definitions and Clinical Approach
    Definitions
    Clinical Approach
    References
    Chapter 2: The Early History of Paroxysmal Dyskinesias
    Earliest Descriptions of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia Were Reported as Epilepsy
    Earliest Reports That These Types of Conditions Are a Paroxysmal Disorder of Involuntary Movements
    Early Reports of Paroxysmal Hypnogenic Dyskinesia
    Early Reports of Transient Paroxysmal Dystonia/Torticollis in Infancy
    Early Reports of Paroxysmal Ataxias and Tremor
    References Chapter 3: Paroxysmal Kinesigenic Dyskinesia
    PRRT2-Related PKD
    PKD Associated with Other Genetic Conditions
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 4: Paroxysmal Non-kinesigenic Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    Epidemiology
    History
    Genetics
    Clinical Features
    Investigations
    Treatment
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 5: Paroxysmal Exercise-Induced Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    SLC2A1 (GLUT1)-Related Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    GCH1-Related Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    ECHS1-Related Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Deficiency
    Early-Onset Parkinson's Disease Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 6: Acquired Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    Clinical Features
    Etiology
    Autoimmune/Inflammatory
    Endocrine/Metabolic
    Hypoparathyroidism and Pseudohypoparathyroidism (HP and PHP)
    Hyperthyroidism
    Disorders of Glucose Metabolism
    Autoimmune Disorders
    Faciobrachial Dystonic Seizures (FBDS)
    Vascular
    Trauma
    Spinal Cord Lesions
    Functional (Psychogenic) Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Miscellaneous Causes
    Investigations
    Treatment
    References
    Chapter 7: Pathophysiology of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    PRRT2 PRRT2 Mice
    PNKD
    PNKD Mice
    GLUT1
    Glut1 Mice
    Other "Dyskinetic" Genes
    SCN8A
    KCNMA1
    Conclusions
    References
    Chapter 8: Neurophysiology of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Introduction
    Neurophysiology in the Diagnosis of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Electroencephalography
    Electromyography
    Other Clinical Neurophysiology Studies
    Neurophysiology in the Pathophysiological Study of Paroxysmal Dyskinesia
    Magnetoencephalography
    Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation
    Other Research Neurophysiology Studies
    Conclusion
    References Chapter 9: Other Paroxysmal Movement Disorders
    Introduction
    ADCY5 Mutations
    ATP1A3 Spectrum Disorders
    SCN8A Mutations
    CACNA1A Mutations
    SLC16A2 Mutations
    References
    Chapter 10: Functional Paroxysmal Movement Disorders
    Introduction
    Phenotypic Characteristics
    Associated Signs
    Diagnosis and Treatment Approach
    References
    Chapter 11: Episodic Ataxias
    Introduction
    EA1
    EA2
    EA3-EA8
    Other Paroxysmal or Episodic Disorders Presenting with Ataxia
    References
    Index
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Yuzuru Kanakura, Taroh Kinoshita, Jun-ichi Nishimura, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Nicola J. Curtin, Ricky A. Sharma, editors.
    Contents:
    History of the discovery of poly (ADP-ribose)
    Discovery of the PARP superfamily and focus on the lesser exhibited but not lesser talented members
    The role of PARPs in DNA Strand Break Repair
    TIPs: Tankyrase Interacting Proteins
    PARP and Carcinogenesis
    Multitasking roles for poly(ADP-ribosyl)ation in aging and longevity
    Overview of PARP Inhibitor Design and Optimization
    Structure Based Design of PARP Inhibitors
    Preclinical chemosensitization by PARP inhibitors
    Classification of PARP inhibitors based on PARP trapping and catalytic inhibition, and rationale for combinations with topoisomerase I inhibitors and alkylating agents
    Radiosensitisation by poly(ADP-ribose) polymerase inhibition
    The vasoactivity of PARP inhibitors
    Synthetic lethality with Homologous Recombination Repair defects
    Targeting tumour hypoxia with PARP Inhibitors: Contextual synthetic lethality
    Other determinants of sensitivity
    Synthetic sickness with molecularly targeted agents against the EGFR pathway
    Disruption of DNA repair by cell cycle and transcriptional CDK inhibition
    Resistance to PARP Inhibitors Mediated by Secondary BRCA1/2 Mutations
    PARP inhibitor resistance
    what is beyond BRCA1 or BRCA2 restoration
    Introduction to PARPi clinical trials and future directions
    Clinical trials investigating PARP inhibitors as single agents
    Clinical trials of PARP inhibitors with chemotherapy
    Combination of PARP inhibitors with clinical radiotherapy
    Biomarkers for PARP Inhibitors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Andrew Sizer, Bidyut Kumar, Guy Calcott.
    Summary: "Preface: The current format of the Part 2 MRCOG examination is now well established with the change to written papers containing single best answer (SBA) and extended matching questions (EMQs) commencing in March 2015. The Part 2 MRCOG examination is primarily concerned with testing candidates' knowledge of the entire specialty of Obstetrics & Gynaecology as defined by the RCOG curriculum. The new Part 3 examination now provides the clinical assessment. It is always preferable to enter an examination having had ample opportunity to practice the type of questions with which one will be faced. To this end we have produced this book that contains 250 SBA and 250 EMQ questions"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Andrew Sizer, Chandrika Balachander, Nibedan Biswas, Richard Foon, Anthony Griffiths, Sheena Hodgett, Banchita Sahu, Martyn Underwood.
    Contents:
    Questions. IT, Governance and Research
    Core Surgical Skills
    Postoperative Care
    Surgical Procedures
    Antenatal Care
    Maternal Medicine
    Management of Labour
    Management of Delivery
    Postnatal Care
    Gynaecological Problems
    Subfertility
    Sexual and Reproductive Health
    Early Pregnancy Problems
    Gynaecological Oncology
    Urogynaecology and Pelvic Floor Problems
    Explanations. IT, Governance and Research
    Core Surgical Skills
    Postoperative Care
    Surgical Procedures
    Antenatal Care
    Maternal Medicine
    Management of Labour
    Management of Delivery
    Postnatal Care
    Gynaecological Problems
    Subfertility
    Sexual and Reproductive Health
    Early Pregnancy Problems
    Gynaecological Oncology
    Urogynaecology and Pelvic Floor Problems .
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Albert Losken, Moustapha Hamdi ; illustrations by Jennifer N. Gentry.
    Summary: The new edition includes increased video/DVD coverage, new chapters on BRAVA tissue expansion, flaps, and increased detail on mega-filling the breast with fat. The book is published with a bundled eBook, which includes an image library so all the images can be downloaded.

    Contents:
    Part One: Evolution of oncoplastic surgery
    Fundamentals of oncoplastic breast surgery
    Current approach to oncoplastic breast surgery
    How to incorporate oncoplastic surgery into your practice
    Part Two: Principles and considerations of oncoplastic breast conservation
    Applied anatomy and breast aesthetics: definition and assessment
    Breast-conserving therapy
    Breast-conserving therapy: decision-making and anticipating the unfavorable aesthetic and functional result
    Oncologic safety of the oncoplastic approach for breast conservation surgery
    Improving the partial mastectomy deformity
    Improving the quadrantectomy defect
    Breast radiotherapy in oncoplastic surgery
    Indications and benefits of oncoplastic breast surgery
    Designing the oncoplastic operation
    Timing of the oncoplastic reconstruction: immediate, delayed, and delayed-immediate
    Psychosocial aspects of oncoplastic breast conservation
    Part Three: Immediate partial breast reconstruction
    Reduction techniques to optimize results
    Reduction and mastopexy techniques with parenchymal autoaugmentation
    Central defect reconstruction
    The role of local flaps as volume replacement in oncoplastic reconstruction
    Latissimus dorsi miniflap reconstruction
    Endoscopic latissimus dorsi flap reconstruction
    Omental flap reconstruction
    Pedicled perforator flap reconstruction
    Partial breast reconstruction using distant flaps
    Part Four: Correction of the breast-conserving therapy deformity: delayed partial breast reconstruction
    Classification and analysis of the breast-conserving therapy deformity
    Rearrangement surgery
    Correction of the breast-conserving therapy deformity using local flaps
    Perforator flap reconstruction of breast-conserving therapy deformities
    Local perforator flaps in oncoplastic breast-conserving surgery: the nottingham experience
    Breast lumpectomy reconstruction with external vacuum expansion and autologous fat grafting
    Fat grafting in the breast-conserving therapy deformity
    Can implants correct a breast-conserving therapy deformity?
    Part Five: Outcomes and future directions
    Cancer surveillance after partial breast reconstruction
    Complications and outcomes after immediate partial breast reconstruction
    Outcomes and tumor recurrence after oncoplastic surgery of the breast: eighteen-year follow-up.
  • Digital
    Cristina Baldauf, editor.
    Summary: It has long been claimed that addressing biodiversity loss and other environmental problems demands a better understanding of the social dimensions of conservation; nevertheless, the active participation of indigenous peoples and local communities (IPLCs) in conservation initiatives is still a challenging and somehow controversial issue. In this context, this book hopes to give voice to other perspectives related to biodiversity conservation beyond the "fortress conservation" model and emphasize one of the pillars of democracy - popular participation. It covers a wide range of environments and issues of special significance to the topic, such as the expansion of culturally constructed niches, protected areas and food security, community-based management, participatory agroforestry, productive restoration and biocultural conservation. The contents also explore the limitations and shortcomings of participatory practices in protected areas, the relationship between the global crisis of democracy and the decline of biocultural diversity, as well as present current discussions on policy frameworks and governance systems for effective participatory biodiversity conservation. In sum, this book provides a comprehensive and realistic perspective on the social dimensions of conservation based on a series of interrelated themes in participatory biodiversity conservation. The connections between biocultural conservation and the current political and economic environment are highlighted through the chapters and the book closes with a debate on ways to reconcile human welfare, environmental justice and biodiversity conservation.

    Contents:
    1. Concepts and evolving perspectives on biodiversity conservation
    2. Domesticated Nature: The culturally constructed niche of humanity
    3. The right to food? Protected areas, conservation and access
    4. The role of local perceptions in environmental diagnosis
    5. People and nature conservation: Participatory praxis in natural protected areas planning and management
    6. Policy trends in the recognition of indigenous and local knowledge in Amazonia
    7. Community-based management of Amazonian biodiversity assets
    8. Mariculture of macroalgae as a social and environmental alternative in traditional communities located in the semi-arid coastal region of northeastern Brazil
    9. Challenges for rural livelihoods, participatory agroforestry and biodiversity conservation in a neotropical Mexican MAB reserve
    10. Participatory monitoring of natural commons in Brazil: Lessons from the literature and the field
    11. Productive restoration as a tool for socio-ecological landscape conservation: The case of "La Montaña" in Guerrero, Mexico
    12. ATBC's conservation activities around the world: How effective have our declarations and resolutions been in driving policy change and management responses?
    13. Avoiding deforestation policies: A socio-political approach
    14. Participatory biodiversity conservation: What prospects?
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Michael T. Wright, Krystyna Kongats, editors.
    Summary: "This groundbreaking resource explores core issues in participatory health research (PHR) and traces its global emergence as a force for improving health and well-being, health care services and quality of life."--Publisher.

    Contents:
    Central ThemesIntroduction:Michael WrightBuilding Consensus, Celebrating Diversity: The Work of the International Collaboration for Participatory Health Research:Michael WrightWhat is Participatory Health Research?Michael Wright, Jane SpringettEthics in Participatory Health Research:Sarah BanksEvaluating Participatory Health Research:Nina Wallerstein, John Oetzel, Jane SpringettThe Challenges of Reviewing the Participatory Health Research Literature:Jon Salsberg, Janet HarrisChildren and Participatory Health Research:Lisa GibbsThe Role of Participatory Health Research in Training Health Professionals:Irma BritoDemonstrating Impact in Participatory Health Research:Tina Cook, Jane SpringettThe Role of Theory in Participatory Health Research:Sónia AcioliRegional PerspectivesParticipatory Health Research in Portuguese-Speaking Countries: A Review:Irma BritoPartKommPlus
    The German Research Consortium for Healthy Communities:Michael WrightParticipatory Health Research and Post-Colonial Scholarship in Latin America:Francisco MercadoParticipatory Research in Health Care Organizations in North America: A Review:Paula Bush, Jon SalsbergParticipatory Health Research for Planning Work in Sweden:Margareta RämgårdParticipatory Health Research for Improving Healthcare in the Netherlands:Tineke AbmaA History of Participatory Health Research in North America: A Look Back From Where We Are Today:Jon SalsbergParticipatory Health Research in the UK and Ireland:Jane Springett, Siobhán O'Higgins.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Atul Bhargava and Shilpi Srivastava.
    Summary: Plant breeding has played a significant role in the development of human civilizations. Conventional plant breeding has significantly improved crop yield by genetically manipulating agronomically important traits. However, it has often been criticized for ignoring indigenous germplasm, failing to address the needs of the marginal and the poor farmers, and emphasizing selection for broad instead of local adaptation. Participatory plant breeding (PPB) is the process by which the producers and other stakeholders are actively involved in a plant-breeding programme, with opportunities to make decisions throughout. The Working Group on Participatory Plant Breeding (PPBwg) was established in 1996 under the framework of the Consultative Group on International Agricultural Research (CGIAR). Research in PPB can promote informed participation and trust in research among consumers and producers, and in recent years, PPB has had a significant impact on food production by quickly and cost-effectively producing improved crop varieties. At the same time, there has been significant research in the area. PPB offers significant advantages that are particularly relevant to developing countries where large investments in plant breeding have not led to increased production, especially in the marginal environments. In addition to the economic benefits, participatory research has a number of psychological, moral, and ethical benefits, which are the consequence of a progressive empowerment of the farming communities. PPB can empower groups such as women or less well-off farmers that are traditionally left out of the development process.This book explores the potential of PPB in the coming decades. The topic is more relevant since international breeding efforts for major crops are aimed at decentralizing local breeding methods to better incorporate the perspective of end users into the varietal development process. The first book incorporating the upcoming research on this novel breeding approach, it reviews the important tools and applications of PPB in an easy-to-read, succinct format, with illustrations to clarify these complex topics. It provides readers with a basic idea of participatory plant breeding as well as advances in the field and insights into the future to facilitate the successful integration of farmers into breeding programmes. This book is a valuable reference resource for agriculturists, agricultural advisers, policy makers, NGOs, post-doctoral students and scientists in agriculture, horticulture, forestry and botany.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Arabinda Kumar Rath, Narayan Sahoo, editors.
    Contents:
    Particle Therapy in the Third Millennium Current Status and Future Outlook
    Development of Cyclotrons for Proton and Particle Therapy
    Development of C-ion Radiotherapy Technologies in Japan
    Physical rationale for protontherapy and elements to build a clinical center
    Radiation Dosimetry of Proton Beams
    Clinical pencil beam scanning: present and future practices
    Treatment planning for protons
    An essay.- Radiation Therapy with Protons and Heavy Ions
    Robustness Quantification and Worst-Case Robust Optimization in Intensity-Modulated Proton Therapy
    Modeling of Biological Effect of Charged Particles for C-Ion RT
    SFUD, IMPT and plan robustness.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Henk G. Merkus, Gabriel M.H. Meesters, Wim Oostra, editors.
    Summary: This edited volume brings together the expertise of numerous specialists on the topic of particles - their physical, chemical, pharmacological and toxicological characteristics - when they are a component of pharmaceutical products and formulations. The book discusses in detail properties such as the composition, size, shape, surface properties and porosity of particles with respect to how they impact the formulations and products in which they are used and the effective delivery of pharmaceutical active ingredients. It considers all dosage forms of pharmaceuticals involving particles, from powders to tablets, creams to ointments, and solutions to dry-powder inhalers, also including the latest nanomedicine products. Further, it discusses examples of particle toxicity, as well as the important subject of pharmaceutical industry regulations, guidelines and legislation. The book is of interest to researchers and practitioners who work on testing and developing pharmaceutical dosage and delivery systems.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Editors and Contributors; 1 Introduction; Abstract; 1.1 Objective of This Book; 1.2 Pharmaceutical Products; 1.3 Relevance of Particle and Powder Characteristics for Product Quality; 1.4 Particle, Powder and Liquid Dispersion Characteristics [54-56, 58]; 1.4.1 Composition; 1.4.2 Particle Size and Particle Size Distribution (PSD); 1.4.3 Particle Shape; 1.4.4 Particle Morphology; 1.4.5 Particle Density and Porosity; 1.4.6 Surface Area; 1.4.7 Wettability; 1.4.8 Zeta Potential; 1.4.9 Powder Packing, Density and Porosity; 1.4.10 Powder Flowability; 1.4.11 Segregation 1.4.12 Rheology of Emulsions and Suspensions [55, 60]1.4.13 Stability of Emulsions and Suspensions [55, 60]; 1.5 Measurement Methods and Techniques [52, 54, 55]; 1.5.1 Sampling [39, 57, 70]; 1.5.2 Dispersion/Dilution [40, 58]; 1.5.3 Measurement Techniques for API Concentration and Coating; 1.5.4 Measurement Techniques for Particle Characteristics; 1.5.4.1 True Skeleton Density; 1.5.4.2 Crystallinity and Crystal Structure; 1.5.4.3 Elemental Analysis; 1.5.4.4 Particle Size Distribution (PSD); 1.5.4.5 Particle Shape; 1.5.4.6 Surface Area, Porosity and Pore Size Distribution; 1.5.4.7 Wettability 1.5.4.8 Zeta Potential1.5.5 Measurement Methods for Powder Characteristics; 1.5.5.1 Bulk Density; 1.5.5.2 Flow Properties; 1.5.6 Characterization Techniques for Liquid Dispersions; 1.5.7 Characterization Techniques for Sprays; 1.6 Set up of the Book; 1.7 Definitions, Abbreviations and Symbols; References; 2 Guide to Pharmaceutical Product Quality; Abstract; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Quality by Design and Process Analytical Technology; 2.3 Guidelines for Quality Control of Drug Substances; 2.4 Analysis of PSD and Particle Shape and Acceptance Criteria; 2.5 Quality Management 2.6 Definitions, Abbreviations and SymbolsReferences; 3 Bio-nano: Theranostic at Cellular Level; Abstract; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Janus Particles, Superparticles and Core-Shell Particles; 3.2.1 Janus-Particles; 3.2.2 Superparticles; 3.2.3 Core-Shell Particles; 3.3 Overview Drug Delivery Systems (DDS); 3.4 Surface Modification; 3.4.1 Amphiphillic Micelle Structures; 3.4.2 Multidentate Polymeric Ligands; 3.4.3 Bi-functional Ligands; 3.5 Biomedical Application-Diagnostics and Therapy; 3.5.1 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); 3.5.2 Hyperthermia; 3.5.3 Computed Tomography (CT) 3.5.4 Photothermal and Photodynamic Therapy3.6 Tumor Microenvironment; 3.7 Biodistribution and Functionalization of the DDS; 3.8 Bio-nano Interface; 3.9 Electronic Properties of Nanomaterials; 3.9.1 Luminescence of Quantum Dots; 3.10 Nanoparticles as Enzyme Mimetics; 3.11 Protein Corona; 3.12 Passive and Active Targeting; 3.13 Endocytose; 3.14 Gatekeeper; 3.15 Biorelated Degradation of the DDS; 3.16 Cancer Immunotherapy; 3.17 Limitation of the DDS; 3.18 Abbreviations; References; 4 Moving Liposome Technology from the Bench to the Oncological Patient: Towards Performance-by-Design; Abstract
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Janis Tondora, Rebecca Miller, Mike Slade, Larry Davidson.
    Contents:
    What is mental health recovery and how does it relate to person-centered care planning?
    Key principles and practices of person-centered care planning
    Preparing for the journey : understanding various types of recovery plans and orienting participants to the PCCP process
    Strength-based assessment, integrated understanding, and setting priorities
    Creating the plan through a team meeting
    Documentation of PCCP : writing the plan to honour the person and satisfy the chart
    So you have a person-centered care plan, now what?
    Plan implementation and quality monitoring
    PCCP implementation : common concerns & person-centered responses.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Laura Weiss Roberts, Daryn Reicherter, Steven Adelsheim, Shashank V. Joshi, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Andrew Loveitt, Margaret M. Martin, Marc A. Neff, editors.
    Summary: The Certified Bariatric Nurse (CBN) designation was created by the American Society for Metabolic and Bariatric Surgery to fill the rapidly growing need for nurses specialized in the care of patients undergoing weight loss surgery. This book approaches this subject area to assist nurses interested in passing the CBN exam. It can also be used as a general resource for those interested in a comprehensive but concise review of the rapidly growing field of Bariatric Surgery. This would include medical students, residents, dietitians, and other allied health professionals. Dr. Marc Neff is a recognized expert in the field of Bariatric Surgery. In his current position, his hospital is fortunate to have several CBNs caring for the Bariatric patients. With his guidance, along with several nurses who successfully completed the CBN designation, the authors have created a concise, "quick hit" review of the material required to successfully pass the exam. The format is short chapters followed by 5-10 review questions with in-depth explanations. Where appropriate, graphics are provided to highlight the essential anatomy and surgical procedures. Questions are in multiple choice format to simulate the actual CBN exam.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Marc A. Neff, editor.
    Summary: Edited by Dr. Marc Neff, Passing the General Surgery Oral Board Exam, Second Edition helps candidates prepare for the General Surgery Oral Board Exam in a different way than other review books. In addition to covering concepts frequently addressed on the test, the review also alerts you to 'common curveballs' and 'strikeouts'- the unexpected problems or seemingly benign actions (or inactions) that could result in a missed diagnosis or misdiagnosis, and thus result in failure to pass the exam. Fully updated and expanded to reflect the many changes in standards of care, this unique study guide is the first to expose the potential traps and pitfalls of the exam by providing examples of how the questions may be asked and what not to say in response.

    Contents:
    Organizational Theme / Marc A. Neff
    Breast / Linda Szczurek
    Colon and Small Bowel / Linda Szczurek, Devin C. Flaherty, and Marc A. Neff
    Abdominal Endocrine / Anna Goldenberg Sandau and Roy L. Sandau
    Head and Neck Endocrine / Anna Goldenberg Sandau and Roy L. Sandau
    Esophagus / Christina Sanders
    Genitourinary / Marc A. Neff
    Hepatobiliary / Linda Szczurek
    Pancreas / Linda Szczurek, Jonathan Nguyen, and Marc A. Neff
    Pediatric / Linda Szczurek
    Perioperative Care / Jonathan Nguyen and Marc A. Neff
    Skin and Soft Tissue / Marc A. Neff
    Stomach and Duodenum / Marc A. Neff and Devin C. Flaherty
    Thoracic / Nicole M. Harris
    Trauma and Critical Care / Leigh Ann Slater [and others]
    Vascular / Brandt D. Jones
    Conclusions: Last Curveballs Considerations / Marc A. Neff.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Haralampos M. Moutsopoulos.
    Summary: This autobiography chronicles the life and career of Haralampos M. Moutsopoulos, an internationally renowned professor of medicine and prolific researcher on Sjogrens syndrome and autoimmune rheumatic diseases. In language that is simple and direct, he takes us on a fascinating journey from the days of his first scientific awakenings at a hospital in his native town of Ioannina, Greece, through his university years in Athens and training in the U.S., to his eventual return to his homeland. In Greece, he developed two centers of excellence in his field, first at the newly founded University of Ioannina Medical School Department of Internal Medicine and, second, at the Athens University Medical School, Department of Pathophysiology, where he taught until his retirement in 2011. Along the way, he introduces us to his teachers and mentors, and to the colleagues and students he mentored in turn, many of whom went on to assume high-ranking positions in Greece and abroad. A major theme throughout the book is his impassioned struggle for excellence, meritocracy, and transparency in universities and in the National Health System in Greece. Peppered with both amusing and unsettling incidents from this lifelong crusade to raise professional standards and against misconduct, the book is a must-read for anyone interested in learning about or entering the medical profession.

    Contents:
    1. Coming of Age
    2. Student Years
    3. Young Physician
    4. In the Army
    5. Public Health Service.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Cyril Mauffrey, David J. Hak, editors.
    Contents:
    ABOUT THE FRCS
    ANATOMY
    Upper limb
    Lower limb
    Surgical approaches
    SPINE
    Spinal trauma
    Tumours
    Infections
    Stenosis
    Disc prolapse
    Scoliosis (Paediatric and adult)
    Back pain
    Ankylosing spondylitis
    Rheumatoid spine
    Spondylolisthesis
    Cervical spondylosis
    Kyphosis
    PAEDIATRICS
    DDH
    Perthes
    SCFE
    CP
    Neurofibromatosis
    Skeletal dysplasias
    Paediatric trauma
    Club feet
    Metatarsus adductus
    Congenital vertical talus
    BASIC SCIENCES
    Statistics
    Cartilage
    Bone
    Muscles
    Tendons/ligaments
    Meniscus
    Radiation
    Arthritides
    Metals
    Theatre design
    Traction
    Free body diagrams
    Gait cycle
    LOWER LIMB ARTHROPLASTY
    Hip replacement
    Knee replacement
    TRAUMATOLOGY
    Upper limb
    Lower limb
    Scores in trauma
    FOOT AND ANKLE
    Biomechanics
    Arthroscopy
    Arthritis
    Instability
    Hallux rigidus
    Hallux valgus
    Interdigital neuroma
    Neuropatic foot
    Rheumatoid foot
    Tarsal tunnel
    Lesser toe deformities
    Pes planus
    Charcot Marie Tooth
    ORTHOTICS/AMPUTATIONS/REHABILITATION
    Orthotics and braces
    Amputation
    Rehabilitation
    SPORTS
    HANDS
    Rheumatoid hand
    Tendon injuries (flexors/extensors)
    Distal radial fractures
    Scaphoid fractures
    Kienbocks disease
    Trigger fingers
    Dupuytrens disease
    DRUJ and TFCC injuries
    Concepts of tendon transfers
    Carpal instability
    CMCJ thumb arthritis
    Wrist arthritis
    Carpal tunnel syndrome
    De quervain tenosynovitis
    UPPER LIMB
    ACJ arthritis
    Sub acromial impingement
    Cuff tear
    Cuff arthropathy
    Shoulder arthritis
    Shoulder rheumatoid arthritis
    Shoulder ON
    Calcific tendinopathy
    Frozen shoulder
    SLAP
    Shoulder instability
    Elbow OA
    Rheumatoid arthritis
    Instability
    Tendinopathies
    Biceps rupture
    Elbow arthroscopy
    Elbow arthroplasty
    ONCOLOGY
    Basic concepts (classifications, biopsy...)
    Benign tumors (bone, cartilage, others)
    Malignant tumors (bone, cartilage, others)
    PHYSICAL EXAMINATIONS
    Hip
    Knee
    Shoulder
    Spine
    Elbow
    Hand
    Foot and ankle
    Gait cycle
    GEMS
    What you will not find in the books but might be asked in the exam
    UP TO DATE REFERENCES
    Per topics.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Carole Boulanger, David McWilliams, editors.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    About the Editors
    Contributors
    1: The Person Before the Patient: The Importance of a Good History
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 When to Attain a Patient History in the ICU
    1.3 How to Obtain an Effective Patient History in the ICU
    1.3.1 The Clinical Frailty Scale
    1.3.2 Patient Questionnaires: Key Relative Involvement
    1.4 What a Good History Should Include in the ICU
    1.5 Why an Early, Detailed History Is Important
    1.5.1 Family: Key Relationships
    1.5.2 Mobility 1.5.3 Functional Independence and Housing
    1.5.4 Hobbies, Interests and Work
    1.5.5 Medical History
    1.5.6 Lifestyle History
    1.5.7 Understanding and Expectations
    1.6 Conclusions
    References
    2: Respiratory and Mechanical Ventilation Management: Avoidance of Complications
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Respiratory Management During Invasive Mechanical Ventilation
    2.2.1 Endotracheal Suctioning
    2.2.2 Subglottic Suctioning
    2.2.3 Humidification of Respiratory Gases
    2.3 Chest Physiotherapy
    2.3.1 Manual or Ventilator Pulmonary Hyperinflation 2.3.2 Manual Chest Compressions/Vibrations (MCC)
    2.4 Mechanical In-Exsufflation (MI-E)
    2.5 Inspiratory Muscle Training
    References
    3: Patient Care: From Body to Mind
    3.1 Introduction: Patient Care in a Critical Environment
    3.2 "Interventional Patient Hygiene"
    3.3 Bathing and Skin Integrity
    3.4 Oral Care
    3.5 Eye Care
    3.6 Pain Assessment and Nursing Care
    3.6.1 Assessment
    3.6.2 Management
    3.7 Conclusion
    References
    4: Nutrition: Calories Count
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Presence of Pre-existing Conditions on Admission to ICU 4.2.1 Chronic Co-morbidities
    4.2.2 Sarcopenia
    4.2.3 Malnutrition
    4.3 Factors Which Affect Nutritional Status During ICU Stay
    4.3.1 Metabolic Response to Critical Illness
    4.3.2 Iatrogenic Undernutrition
    4.3.3 Immobilisation
    4.4 Assessing Malnutrition in the Critically Ill Patient
    4.4.1 Nutrition Screening Tools
    4.4.2 Muscle Mass
    4.5 Strategies to Improve Physical and Functional Outcomes
    4.5.1 Targeted Nutrition Delivery
    4.5.2 Volume-Based Feeding
    4.5.3 Energy Versus Protein
    4.5.4 Exercise and Protein
    4.5.5 Supplementation 4.6 Recovery Phase of Critical Illness
    4.7 Adequacy of Nutrient Delivery
    4.7.1 Factors Influencing Nutritional Recovery
    4.8 Potential Strategies to Facilitate Optimal Nutritional Delivery in the Recovery Phase of Critical Illness
    4.8.1 Coordinated Multidisciplinary Approach to Nutritional Care
    4.8.2 Systematic Handover to Ward-Based Staff
    4.8.3 Early Involvement of Family
    4.8.4 Conclusion
    References
    5: Promoting Independence
    5.1 Introduction: What Is Dysphagia?
    5.2 Dysphagia Assessment and Screening
    5.3 Bedside Assessment
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Marzia Martina, Department of Translational Bioscience, National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, ON, Canada, Stefano Taverna, Department of Neuroscience & Brain Technologies, Italian Institute of Technology, Genoa, Italy.
    Contents:
    1. History of electrophysiology and the patch clamp / Alexei Verkhratsky and Vladimir Parpura
    2. Whole-cell patch-clamp analysis of recombinant NMDA receptor pharmacology using brief glutamate applications / Nathan G. Glasgow and Jon W. Johnson
    3. Patch clamp combined with voltage/concentration clamp to determine the kinetics and voltage dependency on N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor open channel blockers / Chris G. Parsons and Kate E. Gilling
    4. State-of-the-art automated patch clamp: heat activation, action potentials, and high throughput in ion channel screening / Sonja Stoelzle-Feix
    5. Industrializing electrophysiology: HT automated patch clamp on SyncroPatch96 using instant frozen cells / Liudmila Polonchuk
    6. Planar patch clamp for neuronal networks
    considerations and future perspectives / Alessandro Bosca, Marzia Martina, and Christophe Py
    7. Methods for the study of synaptic receptor functional properties / Enrica Maria Petrini and Andrea Barberis
    8. Single cell RT-PCR, a technique to decipher the electrical, anatomical, and genetic determinants of neuronal diversity / Maria Toledo-Rodriguez and Henry Markham
    9. Whole-cell voltage clamp on skeletal muscle fibers with the silicone-clamp technique / Romain Lefebvre, Sandrine Pouvreau, Claude Collet, Bruno Allard, and Vincent Jacquemond
    10. Multiphoton imaging approaches for studying striatal dendritic excitability / Joshua L. Plotkin and D. James Surmeier
    11. Investigation of synaptic microcircuits using patch-clamp paired recordings in acute brain slices / Giovanni Russo and Stefano taverna
    12. Outside-out "sniffer-patch" clamp technique for in situ measures of neurotransmitter release / Émilie Muller-Chrétien
    13. A cost-effective method for preparing, maintaining, and transfecting neurons in organotypic slices / Cary Soares, Kevin F.H. Lee, Denise Cook and Jean-Claude Béïque
    14. Acute brain slice methods for adult and aging animals: application of targeted patch clamp analysis and optogenetics / Jonathan T. Ting, Tanya L. Daigle, Qian Chen and Guoping Feng
    15. Synaptic connectivity in engineered neuronal networks / Peter Molnar, Jung-Fong Kang, Neelima Bhargava, Mainak Das and James J. Hickman
    16. Modeling of action potential generation in NG108-15 cells / Peter Molnar and James J. Hickman
    17. Whole-cell patch-clamp recordings in freely moving animals / Albert K. Lee, Jâerãome Epsztein and Michael Brecht
    18. Pressure-polished borosilicate pipettes are "universal sealer" yielding low access resistance and efficient intracellular perfusion / Marco Aquila, Mascia Benedusi, Anna Fasoli and Giorgio Rispoli
    19. Current recordings at the single channel level in adult mammalian isolated cardiomyocytes / Romain Guinamard, Thomas Hof, and Laurent Sallâe
    20. Dynamic clamp as a tool to study the functional effects of individual membrane currents / Géza Berecki, Arie O. Verkerk, Antoni C.G. van Ginneken and Ronald Wilders
    21. Dynamic clamp in cardiac and neuronal systems using RTXI / Francis A. Ortega, Robert J. Butera, David J. Christini, John A. White and Alan D. Dorval II
    22. Ion selectivity of pore-forming peptides and ion channels measured in xenopus oocytes / Thierry Cens and Pierre Charnet
    23. Principles of single-channel kinetic analysis / Feng Qin.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Jean-Marie Lachappelle, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Summary: This third edition of the essential guide has been extensively revised and updated and includes additional color illustrations. It reflects the rapid expansion in knowledge of the subject due to progress in the chemical, immunological, and clinical fields.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface to Fourth Edition
    Introductory Remarks
    Nomenclature: A Few Definitions
    Xenobiotics
    Haptens
    Modifications of Molecules [3]
    An Updated Overview of the Skin Barrier Structure and Function
    References
    Contents
    Contributors
    Abbreviations
    Part I: Patch Testing
    Chapter 1: Pathophysiology of Allergic and Irritant Contact Dermatitis
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Pathophysiology of Irritant and Allergic Skin Inflammation
    1.2.1 Irritant and/or Allergic Chemicals
    1.2.2 Skin Irritation: Activation of Innate Immunity
    1.2.2.1 Innate Immunity 1.2.2.2 Skin Irritation: Mechanisms of Action
    1.2.2.3 Direct Responsibility of the Chemical in ICD
    1.3 Skin Allergy: The Role of Specific Immunity
    1.3.1 Antigen-Specific Immunity
    1.3.2 Skin Allergy: Mechanisms of Action
    1.3.3 Indirect Responsibility of Chemicals in Skin Irritation
    1.4 Pathophysiology of Skin Inflammation: The Connection Between Innate and Acquired Immunity
    References
    Chapter 2: Diseases for Which Patch Testing Is Recommended: Patients Who Should Be Investigated
    2.1 Allergic Contact Dermatitis
    2.1.1 Clinical Signs and Symptoms 2.1.2 Histopathological Features
    2.1.2.1 Epidermal Lesions
    2.1.2.2 Dermal Changes
    2.2 Allergic Contact Dermatitis Syndrome
    2.2.1 Stage 1 of ACDS
    2.2.1.1 Morphological Aspects
    2.2.1.2 Topographical Variants
    2.2.2 Stage 2 of ACDS
    2.2.3 Stage 3 of ACDS
    2.2.3.1 Stage 3A of ACDS
    2.2.3.2 Stage 3B of ACDS
    2.3 Allergic Contact Dermatitis Versus Irritant Contact Dermatitis: Criteria for Differential Diagnosis
    2.4 Other Skin Diseases in Which Patch Testing Is of Major Interest
    2.5 Algorithmic Approach: Key Role of Patch Testing 2.6 Hand Dermatitis: Definition and Procedures Applied in Differential Diagnosis
    2.6.1 Hand Dermatitis: Exogenous and Endogenous Factors
    2.6.2 A Classification of Hand Dermatitis
    2.6.3 Tools of Investigation
    2.6.4 Hand Dermatitis: Some Examples of an Algorithmic Approach
    2.6.5 Hand Eczema: A Controversial Issue
    References
    Chapter 3: Patch Testing Methodology
    3.1 Historical Background
    3.2 Definition and Aims
    3.2.1 Requirements for an Ideal Patch Testing Procedure
    3.2.2 Is Patch Testing the "Gold Standard" to Investigate Patients with Allergic Contact Dermatitis? 3.3 Patch Test Units
    3.3.1 Nonchamber Patch Tests
    3.3.2 Chamber Patch Tests
    3.3.2.1 Finn Chambers
    3.3.3 Plastic Square Chambers
    3.3.3.1 IQ Square Chambers Chemotechnique
    3.3.3.2 allergEAZE Chambers SmartPractice
    3.3.3.3 allergEAZE Patch Test Chamber
    3.3.3.4 allergEAZE Clear Patch Test Chamber
    3.3.4 Reinforcement of Patch Test Units
    3.4 A General Overview of Allergens
    3.4.1 Allergens
    3.4.2 Bioavailability of Allergens
    3.4.3 Quality Control of Allergens
    3.4.4 Appropriate Amounts of Petrolatum to Be Applied at Patch Testing
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Jean-Marie Lachapelle, Magnus Bruze, Peter U. Elsner, editors.
    Summary: This book is a compendium of tips on many different aspects of patch testing based on the recommendations of the International Contact Dermatitis Research Group (ICDRG), which is the reference group for all dermato-allergologists. It is intended to complement the book Patch Testing and Prick Testing: A Practical Guide by J.-M. Lachapelle and H. Maibach, which is an official publication of the ICDRG now in its third edition. Among the wide variety of topics covered are pitfalls, legal aspects, patch testing with ultrasonic bath extracts, the role of patch testing in occupational contact dermatitis and atopic dermatitis, semi-open tests, the implications of a negative test, patch testing validity, selection of extra allergens and patch testing in the tropics. Many illustrations are included and all information is completely up-to-date. This book will be of value to all practicing dermatologists.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editor, Shital N. Parikh, MD (professor of orthopaedic surgery, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine ; co-director, Orthopaedic Sports Center, Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center, Cincinnati, Ohio)
    Digital Access Ovid 2020
  • Digital
    Jason L. Koh, Ryosuke Kuroda, João Espregueira-Mendes, Alberto Gobbi, editors.
    Summary: This practical case-based book assists clinicians in the evaluation and treatment of patellofemoral patients by reviewing critical elements for assessment and presenting clinical scenarios in which different experts provide their recommendations for treatment. Subdivided in 6 parts it explores the joints anatomy and mechanics, as well as case-based evaluation and treatment of patellofemoral instability, arthritis and chondrosis, traumatic injuries and degenerative tendinopathies. Moreover, the closing part offers an overview of the latest advances and future developments. Written in collaboration with ISAKOS, this book offers a valuable guide for orthopedists and sports medicine treating common and complex injuries of this joint.

    Contents:
    I Patellofemoral anatomy, mechanics and evaluation
    1 Patellofemoral anatomy and mechanics
    2 Patient and family history in the evaluation of patellofemoral patients
    3 Examination of patients with patellofemoral symptoms
    4 Imaging evaluation of patients with patellofemoral symptoms
    5 Principles of prevention and rehabilitation for patellofemoral - Christopher Powers
    6 Newest surgical treatments for patellofemoral osteochondral lesions
    II Case based evaluation and treatment of patellofemoral patients
    7 The pediatric patient with open physes: case 11 year old girl with dysplasia
    8 Adolescent patient with closed physes, mild dysplasia and malalignment: case 15 year old girl case presentation, and commentary and treatment recommendations by international surgeons
    9 Young male soccer player with second dislocation, closed physes, normal trochlea 19 year old
    10 21 year old male with alta, recurrent instability
    11 19 year old girl with high tttg, trochlear dysplasia
    12 25 year old with large chondral lesion, patellofemoral instability, tttg 15mm
    13 35 year old with recurrent instability, chondrosis of patella and trochlea
    III Patellofemoral pain. Chondrosis, and arthritis
    14 19 year old with anterior knee pain, normal articular cartilage
    15 22 year old with anterior knee pain, normal cartilage, mild alignment abnormalities
    16 21 year old with patellofemoral pain and mal torsion of the lower limbs: place of derotation osteotomies
    22 27 year old male, basketball, with central trochlear lesion
    23 35 year old woman, lateral patella and trochlear chondrosis
    24 55 year old, marginal osteophytes, general patellofemoral chondrosis
    IV Traumatic injuries to the patellofemoral joint
    25 Patellofemoral fracture, stellate, in 54 year old woman
    26 Patella fracture of inferior pole, in 48 year old man
    27 Quadriceps tendon rupture in 54 year old man
    28 Patella tendon rupture in 37 year old man
    V Degenerative tendinopathies of the patellofemoral joint
    29 Osgood-Schlatters disease in a 12 year old
    30 Patella tendinitis in a 21 year old basketball player
    31 Patella tendinitis at Osgood-schlatters lesion of 32 year old
    32 Quadriceps tendinitis in a 35 year old
    VI Advances and the future treatment of patellofemoral disorders
    33 Evidence based medicine
    34 Biologic treatments.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Alberto Gobbi, João Espregueira-Mendes, Norimasa Nakamura, editors.
    Summary: A comprehensive and thorough selection of contributions from across the world, this book aims to review the current state-of-the-art in assessment and management of the patellofemoral joint. While featuring a wide range of surgical techniques for different pathologies, detailed attention is also devoted to conservative treatment and approaches involving mesenchymal stem cells, autologous chondrocyte implantation, platelet-rich plasma, and pulsed electromagnetic fields. Anatomy, clinical examination, and methods of evaluation are discussed, and individual chapters address important miscellaneous topics, including rehabilitation, complications of surgery, injuries in specific patient populations, and scoring systems. Though patellofemoral joint pathology is a frequent clinical problem, its management remains challenging for the orthopaedic surgeon. Conceived at the ISAKOS Congress held in Toronto in June 2013 as a small booklet, this work quickly turned into a major project involving more than 35 authors worldwide. The editors believe that this book will be of great value to orthopaedic doctors to improve understanding, diagnosis, and treatment of future patients.

    Contents:
    Morphogenesis of the patellofemoral joint
    Anatomy of the patellofemoral
    Anatomy and biomechanics of MPFL
    Clinical examination of patellofemoral joint
    Patellofemoral evaluation: an imagiological objective kinematic approach
    MRI of patellofemoral joint
    Gait analysis in patellofemoral disorder
    Prevention of patellofemoral injuries
    Patellofemoral syndrome
    Patellofemoral instability
    Patellar dislocation: pathomechanism and treatment
    First-time traumatic patellar dislocation: a systematic review
    Medial patellar instability
    a little known cause of anterior knee pain
    Non-operative treatment of patellofemoral joint
    Surgical treatment of the patellofemoral joint: lateral release
    MPFL repair for recurrent or traumatic patellar dislocation
    Medial patellofemoral ligament reconstruction
    Proximal realignment: medial plication
    MPFL reconstruction based on graft tension change and anatomy
    Elmslie-Trillat Procedure: a distal based procedure for patellar stabilization
    Open proximal trochleaplasty (grooveplasty)
    Sulcus-deepening trochleoplasty for the treatment of recurrent patellar dislocation with high-grade trochlear dysplasia
    Role of rotational osteotomy in the treatment of patelofemoral dysfunction
    New techniques for cartilage repair of the patella
    Cartilage lesions of the patellofemoral joint: long term results after ACI
    Role of mesenchymal stem cells in patellofemoral disorders
    Prosthetic indications in patellofemoral osteoarthritis
    Patellofemoral postoperative rehabilitation
    Treatment of patellofemoral disorders in skeletally immature athletes
    Treatment of patellofemoral dislocation in skeletally immature
    Platelet-rich plasma for the treatment of symptomatic patellofemoral cartilage lesions
    Pulsed electromagnetic fields for the treatment of symptomatic patellofemoral cartilage lesions of the knee
    Matrix autologous chondrocyte implantation of the patella: from ACI to MACI to ICC
    Patellofemoral joint pathology and sports
    Patellofemoral injuries in soccer players
    Complications of patellofemoral surgeries: prevention and management
    Scores to evaluate patellofemoral joint
    Conclusions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Robin V. West, Alexis C. Colvin, editors.
    Summary: Patellofemoral disorders are extremely prevalent in athletes and can lead to chronic pain, instability, weakness, and inconsistent or poor athletic performance. These disorders can be difficult to diagnose.Treatment options can vary depending upon several factors, including the sport andthe time during the sports season when the symptoms occur. Treatment also varies depending on the age of the patient and their competition level. The Patellofemoral Joint in the Athlete provides an extensive review of the physical examination, radiographic evaluation, differential diagnoses, and treatment options of common patellofemoral disorders, including patellar chondrosis, pain and instability. The contributors are nationally recognized experts in the patellofemoral joint that treat athletes of all ages and abilities. Appropriate for orthopedic surgeons, sports medicine physicians, rehabilitation physicians and physical therapists, this book is a comprehensive guide to the unique and sport-specific concerns of athletesof all ages and abilitieswith regard to the patellofemoral joint.

    Contents:
    Anatomy of the Patellofemoral Joint
    Lateral Patella Dislocations: History, Physical Exam and Imaging
    Rehabilitation Considerations for Non-Operative Management of Patellofemoral Conditions
    Surgical Treatment of Patellar Instability in Skeletally Immature Athletes
    Cartilage Restoration in the Patellofemoral Joint
    MPFL Repair and Reconstruction
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Patellofemoral Resurfacing Arthroplasty in the Active Patient
    Overview of Surgical Decision Making.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by David Dejour, Stefano Zaffagnini, Elizabeth A. Arendt, Petri Sillanpää, Florian Dirisamer.
    Summary: This excellently illustrated book adopts an evidence-based approach to evaluate the efficacy of different techniques for the imaging and treatment of patellofemoral pain, instability, and arthritis. The aim is to equip practitioners with an informative guide that will help them to manage disorders of the patellofemoral joint by casting light on the many issues on which a consensus has been lacking. The opening chapters supply essential background information and explain the role of various imaging modalities, including radiography, CT, MRI, and bone scan. The various conservative and surgical treatment approaches for each of the three presentations - pain, instability, and arthritis - are then described and assessed in depth, with precise guidance on indications and technique. Postoperative management and options in the event of failed surgery are also evaluated. Throughout, careful attention is paid to the literature in an attempt to establish the level of evidence for each imaging and treatment method. The new edition has been thoroughly updated, with inclusion of additional chapters, in order to present the latest knowledge on biomechanics, diagnosis, surgical techniques, and rehabilitation.

    Contents:
    Classification and general considerations
    Syndromes genetics
    Detecting and addressing psychological factors
    Imaging Analysis of Patella Instability Factors
    MRI of the Patellofemoral Articular Cartilage
    Computed Tomography and Arthro-CT Scan in Patellofemoral Disorders move to imaging
    The Role of Tibial and Femoral Rotational Torsion abnormalities in the Treatment of Patellofemoral Dysfunction
    Pathophysiology of Anterior Knee Pain
    Patellofemoral Pain Syndrome
    Non operative Treatment of PF pain
    Is there a surgical Treatment of PF pain
    Instability Factors Principals and Secondary for Instability
    Influence of Risk Factors in the Natural History
    Clinical Symptoms and Examination of Acute and Chronic Patellar Dislocations
    First Time Dislocation: How to deal with it
    Medial Side Patellofemoral Anatomy: Surgical Implications in Patellofemoral Instability
    Is there any place for medial reefing in acture PF dislocation which technical procedure?
    Medial Patellofemoral Ligament Reconstruction Indications and Surgical Technique
    MPTL (Medial Patellotibial Ligament) Reconstruction
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Indications and results
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Techniques
    AMZ
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Techniques
    Distalization
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies
    Techniques
    Medialization
    Tibial Tubercle Osteotomies Complications
    Trochleoplasty Indications and results
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Arthroscopy
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Deepening Bereiter
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Deepening Lyon
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Elevating/lateral
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Recession Osteotomy
    Trochleoplasty Techniques: Complications
    Lateral Release of the Lateral Patellar Retunaculum
    Lateral Retinaculum Lengthening
    Lateral retinaculum reconstruction
    Surgical Rehabilitation for select individual procedures
    Designing a rehabilitation programme for PFJ rehabilitation
    Complex primary cases
    Obligatory dislocators in flexion
    Is there an indication for Patella osteotomies
    Is there an indication for correcting a valgus knee
    Isolated Patellofemoral Osteoarthritis: Natural History and clinical Presentation
    The Non-operative Treatment of Patellofemoral Arthritis
    Techniques for cartilage restoration in pf joint
    Isolated Patellofemoral unipolar pf cartilage lesions when to intervene
    Partial Lateral Facetectomy
    Isolated Patellofemoral Osteoarthritis: Prosthetic Indications
    Patellofemoral disorders in skeletally immature patients
    Specific procedures for pediatric dislocation
    Mpfl techniques and constraints: what does this mean?
    Patellar tendon shortening
    Tibial tubercule procedure / old Osgood Schlatter
    Femoral and tibial osteotomies
    Epiphsiodesis : we already have limb lengthening.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Zahid Amin, Jonathan M. Tobis, Horst Sievert, John D. Carroll.
    Contents:
    SECTION I: BACKGROUND AND ANATOMY
    Historical perspective and importance of PFO
    Embryology, Neonatal Circulation and Anatomy of PFO
    Anatomical variations of Patent Foramen Ovale
    Aging and Patent Foramen Ovale
    SECTION II: METHODS AND TECHNIQUES FOR DETECTION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF PFO
    Echocardiographic detection and transcranial Doppler quantification of right-to-left shunting.
    ICE: intra-procedural evaluation and guidance during closure of PFO
    A Comparison of Methods to Detect and Quantitative PFO: TCD, TTE, ICE and TEE
    Angiographic evaluation for PFO and Pulmonary AVMs
    SECTION III: PFO AND CLINICAL SYNDROMES
    An Overview of Clinical Syndromes (Keeping The Heart In Mind)
    The Association of Patent Foramen Ovale and Migraine Headache
    Current Patient Management Issues, Clinical Trial Design Challenges, and the Pathway Forward
    Patent foramen ovale and divers
    Orthodeoxia and Platypnea
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea and Patent Foramen Ovale
    PFO and Various Types of Surgery
    When a PFO is Discovered Incidentally
    SECTION IV: CLOSURE METHODS
    The GORE Septal Occluder
    The novel PFO specific closure devices: Why did they fail?
    Optimal device for children and closure indications in pediatric population
    Occlutech, PFM, Lifetech, and other new devices. What?s on the horizon?
    Complications of PFO Closure
    SECTION V: STATISTICAL METHODS, TRIALS AND TRIBULATIONS
    Device Closure of Patent Foramen Ovale or Medical Therapy for Cryptogenic Stroke: The CLOSURE I Trial
    The Gore REDUCE Clinical Study
    The PC Trial: An Effective Treatment Not Demonstrating Effective Power
    From FDAs point of view: What is needed to move PFO closure for stroke prevention forward?
    The Medical Device Manufacturer?s Perspective ? W.L. Gore & Associates, Inc
    PFO-Patient?s Perspective
    Clinical Trials to Assess the Relationship between Patent Foramen Ovale and Migraine Headaches
    Do We Need More PFO Trials: Hypercoaguable Syndromes, Obstructive Sleep Apnea, and Arrhythmias
    SECTION VI: DIFFICULTIES/OBSTACLES IN STARTING PFO CLOSURE PRACTICE
    Obstacles in Starting a PFO Closure Program. How I Did It
    Developing a successful integrated PFO closure program.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jennifer M. Manning.
    Summary: This textbook provides a one-stop reference resource and guide for nurses interested in advancing their careers. It addresses self-assessment, goal setting and self-discipline, as well as academic paths and non-academic career paths, and includes two chapters on strategic path development, covering internal motivation, risk taking, work--life balance, work environment, networking, professional membership and mentorship. Lastly, the book discusses professional growth topics such as civility, burnout, professional development and "keeping informed," and explores specific professionalism topics like professional behavior, ethics, social media and executive presence. Intended for nurses at any level, this textbook examines topics relevant to today's nursing professionals and offers guidance on building a successful nursing career. It also helps student nurses create a path for their career and professional growth, both during their training program and beyond.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Introduction
    Section I. Chapter 1: Self-Assessment
    Chapter 2: Goal Setting and Self Discipline
    Section II. Chapter 3: Professional Nursing Career Paths: the non-academic path
    Chapter 4: Professional Nursing Career Paths: the academic path
    Section III. Chapter 5: Charting YOUR Career Path: internal strategies
    Chapter 6: Charting YOUR Career Path: external strategies
    Chapter 7: The basics of Professional Growth
    Chapter 8: Ensuring Continued Professional Growth
    Chapter 9: Professionalism.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Janos Minarovits, Hans Helmut Niller, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Epigenetic regulation
    2. HIV-induced epigenetic alterations in host cells
    3. Epigenetic alterations in Epstein-Barr virus-associated diseases
    4. Epigenetic dysregulation in virus-associated neoplasms
    5. Epigenetic alterations induced by bacterial lipopolysaccharides
    6. Patho-epigenetics of infectious diseases caused by intracellular bacteria
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    editor-in-chief, Linda M. McManus, Richard N. Mitchell.
    Contents:
    Part 1. General disease pathogenesis
    Part 2. Organ systems pathophysiology
    Part 3. Diagnostic pathology
    Part 4. Techniques in experimental pathology.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Evaluation of genetic diversity of Candida spp. and Klebsiella spp. isolated from the denture plaque of COPD patients
    Particulate matter in the air of the underground chamber complex of the Wieliczka Salt Mine Health Resort
    Comparison of thymic stromal lymphopoietin concentration in various human biospecimens from asthma and COPD patients measured with two different ELISA kits
    Prevalence of Neisseria meningitidis carriage with identifcation of serogroups and genogroups in professional soldiers
    Bacteriological assessment of pneumonia caused by gram-negative bacteria in patients hospitalized in intensive care unit
    Bacteriological assessment of pneumonia caused by gram-negative bacteria in patients hospitalized in intensive care unit
    Whooping cough in adults: a series of severe cases
    Limited clinical significance of dimeric form of pyruvate kinase as a diagnostic and prognostic biomarker in non-small cell lung cancer
    Clostridium Difficile infection due to pneumonia treatment: mortality risk models
    Predictors of progression in IgA nephropathy in childhood.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital/Print
    Ellen Hsu, Louis Du Pasquier.
    Contents:
    Evolution of immunity and pathogens
    A host-pathogen interaction reduced to first principles: Antigenic variation in T. brucei
    Antigenic variation in Plasmodium falciparum
    Polymorphic mucin-like proteins in Schistosoma mansoni, a variable antigen and a key component of the compatibility between the schistosome and its snail host
    Fibrinogen-related proteins (FREP) in mollusks
    Somatic and germline diversification of a putative immunoreceptor within one phylum: Dscam in arthropods
    An immune effector system in the Protochordate gut sheds light on fundamental aspects of vertebrate immunity
    Variable lymphocyte receptors: a current view
    Antibody repertoire in fish
    Unique features of fish immune repertoires: particularities of the adaptive immunity within the largest group of vertebrates
    The evolution and structure of atypical T cell receptors
    Diversification of the primary antibody repertoire by AID-mediated gene conversion
    Antibody isotype switching in vertebrates.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    Jonathan Kennedy.
    Summary: "A sweeping look at how the major transformations in history-from the rise of Homo sapiens to the birth of capitalism-have been shaped not by humans but by germs. According to the accepted narrative of progress, humans have thrived thanks to their brains and brawn, collectively bending the arc of history. But in this revelatory book, professor Jonathan Kennedy argues that the myth of human exceptionalism overstates the role that we play in social and political change. Instead, it is the humble microbe that wins wars and topples empires. Drawing on the latest research in fields ranging from genetics and anthropology to archaeology and economics, Pathogenesis takes us through 60,000 years of history, exploring eight major outbreaks of infectious disease that have made the modern world. Bacteria and viruses were protagonists in the demise of the Neanderthals, the growth of Islam, the transition from feudalism to capitalism, the devastation wrought by European colonialism, and the evolution of the United States from an imperial backwater to a global superpower. Even Christianity rose to prominence in the wake of a series of deadly pandemics that swept through the Roman Empire in the second and third centuries: Caring for the sick turned what was a tiny sect into one of the world's major religions. By placing disease at the center of his wide-ranging history of humankind, Kennedy challenges some of the most fundamental assumptions about our collective past-and urges us to view this moment as another disease-driven inflection point that will change the course of history. Provocative and brimming with insight, Pathogenesis transforms our understanding of the human story"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Paleolithic Plagues
    Neolithic Plagues
    Ancient Plagues
    Medieval Plagues
    Colonial Plagues
    Revolutionary Plagues
    Industrial Plagues
    Plagues of Poverty.
  • Digital
    Yasuhiko Tomino., editor
    Contents:
    Part I. Pathogenesis
    Chapter 1. Is IgA nephropathy the same disease/a homogenous disease?
    Chapter 2. Genetic variations of IgA nephropathy
    Chapter 3. Is IgA nephropathy a familial or sporadic disease?
    Chapter 4. Heterogeneity of GdIgA1
    Chapter 5. Differences of histological classification between the Japanese guideline and the Oxford classification
    Chapter 6. Podocyte injury and the role of megalin
    Chapter 7. Complement activation
    Part II. Treatment
    Chapter 8. How different are the current understandings of treatments for IgA nephropathy?
    Chapter 9. Differences in etiology and treatment in China
    Chapter 10. Differences in etiology and treatment in Korea
    Chapter 11. Differences in etiology and treatment in Japan
    Chapter 12. The VALIGA study: Differences in treatment approaches within the EU
    Chapter 13. Differences in etiology and treatment in Scandinavian countries
    Chapter14 The Implication of the KDIGO Clinical Practice Guidelines on management of IgA Nephropathy
    Chapter15 Japanese Clinical Practice Guidelines for IgA Nephropathy: Difference from KDIGO Guidelines
    Chapter16 Limitations of RAS blockade in IgA nephropathy
    Chapter17 What is the goal for proteinuria in IgA nephropathy?
    Chapter 18. Rationale of tonsillectomy and steroid pulse therapy (TSP): Is it race dependent?
    Chapter 19. Is tonsillectomy a possible treatment for IgA nephropathy from RCT?
    Chapter 20. Is tonsillectomy a possible treatment for IgA nephrology from a retrospective analysis?.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Christos C. Zouboulis, Andreas D. Katsambas and Albert M. Kligman, editors.
    Summary: This book, written by experts from across the world, provides comprehensive coverage of acne and rosacea, focusing in particular on pathogenesis and treatment but also considering clinical aspects, prognostic factors, and impacts on quality of life. Both standard knowledge and important, clinically relevant insights that have emerged over the past decade are presented with the goal of assisting the reader in understanding these diseases and improving treatment outcome. It is explained how high-level research has recently given rise to a variety of new concepts in etiology and treatment, and emerging trends are also discussed. The book is in a reader-friendly format that highlights core messages with a very practical and clinical focus. Pathogenesis and Treatment of Acne and Rosacea will be an indispensable reference for all physicians who care for patients with acne or rosacea and for scientists working in the field.

    Contents:
    The Sebaceous Gland Through the Centuries: A Difficult Path to Independence
    Embryology of the Pilosebaceous Unit
    Molecular Aspects of Sebaceous Differentiation
    Anatomy of the Sebaceous Gland
    Sebum and Sebaceous Lipids
    Experimental Models of the Sebaceous Gland
    Acne Epidemiology and Socioeconomic Aspects
    Acne Pathogenesis: What We Have Learned Over the Years
    The Role of Hyperkeratinization
    The Role of the Sebaceous Gland
    The Role of Bacteria
    Inflammation in Acne
    A New Concept of Acne Pathogenesis
    Acne and Genetics
    Acne and Androgens
    Acne and Inflammation
    Acne and Neuropeptides
    Acne and Bacteria
    The Acne Biofilm
    The Evidence Supporting a Link Between Acne and Nutrition
    Acne and Smoking
    Antimicrobial Peptides in Acne
    Acne and Antimicrobial Lipids
    Natural and Artificial Suntanning
    Acne and Environmental Pollution (Chloracne)
    Myths and Beliefs of Acne Pathogenesis: Diet, Smoking, Hygiene
    Understanding Acne as a Chronic Disease
    Clinical Aspects of Acne Vulgaris
    Clinical Aspects of Acne Fulminans
    Childhood Acne
    Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia and Acne in the Male Patients
    Adult Acne
    Drug-Induced Acne
    Body-Builder Acne
    Acne Cosmetica
    Acne in Persons with Dark Skin
    Acne and Heredity
    Acne Neonatorum
    Serum Androgens
    Body Mass Index
    Sebum Secretion, Skin Type, and pH
    Lipids in Serum and Sebum
    The Leeds Acne Grading Technique
    Evaluation of Clinical Severity by Acne Grading and Lesion Counting
    Modern Technology for Imaging and Evaluation of Acne Lesions
    Acne and Congenital Adrenal Hyperplasia
    The Acne Genes
    Vitamins and the Skin
    Urinary Hormone Analysis in Acne
    Laboratory Evaluations in Acne
    Evidenced-Based Treatment of Acne
    The Difficult Acne Patient
    Improving Compliance with Acne Therapy
    Keratolytic Treatment
    Topical Antibiotics
    Benzoyl Peroxide
    Topical Retinoids
    Azelaic Acid
    Emerging Acne Treatments
    Oral Antibiotics
    The Antibiotic Resistance in Acne
    Prescribing Oral Isotretinoin: The European Approach
    Oral Isotretinoin: The US Approach
    Hormonal Therapy for Acne
    Less Common Treatments
    Risk Factors of Acne Relapse
    Acne Maintenance Therapy
    Cosmetics and Cleansers in Acne
    Chemical Peeling in Acne
    Lasers and Phototherapy in Acne
    Treatment of Acne Scarring
    Concepts of Future Acne Treatment
    Acne and Quality of Life
    Instruments of Measurement of Quality of Life in Acne
    The SAHA Syndrome
    The Polycystic Ovary Syndrome and Acne
    The SAPHO Syndrome
    The PAPA Syndrome
    Acne in Transplantation Patients
    Rosacea: The State of the Art
    The Vascular Concept
    Rosacea and Neuropeptides
    Rosacea and Demodex folliculorum
    The Role of Adenosine Triphosphate in the Pathogenesis of Rosacea: An Explanation for the Mode of Action of Tetracyclines for the Treatment of Rosacea
    Standard Grading System for Rosacea
    Classical Clinical Presentations of Rosacea
    Rhinophyma: A Variation of Rosacea?
    Ocular Rosacea
    Childhood Rosacea
    Differential Diagnosis of Rosacea
    A Treatment Strategy for Rosacea
    Topical Treatment of Rosacea
    Systemic Treatment of Rosacea
    Laser and Light Therapy of Rosacea
    Nonclassical Treatments
    Cosmetics in Rosacea
    Treatment of Rhinophyma
    The Future of Rosacea Treatment
    Impact of Rosacea on Quality of Life.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Masafumi Machida, Stuart L. Weinstein, Jean Dubousset, editors.
    Summary: This book provides comprehensive coverage of current topics in idiopathic scoliosis (IS). A three-dimensional deformity of the spine, the condition is characterized by lateral curvature combined with vertebral rotation. The primary lesion, however, lies in the median sagittal plane, taking the form of a lordosis. Although the clinical manifestations of scoliosis have been well documented, its cause and pathogenesis have not yet been determined. Research into what causes IS has focused on the structural elements of the spine, spinal musculature, collagenous structures, the endocrine system, the central nervous system, and genetics. Results of these studies have brought about a new perception of IS epiphenomena, but the main cause of IS remains unknown. Recently, several investigators have produced new hypotheses regarding the cause of IS using the developing techniques of genetics, biochemistry, and neurology. This book is a review of the various causative factors thus far proposed for IS and an introduction to the directions in which research is heading to determine the primary cause of IS.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Daryl I. Smith, Hai Tran, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive source on the pathogenic origins of neuropathic pain covers the detailed molecular bases of the currently known neuropathies as classified by their pathogenic origins. Filling a critical need, this book fills the need for a resource on a syndrome that demands improved understanding by clinicians and researchers alike so that treatment options for patients are not categorically limited to a pill or a needle. If the clinician understands the origins of a patients' neuropathic pain, they can work cooperatively toward improving it with tailored therapies that don't create societal diseconomies and that ultimately are effective in helping patients. The book presents in detail the molecular bases of some currently known neuropathies by their pathogenetic origins, allowing clinicians to tailor more specific and more effective treatment regimens for their patients. For basic researchers, this book is a general resource to better direct research on neuropathy-specific molecular mechanisms. The improved understanding of the pathogenesis of neuropathic pain can then be used to develop more specific and more effective manipulations of these pathways.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Transitional Neuropathy: Chronification of Acute Pain
    Diabetic Neuropathy
    Complex Regional Pain Syndrome (CRPS)
    Autoimmune Disease-Related Neuropathy
    Methylation Disorder Neuropathy
    Alcohol-Related Neuropathy
    Perfusion-Related Neuropathy
    Uremic Neuropathy
    Chemotherapy Induced Neuropathy
    Antibiotics and Antifungals
    Miscellaneous
    Treatment
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Richard F. Spaide, Kyoko Ohno-Matsui, Lawrence A. Yannuzzi.
    Summary: Pathological Myopia is a major cause of severe vision loss worldwide. The mechanisms for vision loss include cataract, glaucoma, retinal detachment, and above all, degeneration of the macula within the posterior staphyloma. Pathological Myopia is one of the only current books to specifically address this disease and discusses recent developments in imaging technologies and various approaches to treatments, such as laser photocoagulation, photodynamic therapy, pharmaco-therapeutic injections in the vitreous, and surgery. Complete with high-quality color images, this book is written and edited by leaders in the field and is geared towards ophthalmologists, including residents and fellows in training, glaucoma and cataract specialists, and vitreoretinal macula experts.

    Contents:
    1. Myopia: A Historical Perspective
    2. Genes involved in the development of myopia
    3. Epidemiology of Myopia
    4. Animal Models of Experimental Myopia: Limitations and Synergies With Studies on Human Myopia
    5. The Sclera and its Role in Regulation of the Refractive State
    6. Public Health Impact of Pathologic Myopia
    7. Update on the Pathology of Pathologic Myopia
    8. The Sclera and Induced Abnormalities in Myopia
    9. The Choroid
    10. The Optic Nerve in High Myopia
    11. Vitreous Changes
    12. Staphyloma, Part 1
    13. Staphyloma, Part 2
    14. Myopic Chorioretinal Atrophy
    15. Choroidal Neovascularization
    16. Myopic Macular Retinoschisis
    17. Peripheral Retinal Abnormalities
    18. Retinal Detachment
    19. Glaucoma in Myopia
    20. Myopic Optic Neuropathy
    21. Special Considerations for Cataract Surgery in the Face of Pathologic Myopia
    22. Ocular Motility Abnormalities
    23. Myopia: Ocular and Systemic Disease
    24. Prevention of Myopia
    25. Sclera-targeted Therapies for Pathologic Myopia.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Richard F. Spaide, Kyoko Ohno-Matsui, Lawrence A. Yannuzzi, editors.
    Summary: Pathologic Myopia is a major cause of severe vision loss worldwide. The mechanisms for vision loss include cataract, glaucoma, retinal detachment, and above all, myopic maculopathy within the posterior staphyloma. The first edition of Pathologic Myopia is one of the only current books to specifically address this disease and discusses recent developments in imaging technologies and various approaches to treatments, such as laser photocoagulation, photodynamic therapy, pharmaco-therapeutic injections in the vitreous, and surgery. This new edition is a timely update to the standard reference in the field, with new chapters on advanced refractive error correction, genetics, developing a classification system, and special surgical approaches for pathologic myopia. Complete with even more high-quality color images and informative tables, this book is written and edited by leaders in the field and is geared towards ophthalmologists, including residents and fellows in training, glaucoma and cataract specialists, and vitreoretinal macula experts.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Basic Science of Pathologic Myopia.
    Chapter 1. Myopia: A Historical Perspective
    Chapter 2. Definition of pathologic myopia (PM)
    Chapter 3. Epidemiology of Myopia, High Myopia and Pathological Myopia
    Chapter 4. Genetics of Pathologic Myopia
    Chapter 5. Public Health Impact of Pathologic Myopia
    Chapter 6. Animal Models of Experimental Myopia: Limitations and Synergies with Studies on Human Myopia
    Chapter 7. The Sclera and its Role in Regulation of the Refractive State
    Section 2 - Ocular Changes in the Development of Pathologic Myopia.
    Chapter 8. Update on the Pathology of Pathological Myopia
    Chapter 9. The Sclera and Induced Abnormalities in Myopia
    Chapter 10. The Choroid Fin
    Chapter 11. Theories of Myopization: Potential Role of a Posterioly Expanding Bruch's Membrane
    Chapter 12. The Optic Nerve Head in High Myopia / Abnormalities of the Intrapapillary and Parapapillary Region
    Chapter 13. Vitreous Changes in Myopia
    Chapter 14. Ultra-widefield imaging of vitreous in pathologic myopia
    Section 3- Sequella of Pathologic Myopia and Their Potential Treatments.
    Chapter 15. Staphyloma I
    Chapter 16. Staphyloma II
    Chapter 17. Overview of OCT-based classification of macular lesions due to pathologic myopia
    Chapter 18. Myopic Maculopathy
    Chapter 19. Choroidal Neovascularization
    Chapter 20. Myopic Macular Retinoschisis
    Chapter 21. surgical approaches for complications of PM
    Chapter 22. Peripheral Retinal Abnormalities
    Chapter 23. Retinal Detachment
    Chapter 24. Glaucoma in Myopia
    Chapter 25. Myopic Optic Neuropathy
    Chapter 26. Special Considerations for Cataract Surgery in the Face of Pathologic Myopia
    Chapter 27. Ocular Motility Abnormalities
    Chapter 28. Ocular and Systemic Disease
    Section 4 - Treatment of pathologic myopia.
    Chapter 29. Prevention of myopia progression in children and adolescents
    Chapter 30. OPTICAL METHODS TO SLOW THE PROGRESSION OF MYOPIA
    Chapter 31. Sclera-targeted therapies for pathologic myopia.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital/Print
    von E. Finger und M. Sänger.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. T. Die Pathologie und Therapie der Sterilität beim Manne.
    Digital Access Google Books 1898-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    N59 .F49 1898
    1
  • Digital
    Norbert Weiss, Alexandra Koschak, editors.
    Summary: Calcium ions represent Mother Nature's "ion-of-choice" for regulating fundamental physiological functions, as they initiate a new life at the time of fertilization and guide subsequent developmental and physiological functions of the human body. Calcium channels, which act as gated pathways for the movement of calcium ions across the membranes, play a central part in the initiation of calcium signals, and defects in calcium channel function have been found to result in a plethora of human diseases, referred to as the calcium channelopathies. Pathologies of Calcium Channels brings together leading international experts to discuss our current understanding of human diseases associated with the various calcium channels, from their molecular basis to potential future therapeutic targeting of calcium channels.

    Contents:
    Part I. Pathologies of Voltage-Gated Calcium Channels
    Part II. Pathologies of Transient Receptor Potential Channels
    Part III. Pathologies of Ligand-Gated Calcium Channels.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital/Print
    Orth, Johannes; Orth, Johannes.
    Digital Access Google Books 1876-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J25 .O76 1917
    1
  • Digital/Print
    Hering, Heinrich Ewald.
    Contents: <br/
    >1. Die Funktionsstörungen des Herzens, der Gefässe und des Blutes.
    Digital Access Google Books 1921-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J113 .H54
    1
  • Digital/Print
    von Carl Breuss und Alexander Kolisko.
    Summary: This is a classic description and classification of pelvic deformities.

    Contents:
    1. Bd. Allgemeines, Missbildungs-, Assimilations- und Zwergbecken, riesen-Rachitisbecken und Dimensional-Anomalien ([1900]-1904. vii, [1], 707 p., incl. 216 ill., tables)
    2. Bd. Osteomalaciebecken, ostitische und synostotische Becken, Exostosen-, Neubildungs-, Fractur- und Lacerationsbecken ([1908]-1910. vi, [2], 583 p. incl. 175 ill., tables)
    3. Bd. Abnorme Beckenformen infolge von Anomalien der Wirbelsäule, der unteren Extremitäten und des Nervensystems (1900-1912. v, [1], 696 p. incl. 182 ill., tables).
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    J27 .B846
    3
  • Digital
    [edited by] Howard M. Reisner, PhD, Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.
    Contents:
    Disease and the genome : genetic, developmental and neoplastic disease
    Cell injury, death and aging and the body's response
    Environmental injury
    Clinical practice : anatomic pathology
    Clinical practice : molecular pathology
    Clinical practice : laboratory medicine and patient care
    The vascular system
    Pulmonary pathology
    Pathology of the gastrointestinal tract
    Pathology of the liver, gallbladder and extrahepatic biliary tract
    Pathology of the pancreas
    Pathology of medical renal disease
    Urologic pathology of the lower urinary tract and male gu system
    Hematopathology
    Basic principles of clinical endocrinology
    Breast pathology
    The female reproductive tract
    Soft tissue and bone pathology
    Neuromuscular pathology
    Pathology of the skin
    Pathology of the nervous system.
    Digital Access AccessMedicine 2015
  • Digital
    Howard M. Reisner.
    Summary: "We have continued to center our presentations around case studies designed to emphasize the role of the pathologist in the team that provides patient care, examining the role of anatomic, clinical, and molecular pathologists in that multi-membered group both in dedicated chapters and in descriptions of the pathology of specific organ systems."--Preface

    Contents:
    1. Cancer and the Genome
    2. Cell Injury, Cell Death, and Aging
    3. Hemostasis and Thrombosis --4. Environmental Injury
    5. Clinical Practice: Anatomic Pathology
    6. Clinical Practice: Molecular Pathology
    7. Clinical Practice: Laboratory Medicine and Patient Care
    8. The Cardiovascular System
    9. Pulmonary Pathology
    10. Pathology of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    11. Pathology of the Liver, Gallbladder, and Extrahepatic Biliary Tract
    12. Pathology of the Pancreas
    13. Pathology of Medical Renal Disease
    14. Urologic Pathology of the Lower Urinary Tract, Male GU System, and Kidney
    15. Hematopathology
    16. Pathology of the Endocrine System
    17. Breast Pathology
    18. The Female Reproductive Tract
    19. Soft Tissue and Bone Pathology
    20. Neuromuscular Pathology
    21. Pathology of the Skin
    22. Pathology of the Nervous System
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
  • Print
    Catherine Cavallaro Goodman, Kenda S. Fuller.
    Contents:
    I, Introduction :
    1. Introduction to concepts of pathology
    2. Behavioral, social, and environmental factors contributing to disease and dysfunction
    3. The psychosocial-spiritual impact on health care
    4. Environmental and occupational medicine
    5. Problems affecting multiple systems
    6. Injury, inflammation, healing, and repair. II, Clinical medicine :
    7. The immune system
    8. Infectious disease
    9. Oncology
    10. The integumentary system
    11. The endocrine and metabolic systems
    12. The cardiovascular system
    13. The lymphatic system
    14. The hematologic system
    15. The respiratory system
    16. The gastrointestinal system
    17. The hepatic, pancreatic, and biliary systems
    18. The renal and urologic systems
    19. The male genital/reproductive system
    20. The female genital/reproductive system
    21. Transplantation. III, Pathology of the musculoskeletal system :
    22. Introduction to pathology of the musculoskeletal system
    23. Genetic and developmental disorders
    24. Metabolic disorders
    25. Infectious diseases of the musculoskeletal system
    26. Musculoskeletal neoplasms
    27. Soft tissue, joint, and bone disorders. IV, Pathology of the nervous system :
    28. Introduction to central nervous system disorders
    29. Infectious disorders of the central nervous system
    30. Central nervous system neoplasms
    31. Degenerative diseases of the central nervous system
    32. Stroke
    33. Traumatic brain injury
    34. Traumatic spinal cord injury
    35. Cerbral palsy
    36. Seizures and epilepsy
    37. Headache
    38. Vestibular disorders
    39. The peripheral nervous system
    40. Laboratory tests and values.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB111 .G66 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Francisco F. Nogales, Rafael E. Jimenez, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Massimo Loda, Lorelei A. Mucci, Megan L. MIttelstadt, Mieke Van Hemelrijck, Maura Bríd Cotter, editors.
    Contents:
    Basic Principles of Patho-Epidemiology
    The Intersection of Epidemiology and Pathology
    Introduction to Histology
    Introduction to Pathology
    Basic Techniques in Molecular Pathology
    Introduction to Cancer Epidemiology
    Cancer Screening
    Molecular and Genetic Epidemiology of Cancer
    Bioinformatic Analysis of Epidemiological and Pathological Data
    Cancer Types
    Epidemiology of Prostate Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Prostate Cancer
    Epidemiology of Breast Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Breast Cancer
    Epidemiology of Ovarian and Endometrial Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Uterine and Ovarian Cancers
    Brain Tumors
    Epidemiology
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Brain Cancer
    Epidemiology of Renal Cell Carcinoma
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Renal Cancer
    Epidemiology of Lung Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Lung Cancer
    Epidemiology of Colorectal Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Colorectal Cancer
    Epidemiology of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    The Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    Epidemiology of Pancreatic Cancer
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Pancreatic Cancer
    Epidemiology of Bladder Cancer
    Bladder Cancer
    Epidemiology of Hematologic Malignancies
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Hematologic Malignancies
    Epidemiology of Melanoma
    Pathology and Molecular Pathology of Melanoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Elizabeth McInnes.
    Contents:
    An Introduction to Pathology Techniques / Elizabeth McInnes
    Recording Pathology Data / Cheryl L Scudamore
    General Pathology and the Terminology of Basic Pathology / Elizabeth McInnes
    Common Spontaneous and Background Lesions in Laboratory Animals / Elizabeth McInnes
    Target Organ Pathology / Elizabeth McInnes
    Clinical Pathology / Barbara Beust
    Adversity: A Pathologist's Perspective / Bhanu Singh
    Limitations of Pathology and Animal Models / Natasha Neef.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Tim D. Oury, Thomas A. Sporn, Victor L. Roggli, editors.
    Summary: The third edition of Pathology of Asbestos-Associated Diseases builds on the success of the previous editions by fully updating knowledge on diagnostic and epidemiologic aspects and presenting important new insights derived from new epidemiologic studies and animal studies. Background information is first provided on the mineralogy of asbestos, occupational and environmental exposure, and asbestos bodies. The various diseases associated with asbestos exposure are then considered in turn, with detailed description and illustration of pathologic features as well as extensive discussion of etiology, epidemiology, differential diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis. Further chapters are devoted to cytopathology, experimental models of disease, and analysis of tissue mineral fiber content. In addition, the medicolegal issues relating to asbestos-associated diseases are analyzed from the point of view of both the plaintiff and the defendant. This book will be an essential reference for pathologists and an invaluable source of information for pulmonologists, radiologists, and occupational medical practitioners.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Christopher R. Shea, Jon A. Reed, Victor G. Prieto, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Introductory Chapters
    Chapter 1. Gross Prosection of Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 2. Histopathologic Staging and Reporting of Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 3. Clinicopathologic Correlation in Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 4. Anathema or Useful? Application of Immunohistochemistry to the Diagnosis of Melanocytic Lesions
    Chapter 5. Applications of Additional Techniques to Melanocytic Pathology
    Part 2: Diagnostic Challenges
    Chapter 6. Spitz Nevus versus Spitzoid Melanoma
    Chapter 7. Halo Nevus versus Melanoma with Regression
    Chapter 8. Nevoid Malignant Melanoma versus Melanocytic Nevus
    Chapter 9. Dysplastic Nevi versus Melanoma
    Chapter 10. Blue Nevus versus Pigmented Epithelioid Melanocytoma
    Chapter 11. Recurrent Melanocytic Nevus versus Melanoma
    Chapter 12. Neurothekeoma versus Melanoma
    Chapter 13. Melanoma in situ versus Paget?s Disease
    Chapter 14. Desmoplastic Nevus versus Desmoplastic Melanoma
    Chapter 15. Cutaneous Metastatic Melanoma versus Primary Cutaneous Melanoma
    Chapter 16. Acral Nevus versus Acral Melanoma
    Chapter 17. Capsular (Nodal) Nevus versus Metastatic Melanoma
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Consolato M. Sergi.
    Summary: This book covers the full range of pathologic conditions encountered during childhood and youth, including tumors and tumor-like conditions of all organ systems, with direct links to developmental biology pathways and genetics. It provides a user-friendly road map to the main diagnostic criteria and combines an organ-related approach with an explanation of the diagnostic approaches to various specific diseases and syndromes, including sequential segmental analysis of congenital heart disease. More than 1000 new full-color macro- and microphotographs using more than 500 multi-photographic panels are included to provide a realistic basis for comparison macroscopically and under the lens, and summarizing tables highlight key information in the concise form required for at-a-glance review. Pathologists will find the book very helpful when signing out complex and challenging cases, and it will also prove invaluable for exam preparation and continuing medical education.

    Contents:
    Cardiovascular System
    Lower Respiratory Tract
    Gastrointestinal Tract
    Liver
    Pancreas, Gallbladder, and Extrahepatric Biliary System
    Kidney, Pelvis, and Ureter
    Lower Urinary and Male Genital System
    Female Genital System
    Breast
    Hemato-Lymphoid System
    Endocrine System
    Soft Tissue
    Arthro-Skeletal System
    Head & Neck
    Central Nervous System
    Peripheral Nervous System
    Skin
    Placenta, Abnormal Conception, and Prematurity. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Takuya Moriya, editor.
    Summary: This book focuses on precursor lesions, borderline lesions, and early carcinomas of female-specific organs from the standpoint of pathology. In 2012, the latest WHO Classification of Tumours of the Breast, 4th ed., was published and subsequently, in 2014, the WHO Classification of Tumours of Female Reproductive Organs, 4th ed., was published. In these fourth editions, several new concepts are addressed that were not described in the previous editions, and many of them are related to the awareness of the specific pathogenesis of tumors in female patients. Although some of these issues are still controversial, several paradigm shifts should be understood by medical scientists. Thus researchers, diagnostic pathologists, and clinicians must share current information about what is taking place in the field and what the next issue to resolve is. This volume greatly broadens the reader's understanding of the new concepts and paradigm shifts, as it includes informationon how to diagnose and make differential diagnoses on a practical basis and also provides a thorough explanation of the molecular-clinicopathologic basis of the new concepts. The book thus benefits gynecologists, breast surgeons, gynecologic-medical oncologists, and cytotechnologists.

    Contents:
    A new strategy for diagnosing of squamous intraepithelial neoplasia of the cervix / Yoshiki Mikami
    Adenocarcinoma and its precursor of the uterine cervix : current concept / Suzuko Moritani
    Heterogeneity of the precursor lesions of endometrial carcinoma, according to the histologic subtype / Hiroyuki Yanai
    Current concept of precancerous and early stage of serous ovarian carcinoma / Takako Kiyokawa, Masami Iwamoto
    Ovarian carcinoma associated with endometriosis / Masanori Yasuda, Mitsutake Yano
    Problems with the histological diagnosis of epithelial borderline tumors of the ovary / Miki Kushima
    Development of breast carcinoma in relation to the intrinsic subtype / Takuya Moriya
    Morphological and molecular approaches to breast cancer risk assessment / Shinobu Masuda.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Pallav Gupta, Ramesh K. Gupta.
    Summary: This book provides clear understanding of morphological appearances of various glomerular lesions encountered in a wide range of diseases involving renal glomeruli. Chapters cover various diseases with each chapter including a brief text and multiple colored microphotographs depicting the distinctive morphological features of glomeruli as may be encountered in these diseases. It presents complete clinical history with thorough lab workup and other related investigations as considered essential for proper evaluation of the patient. The book provides systemic approach for proper diagnosis of the underlying disease condition in view of the clinical workup and renal biopsy assessment. It provides visual understanding of the glomerular pathology that helps the consultant nephrologist to have a clear understanding of underlying renal disease thus helping in proper evaluation and appropriate therapeutic management of the patient. It may also guide to predict the likely prognostic outcome of the patient. This book is not only helpful to renal pathologists and nephrologists but also serves as a valuable resource for clear understanding of the glomerular lesions to the beginners and postgraduates in nephrology and renal pathology and other physicians managing the patients of renal diseases.

    Contents:
    Evaluation of Renal Biopsy
    Minimal Change Disease
    Focal Segmental Glomerulosclerosis
    Membranous Glomerulonephritis
    Immune Complex Mediated Membranoproliferative Glomerulonephritis
    C3 Glomerulopathy
    Post-infectious Glomerulonephritis
    IgA Nephropathy and Henoch-Schonlein Purpura
    Alport Syndrome and Thin Basement Membrane Disease
    Congenital Nephrotic Syndrome and Diffuse Mesangial Sclerosis
    Lupus Nephritis and Lupus Podocytopathy
    Anti-glomerular Basement Membrane Disease
    Pauci-immune Crescentic Glomerulonephritis
    Post-partum Thrombotic Microangiopathy
    Haemolytic Uremic Syndrome (HUS)
    Diabetic Nephropathy
    Diabetic Nephropathy
    Renal Involvement in Plasma Cell Dyscrasia
    Glomerular Diseases with Organized Deposits (Cryoglobulinemia, Fibrillary, Collagenofibrotic)
    Renal Involvement in Storage Disorders (Fabry's Disease, LCAT Deficiency, Niemann Pick Disease)
    Hypertensive Nephrosclerosis
    Renal Sarcoidosis
    HIV Associated Nephropathy.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Cecilia C. S. Yeung, Howard M. Shulman, editors.
    Summary: GVHD is the major cause of non-relapse morbidity and mortality after hemopoietic cell transplantation. This text provides a comprehensive, state-of-the art review of the pathology of GVHD for clinicians, pathologists and researchers with an interest in GVHD. The book covers the histologic spectrum of GVHD, clinicopathologic features, pathobiology, grading, risk factors affecting outcome, and differential diagnosis. It profiles the new NIH consensus and international guidelines for diagnosing GVHD. The text chapters are based on actual patient cases covering the gamut of acute and chronic GVHD and associated complications. The discussion initiated teaching points and key histologic points make the reading and teaching more interactive while providing a stimulating discussion of difficult differentials. The chapters are richly illustrated with colored comparative gross and histologic images and include extensive references by experts in the fields including the most up-to-date scientific and clinical information.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Michael T. Ashworth.
    Summary: In recent years, there have been no books published on paediatric cardiac pathology despite enormous developments in genetics, a marked explosion of paediatric transplant programmes, surges in knowledge of fetal cardiac pathology and understanding of congenital heart disease, and the emergence of a flourishing cardiac imaging discipline. This book will be the first unified and comprehensive source of reference for childhood heart disease, covering the full field of paediatric cardiac pathology, in one volume. Comprising the twenty-five year experience of a single pathologist, the full spectrum of the pathology of heart disease, from the fetus to the adult, is uniquely presented here. Richly illustrated, with over 800 colour photographs, general and paediatric pathologists alike will be able to examine the microscopic features of the conditions described, with a specific focus on metabolic disease for practitioners worldwide.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Gary W. Procop, Bobbi S. Pritt.
    Summary: Pathology of Infectious Diseases, by Gary W. Procop, MD, packs all of today's most essential information on infectious disease pathology into a compact, high-yield format! Well-organized and segmented by type of infectious organism, the book's pragmatic approach complemented by abundant full-color, high-quality photomicrographs and clinical photos, and at-a-glance tables makes it easy to access the information you need to quickly and accurately detect and identify pathogenic organisms. Chapters on immunohistochemical and molecular techniques as well as artifacts and pitfalls guide you to accurate detection and identifications.

    Contents:
    Principles of Infectious Disease Pathology: An Introduction
    Herpes Virus Infections
    Viral Hepatitis
    Human Papillomavirus, Polyomaviruses, and Parvovirus Infections
    Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection
    Influenza and Other Respiratory Virus Infections
    Arbovirus Encephalomyelitis
    Viral Encephalomyelitis: Rabies, Enterovirus, and LCM
    Orf Infections and Molluscum Contagiosum
    Skin and Soft Tissue Infections
    Endocarditis and Other Intravascular Infections
    Bacterial Pneumonia
    Nocardiosis and Infections by Related Species
    Mycetoma: Eumycetoma and Actinomycetoma
    Botryomycoses
    Bacterial Gastrointestinal Infections
    Anaerobic Bacterial Infections
    Bartonella, Coxiella, and Tropheryma Infections *
    Rickettsia, Ehrlichia, and Anaplasma Infections
    Tuberculosis and Infections by Nontuberculous Mycobacteria
    Leprosy
    Buruli Ulcer
    Hyalohyphomycoses
    Zygomycosis
    Dematiaceous Fungal Infections
    Infections with Yeasts and Yeastlike Fungi
    Helminth Infections *
    Protozoal Infections
    Artifacts and Pitfalls in Infectious Disease Pathology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2015
  • Digital
    Stephen W. Barthold, Stephen M. Griffey, Dean H. Percy.
    Contents:
    Mouse
    Rat
    Hamster
    Gerbil
    Guinea pig
    Rabbit.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    Gary C. Kanel.
    Contents:
    Normal liver
    Viral hepatitis
    Fatty liver diseases
    Diseases of the biliary tract
    Non-viral infectious diseases
    Granulomatous hepatitis
    Autoimmune hepatitis
    Vascular disorders
    Genetic and metabolic hepatic diseases
    Developmental hepatobiliary disorders and cystic diseases
    Drug- and toxin-induced liver diseases
    Liver transplantation
    Hepatic tumors, benign
    Hepatic tumors, malignant
    Miscellaneous hepatic disorders.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Helmut Popper.
    Summary: This well-illustrated book covers the full range of lung and pleural diseases from the pathologic standpoint. It has been updated from the first edition by including the most recent molecular data for the different lung diseases, tumor as well as non-tumor ones. New diagnostic tests are included, new aspects for the understanding of diseases have been added. Both diseases of adults and pediatric lung diseases are presented. The chapter on lung development has been expanded due to the many new findings being reported since the first edition. The book will serve as an excellent guide to the diagnosis of these diseases, but in addition it explains the disease mechanisms and etiology. Genetics and molecular biology are also discussed whenever necessary for a full understanding. The author is an internationally recognized expert who runs courses on lung and pleural pathology attended by participants from all over the world. In compiling this book, he has drawn on more than 30 years experience in the field.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Development of the Lung
    Chapter 2 Normal Lung
    Chapter 3 Pediatric Pulmonary Pathology
    Chapter 4 Edema
    Chapter 5 Air Filling Diseases
    Chapter 6 Airway Diseases
    Chapter 7 Smoking Related Lung Diseases
    Chapter 8 Pneumonia
    Chapter 9 Lung Diseases Based on Adverse Immune Reactions
    Chapter 10 Eosinophilic Lung Diseases
    Chapter 11 Vascular Lung Diseases
    Chapter 12 Metabolic Lung Diseases
    Chapter 13 Environmentally Induced Lung Diseases and Pneomuconiosis
    Chapter 14 Iatrogenic Lung Pathology
    Chapter 15 Bronchoalveolar Lavage as a Diagnostic and Research Tool
    Chapter 16 Lung Transplantation-Related Pathology
    Chapter 17 Lung Tumors
    Chapter 18 Metastasis
    Chapter 19 Molecular Pathology of Lung Tumors
    Chapter 20 Immunotherapy of Lung Tumors
    Chapter 21 Diseases of the Pleura
    Chapter 22 Lung Tumors in Experimental Models
    Chapter 23 Handling of Tissues and Cells.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Helmut Popper ; with contribution by prof. Fiorella Calabrese.
    Summary: This well-illustrated textbook covers the full range of lung and pleural diseases from the pathologic standpoint. Both diseases of adults and pediatric lung diseases are presented. The book will serve as an excellent guide to the diagnosis of these diseases, but in addition it explains the disease mechanisms and etiology. Genetics and molecular biology are also discussed whenever necessary for a full understanding. The author is an internationally recognized expert who runs courses on lung and pleural pathology attended by participants from all over the world. In compiling this book, he has drawn on more than 30 years' experience in the field.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Raymond L. Barnhill, editor-in-chief ; Michael W. Piepkorn, Klaus J. Busam, co-editors.
    Summary: Highly acclaimed and considered the leading reference in the field, Pathology of Melanocytic Nevi and Melanoma has once again been fully revised, updated, and expanded to reflect the most recent advances and techniques in the field of melanoma pathology. New chapters on mucosal melanoma, ocular melanoma, and pigmented lesions of the nail apparatus have been included in this new edition. The successful focus and format of the previous editions have been preserved. Each lesion and diagnosis is clearly illustrated withthe aid of a wealth of digitally enhanced full-color photomicrographs. A concise description of the clinical features, histopathology, differential diagnosis, and outstanding characteristics of each lesion provides readers with a quick yet comprehensive overview of each topic covered. Pathology of Melanocytic Nevi and Melanoma is the essential reference for every practicing dermatopathologist, pathologist, dermatologist, and cancer research scientist today.

    Contents:
    Melanocytes
    Biopsies, Tissue Processing, Immunohistochemistry, and Ancillary Techniques
    Genetic and Molecular Pathology of Melanoma
    Circumscribed Pigmented Lesions Composed of Basilar Melanocytes
    Common Acquired and Atypical (Dysplastic) Melanocytic Nevi
    Congenital Melanocytic Nevi and Associated Neoplasms, Congenital and Childhood Melanoma
    Spitz Nevus and Variants
    Dermal Melanocytoses, Blue Nevi, and Related Conditions
    Melanocytic Nevi with Phenotypic Heterogeneity
    Cutaneous Malignant Melanoma
    Benign and Malignant Melanocytic Neoplasms of the Mucosa
    Benign and Malignant Melanocytic Neoplasms of the Ocular Apparatus
    Metastatic Malignant Melanoma
    Prognostic Factors in Cutaneous Malignant Melanoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    editors, Klaus J. Busam, Pedram Gerami, Richard A. Scolyer.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Ramesh K. Gupta, Pallav Gupta, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction to Opportunistic Infections
    Opportunistic Bacterial Infections
    Opportunistic Viral Infections
    Opportunistic Fungal Infections
    Opportunistic Parasitic Infections
    Mixed Opportunistic Infections.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Pierre Russo, Eduardo D. Ruchelli, David A. Piccoli, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric gastrointestinal and liver biopsies account for a significant portion of the specimens examined by a pathology laboratory. The increasingly widespread use of endoscopic procedures in children, the improved sophistication of medical imaging techniques, and the exciting expansion of knowledge in genetic medicine have all led to new advances and opportunities in pediatric hepatogastroenterology and pathology. Pathology of Pediatric Gastrointestinal and Liver Disease provides the pediatric pathologist, the GI or general pathologist, and the pediatric gastroenterologist with the most complete and current reference on the subject. With an emphasis on clinical-pathological correlation, the book includes in-depth discussions on disorders and issues that are frequently encountered but for which up-to-date information is often not readily available, as well as infrequent disorders unique or specific to children that are not covered in standard texts. Significant revision has been undertaken since the first edition, with the inclusion of many new illustrations and electron micrographs. Among the topics covered are malabsorption and motility disorders, immunodeficiencies, including HIV, developmental malformations, food allergies, cystic diseases of the liver, hepatic tumors, and esophageal and pancreatic disorders. The book is richly illustrated, with many figures in color, and the high-quality endoscopic and radiographic images permit ready correlation with the pathologic principles under discussion.

    Contents:
    Developmental Anatomy and Anomalies of the Gastrointestinal Tract with Involvement in Major Malformative Syndromes
    Esophageal Disorders in Childhood
    Gastritis and Gastropathies of Childhood
    Enteropathies Associated with Chronic Diarrhea and Malabsorption in Childhood
    Gastrointestinal and Hepatic Involvement in Immunodeficiencies and Systemic Disease of Childhood
    Colitis in Infancy and Childhood
    Intestinal Motor Disorders
    Polyps and Tumors of the Gastrointestinal Tract in Childhood
    Normal and Abnormal Liver Development
    Diseases of the Biliary Tree
    Hepatocellular and Intrahepatic Cholestasis
    Hepatitis and Liver Failure in Infancy and Childhood
    The Liver in Metabolic Disease
    Hepatic Tumors in Childhood
    GI and Liver Transplantation Pathology in Childhood.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Olivier Glehen, Aditi Bhatt, editors.
    Summary: This book covers some well-known and some unexplored pathological aspects of management of peritoneal metastases and should be read by both surgeons and pathologists involved in the management of peritoneal surface malignancies. The evaluation of cytoreductive surgery specimens is explored for the prognostic information it can provide and recommendations for evaluation of such specimens are provided. The pathways and patterns of peritoneal dissemination and their clinical implications on the extent of surgery performed and other aspects of management are discussed for some common peritoneal tumours. The exploratory studies presented here provide a new perspective on the surgical resection of peritoneal metastases. Other important aspects of pathological evaluation like pathological response to chemotherapy, diagnosis and classification of rare peritoneal tumors have also been covered in different chapters. Keeping in sync with the progress in molecular oncology, the role of molecular oncology in the current and future management of peritoneal metastases is addressed for different tumors. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: Mechanisms of Peritoneal Metastasis Formation
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Mechanisms of Trans-mesothelial Metastasis
    1.2.1 Mechanisms of Cancer Cell Spillage into the Peritoneal Cavity
    1.2.2 Adhesion of PFCCs and Mesothelial Cells (Fig. 1.1, Process 1)
    1.2.3 Morphological Changes of Mesothelial Cells (Fig. 1.1, Process 1), Submesothelial Invasion of PFCCs, Attachment of PFCCs to the Basement Membrane (Fig. 1.1, Process 2)
    1.2.4 Adhesion of PFCCS to the Submesothelial Basement Membrane (Fig. 1.1, Process 2 and Fig. 1.6) 1.2.5 Invasion into the Submesothelial Tissue (Fig. 1.1, Process 3)
    1.2.6 Destruction of Submesothelial Basement Membrane and Extracellular Matrix (ECM) and Invasion into Submesothelial Tissue (Fig. 1.1, Process 3)
    1.2.7 Proliferation in the Subperitoneal Tissue (Fig. 1.1, Process 4: Angiogenesis and Proliferation)
    1.3 Trans-lymphatic Metastasis
    1.4 Mechanisms of Superficial Growing Metastasis
    References
    2: Extent of Peritoneal Resection for Peritoneal Metastases: Inferences from Pathophysiology
    2.1 Background and Introduction 2.1.1 Evolution of Peritoneal Surface Oncology
    2.2 Pathophysiology of Peritoneal Metastases and Its Clinical Implications
    2.2.1 Peritoneal Metastatic Cascade
    2.2.2 Distribution of Disease in the Peritoneal Cavity
    2.2.2.1 Epithelial Ovarian Cancer
    2.2.3 Implications of Mechanism of Peritoneal Dissemination on Surgical Resection
    2.2.4 Morphology of Peritoneal Deposits and Morphological Evolution of Peritoneal Metastases
    2.2.4.1 Morphological Evolution of PM
    2.2.4.2 Alteration in Morphology After Systemic Chemotherapy
    2.2.4.3 Histological Subtype 2.2.5 Impact on the Extent of Surgical Resection
    2.2.6 Resection of Uninvolved Regions
    2.2.7 Primary Tumor Type
    2.2.8 Lymphadenectomy in Addition to Cytoreductive Surgery
    2.2.9 Prognostic Implications of Lymph Node Involvement
    2.3 Extent of Peritoneal Resection for PM Arising from Various Primary Tumors
    2.3.1 Studies Looking at the Extent of Peritoneal Resection
    2.3.2 Application in Clinical Practice and Question for Future Research
    2.4 Conclusions
    References
    3: Therapeutic Rationale and Data Set for Reporting Cytoreductive Surgery Specimens 3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Anatomical Considerations
    3.2.1 Peritoneal Regions
    3.2.2 Lymphatic Drainage
    3.2.3 Subperitoneal Nodes
    3.2.4 Omental Nodes
    3.2.5 Retroperitoneal Nodes
    3.2.6 Paracardiac and Mediastinal Nodes
    3.3 Pathological Evaluation of Cytoreductive Surgery Specimens
    3.3.1 The Surgeon's Role
    3.3.1.1 Labelling of Surgical Specimens by the Surgeon
    3.3.1.2 Morphological Description
    3.3.2 The Pathologist's Role
    3.3.2.1 Handling of Specimens by the Pathologist
    3.3.2.2 Gross Description and Sectioning
    Peritonectomy Specimen(s)
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Alessandro Franchi, editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive, up-to-date review of the field of diagnostic histopathology of sinonasal tumors and tumor-like lesions. It includes well-known and recently described structures, focusing on their epidemiological, clinical, radiological, and molecular features. It also discusses the latest surgical and medical treatment of these tumors. Primarily written for pathologists and pathology residents, the topics discussed make it a valuable resource for head and neck surgeons, radiologists, oncologists, and other clinical physicians. Written by experts in the field, this book further our understanding of the pathology of sinonasal tumors.

    Contents:
    Part 1 - General Features
    1. Epidemiology of sinonasal tumors
    2. Imaging of sinonasal tumors
    3. Molecular pathology of sinonasal tumors
    4. Clinical aspects and surgical treatment
    Part 2 - Histopathology Sinonasal Tumor-like Lesions
    5. Histopathology Sinonasal Tumor-like Lesions
    Part 3 - Sinonasal Tumors
    6. Epithelial Tumors
    7. Mesenchymal Tumors
    8. Neuroectodermal/melanocytic tumors
    9. Haematolymphoid tumors
    10. Germ cell tumors
    11. Metastatic tumors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Patricia V. Turner, Marina L. Brash, Dale A. Smith.
    Contents:
    Rabbits
    Mice
    Ferrets
    Guinea Pigs
    Chinchillas
    Rats
    Hamsters
    Gerbils
    Mice
    Hedgehogs.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Maurizio Colecchia, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I: Testicular Tumors: Epidemiology
    Epidemiology of Testicular Cancer
    Part II: Tumors of the Testis and Paratesticular Structures
    Congenital Lesions
    Entities Contributing to Infertility and their Relationship to Oncogenic Risk
    Germ Cell Tumor of Infancy and Childhood
    The Stem Cell Origin and Pathogenetic Routes of Testicular Germ Cell Tumors
    Tumours of the Testis
    Prognostic and Predictive Factors in Pathology of the Testis
    Handling of the Surgical Specimen and Pathology Reporting of Malignant Germ Cell and Sex Cord-Stromal Tumors of the Testis
    Cysts and Epithelial Proliferations of the Testicular Collecting System
    Paratesticular Soft Tissue Neoplasms
    Frozen Section in Testicular Pathology
    Part III: Pathology of Precancerous Lesions and Tumors of the Penis
    Precancerous Lesions of the Penis
    Tumours of the Penis and Scrotum
    Handling of the Surgical Specimen and Pathology Reporting of Penile Neoplasms. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    C. Simon Herrington, editor.
    Summary: This is the third volume in the Essentials of Diagnostic Gynecological Pathology series sponsored by the British Association of Gynecological Pathologists. Focusing on cervical pathology, it provides an update on current diagnostic criteria, the use of biomarkers and specimen handling. It serves as a quick desktop reference facilitating accurate diagnosis, and also provides detailed descriptions and an exhaustive reference list for more in-depth study. Sections devoted to the changing landscape of cervical screening, current management and future directions are included. Standardized terminology, the biology of HPV-related pre-invasive disease, and the staging of early cervical cancers are discussed. As most histopathology departments receive many gynecological specimens, Pathology of the Cervix has been written to be useful diagnostically to general as well as specialist gynecological pathologists and pathologists in training. Gynecologists, oncologists, dermatologists, genitourinary physicians and cancer nurse specialists will find expert insights here that will help in treatment and counselling of their patients.

    Contents:
    Preface; Preface to the Series; Contents; Contributors; 1: Development of the Uterine Cervix and Its Implications for the Pathogenesis of Cervical Cancer; Introduction; Development of the Lower Female Reproductive Tract; Immunophenotypic Characterization of the Developing Human Fetal Squamocolumnar Junction; Progenitor Cells in the Adult Squamocolumnar Junction; Definition of the Cervical Transformation Zone (TZ); Squamous Metaplasia; Potential Target Cells for HPV Infection; Premalignant Lesions; Low-Grade Squamous Intraepithelial Lesion (LSIL). High-Grade Squamous Intraepithelial Lesion (HSIL) Adenocarcinoma In Situ (AIS); References; 2: Human Papillomaviruses (HPVs); Introduction; Classification; HPV Genome Organization and Life Cycle; Epidemiology; Prevalence in the General Population; Clearance and Risk; Prevalence in Disease (Histological); Prevalence in Disease (Cytologically Defined); Host Defenses; HPV Immunization; Delivery and Immunogenicity; Therapeutic Vaccines; Impact (Prophylactic Vaccines); HPV Testing; Justification for HPV Testing; Targets and Types of HR-HPV Test. Tools and Biomarkers for the Risk Stratification of HR-HPV Infection HPV Testing in Various Biospecimens; HPV Testing in Immunized Populations; References; 3: Cervical Screening: History, Current Algorithms, and Future Directions; Principles of Screening; The Condition; The Test; The Treatment; The Screening Program; Epidemiology of Cervical Cancer; Papanicolaou and the Development of Cytology-Based Population Screening; Cervical Cancer Screening in the UK (1950-1985); UK Terminology of Cervical Cytology and Histology; The NHS Cervical Screening Program (1986-2004). NHSCSP 2004 to the Present Liquid-Based Cytology (LBC); HPV Testing; Triage of Low-Grade Abnormality; Test of Cure; Automation in Cervical Screening; NHSCSP Beyond 2016: Cervical Screening in the Era of HPV Vaccination; HPV Vaccination; Primary HPV Testing; References; 4: Surgical and Nonsurgical Management of Cervical Cancer: Current Practice and Future Directions; Introduction; Stage IA Carcinoma of the Cervix; Stage IA1: Invasive Lesion d" mm Wide and d" mm Deep; Stage IA1 Plus Lymphovascular Space Invasion; Stage IA2: Width d"7 mm and Depth> 3 mm But d" mm. Adenocarcinoma Versus Squamous Cell Carcinoma in Early Cervical Cancer Stage IB1 Carcinoma of the Cervix; Stage IB1: Depth>5 mm, Or Width>7 mm, But Tumour Less Than 4 cm Diameter; or a Clinically Visible Lesion Confined to the Cervix; Stage IB1: Diameter Less Than 1 cm; Stage IB1: 1-2 cm Diameter Tumor; Trachelectomy; Stage IB1: 2-4 cm in Diameter; Stage IB2
    IV Carcinoma of the Cervix; Reducing the Risks of Treatment; Strategy 1: Assess the Risk of Recurrence Prior to Undertaking Surgical Treatment; Strategy 2: Lymph Node Assessment; Strategy 3: Radical Surgical Techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Fátima Carneiro, Paula Chaves, Arzu Ensari, editors.
    Summary: This book covers the complete field of the pahology of the Gastrointestinal tract - form Abetalipoproteinemia to Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Pieter Slootweg.
    Contents:
    Non-neoplastic Diseases of the Maxillofacial Bones
    Cysts
    Odontogenic Tumours
    Fibro-Osseous Lesions
    Giant Cell Lesions
    Bone forming Lesions of the Maxillofacial Bones
    Cartilaginous Lesions of the Maxillofacial Bones
    Other Diseases that involve Bone
    Diseases of the Temporomandibular Joint.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Alberto M. Marchevsky, Mark R. Wick.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2015
  • Digital
    Nafisa Wilkinson, editor.
    Summary: As the second volume in the Essentials of Diagnostic Gynecological Pathology series sponsored by the British Association of Gynecological Pathologists, Pathology of the Ovary, Fallopian Tube and Peritoneum is one of the very few dealing wholly with this subject. Pathology of the Ovary, Fallopian Tube and Peritoneum introduces the topic with a discussion of the anatomy, development, histology and normal function of the ovary, followed by chapters on non-neoplastic disorders of the ovary; surgery and medical management of ovarian cancer; and the use of imaging, frozen sections and cytology in ovarian pathology. The book then goes on to describe specific disorders of the ovary, fallopian tube and peritoneum in detail, and finishes with a chapter on specimen cut-up. Pathology of the Ovary, Fallopian Tube and Peritoneum has been written to be useful diagnostically to general as well as specialist gynecological histopathologists and pathologists in training. Gynecologists, oncologists, genitourinary physicians and cancer nurse specialists will find expert insights here that will help in treatment and counselling of their patients.

    Contents:
    Anatomy, Development, Histology and Normal Function of the Ovary
    Non-neoplastic Disorders of the Ovary
    The Surgery of Ovarian Cancer
    Advances in the Medical Management of Ovarian Cancer
    Integration of Imaging and Pathology in the Multidisciplinary Process
    Frozen Section Use in the Diagnosis of Ovarian Pathology
    The Role of Cytology in the Management of Ovarian Lesions
    Overview of Epithelial Ovarian Carcinoma (EOC): Pathogenesis and General Considerations
    Serous Neoplasms of the Ovary
    Mucinous Neoplasms of the Ovary
    Endometrioid Ovarian Carcinomas
    Clear Cell Carcinoma of the Ovary
    Undifferentiated, Transitional, Mixed and Other Epithelial Tumors of the Ovary
    Germ Cell Tumors of the Ovary and Dysgenetic Gonads
    Sex Cord Stromal Tumors
    Pathology of Malignancies Metastatic to the Ovary and of Synchronous Ovarian and Endometrial Carcinoma
    Pathology of the Fallopian Tube
    Pathology of the Peritoneum
    Mesenchymal Tumors of the Ovary
    Specimen Cut-up.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Irene Esposito, Eva Karamitopoulou-Diamantis, editors.
    Summary: This encyclopedia volume covers the complete field of pathology of the pancreas-- from Acinar cell neoplasms to Vascular resections. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need.

    Contents:
    Acinar cell carcinoma
    Acinar cell nodules
    Acinar cystic transformation of the pancreas
    Acinar-to-ductal metaplasia
    Acute pancreatitis
    Age-related changes
    Agenesis
    Alcohol-related chronic pancreatitis
    Anatomic variants, Surgical Pathology
    Anatomy and Organogenesis of the pancreas
    Anatomy, gross, Pathology of Pancreas
    Annular Pancreas
    Autoimmune pancreatitis
    Cystic fibrosis
    Ductal adenocarcinoma and Variants
    Ectopic tissue
    Familial and inherited pancreatic cancer
    Foregut cyst
    Glucagon-cell hyperplasia and neoplasia
    Groove pancreatitis
    Grossing of distal pancreatectomy specimens, Surgical Pathology
    Grossing of pancreatoduodenectomy specimens, Surgical Pathology
    Haemochromatosis
    Hereditary Chronic Pancreatitis
    Histology, Pathology of Pancreas.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    by Fiona Campbell, Caroline S. Verbeke.
    Summary: This updated volume provides a practical guide to pancreatic pathology that covers recent changes in concepts and classifications. Potential pitfalls and mimics in pancreatic pathology are highlighted and illustrated, and guidance is provided regarding how to recognise and avoid them. There is a new chapter on transplant pathology, and more than 200 new macroscopic and microscopic images have been added. Pathology of the Pancreas: A Practical Approach aims to enable readers to recognise the various pathological entities and provide the key information in their pathology reports, which is necessary for the individual patient's further management. The book provides the diagnostic pathologist with a comprehensive, well-illustrated, and extensively cross-referenced approach to pancreatic pathology.

    Contents:
    Embryology, Anatomy, and Histology
    Pancreatic Specimen Types
    Specimen Dissection and Sampling
    The Pancreatic Multidisciplinary Team
    Common Minor Changes
    Hereditary Exocrine Disorders
    Inflammatory Disorders
    Pancreatic Intraepithelial Neoplasia
    Ductal Adenocarcinoma
    Acinar Cell Carcinoma
    Non-epithelial Neoplasia
    Secondary Neoplasia
    Congenital and Developmental Abnormalities
    Cystic Lesions: Classification and Sampling
    Serous Cystic Neoplasia
    Mucinous Cystic Neoplasia
    Intraductal Papillary Neoplasia
    Solid-Pseudopapillary Neoplasia
    Other Cystic Lesions
    Endocrine Neoplasia
    Endocrine Cell Hyperplasia
    Pathology of the Transplanted Pancreas
    The Role of Frozen Section
    The Role of Cytology.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Khong, T. Yee; Gordijn, Sanne J.; Mooney, Eoghan E.; Morgan, Terry K.; Nikkels, Peter G. J.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    edited by Timothy Craig Allen, Saul Suster.
    Summary: This book covers the complete field of pleura and mediastinum pathology - from acquired multilocular thymic cyst to well-differentiated papillary mesothelioma. The alphabetically arranged entries, each of which provides a detailed description of a specific pathological disease pattern, allow readers to quickly and easily find the information they need.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Antonio Lopez-Beltran, Liang Cheng, Maria R. Raspollini, Rodolfo Montironi.
    Summary: Prostate cancer is the most commonly diagnosed noncutaneous neoplasm in men in the United States and is the second leading cause of cancer mortality. It poses diagnostic challenges in day-to-day practice in misdiagnosis of tumor-like lesions and secondary tumors. This book is a concise, practical guide to prostate pathology and is structured to guide pathologists, both practicing and trainees, in the diagnostic process. Numerous color images and algorithms show, in a practical manner, how to integrate pathologic and immunohistochemical features to reach a correct diagnosis in prostate tumors and tumor-like lesions. The book incorporates recent developments in biomarkers applied to immunohistochemistry, representing the best immunohistochemistry practice applied to current diagnosis of prostate cancer in biopsies and surgical specimens. It takes a multidisciplinary approach to the clinical management of prostate cancer and will also appeal to all healthcare professionals treating patients, particularly urologists, oncologists, biomedical scientists, and researchers. This book provides access to an online version on Cambridge Core, accessed via the code printed on the inside of the cover.

    Contents:
    Basic anatomy and histology of the prostate
    Inflammatory and tumor-like conditions of the prostate
    Preneoplastic lesions and conditions of the prostate
    Adenocarcinoma of the prostate
    Gleason grading of prostate cancer
    Histologic subtypes of prostatic carcinoma
    Neuroendocrine tumors of the prostate
    Pathologic prognostic factors of prostate cancer
    Pathology of the prostate after treatment
    Basic molecular pathology of prostate cancer
    Rare forms of prostatic carcinoma
    Tumors and tumor-like conditions of the prostate stroma
    Soft tissue and miscellaneous primary tumours of the prostate
    Metastatic and secondary tumors of the prostate
    The seminal vesicles and ejaculatory ducts
    Pathology of the prostatic urethra
    Practical immunohistochemistry of prostate cancer and related lesions.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2017
  • Digital
    Antonio Lopez-Beltran, Rodolfo Montironi, Liang Cheng.
    Summary: This concise, practical guide is structured to reflect the thought process of the practising pathologist. A key feature is the use of algorithms to aid in reaching the correct diagnosis, for both common and complex bladder tumors and tumor-like lesions. Its coverage of diagnostic criteria is in keeping with international standards and best practice, and the practical layout provides quick access to relevant information, integrating conventional histology, immunohistochemical markers and key clinical knowledge. Topics covered include the full spectrum of pathologic conditions that afflict the bladder and urothelium, as well as the pathology of the renal pelvis, ureter and the urethra. Accompanied by numerous images, this is an essential guide for trainee and practising surgical pathologists, urologists and oncologists.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Urinary bladder
    Basic anatomy and histology
    Inflammatory and tumor-like conditions
    Flat intraepithelial lesions and carcinoma in situ
    Benign papillary neoplasms and inverted papilloma
    Pathology of urothelial carcinoma
    Glandular neoplasms
    Pathology of the urachus
    Squamous cell neoplasms
    Neuroendocrine tumors
    Myofibroblastic proliferations and tumors
    Soft tissue tumors
    Other rare malignancies
    Metastatic and secondary tumors
    Pathology of the renal pelvis and ureter
    Pathology of the urethra
    Immunohistochemistry in urothelial lesions.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2016
  • Digital
    René P. Michel, Gerald J. Berry, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Immunobiology and Immunopharmacology of Transplantation
    3. Pathology of Cardiac Transplantation
    4. Pathology of Hepatic Transplantation
    5. Pathology of Pancreatic Transplantation
    6. Pathology of Renal Transplantation
    7. Pathology of Pulmonary Transplantation
    8. Pathology of Intestinal Transplantation
    9. Pathology of Bone Marrow/Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation
    10. Malignancies Post-Transplantation
    11. The Future of Transplantation Pathology.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital/Print
    edited by Chapman H. Binford and Daniel H. Connor ; sponsored and supported by Armed Forces Institute of Pathology ... [et al.].
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Google Books
    Google Books
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RC961 .P37 1976
    2
  • Digital
    Lewis A. Hassell, Michael L. Talbert, Jane Pine Wood, editors.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Money and the Practice of Pathology
    Healthcare Finance and the Pathology Practice
    The Trend Outcomes, Accountable Care and Value-Based Purchasing
    Coding and Billing
    Revenue Cycle Management
    Applying the Knowledge
    Current Major Trends and Considerations for the Future
    Section 2: Financial Management of a Practice
    The Income Statement
    More Complex Arrangements
    Practice Sales and Mergers
    Section 3: Contracting
    Payor Contracts
    Hospital Contracts
    Pathologist Employment Contracts
    Section 4: Human Resources
    Human Resources (HR) Management
    Section 5: Pathology Group Issues
    Group Dynamics
    Section 6: Better Practice Management
    Skills and Tools for Better Practice Management
    Section 7: Managing Ricks and Opportunities
    Professional Liability Risk
    Corporate and General Liability
    Disaster Risks and Preparedness Planning
    Market and Valuation Risks
    Technologic and Regulatory Risks
    Opportunities and Entrepreneurism
    Identifying and Capitalizing on Opportunities
    Section 8: Looking Ahead
    The High Performing Practice into the Future
    Bringing It All Together
    Appendix A: Cases for Discussion
    Appendix B: You and Your Environment: Cases for Group Discussion.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Walter L. Kemp, Travis Brown.
    Contents:
    Cell injury, adaptations, and death
    Inflammation and repair
    Hemodynamics
    Diseases of the immune system
    Neoplasia
    Genetic and pediatric diseases
    Environmental and nutritional disease
    Diseases of the cardiovascular system
    Diseases of the hematopoietic and lymphoid systems
    Diseases of the respiratory system
    Diseases of the kidney and urinary tract
    Diseases of the mouth and gastrointestinal tract
    Diseases of the liver, gallbladder, and biliary tract
    Diseases of the pancreas
    Diseases of the male and female genital tract
    Diseases of the breast
    Diseases of the endocrine system
    Diseases of the musculoskeletal system
    Diseases of the peripheral and central nervous systems
    Diseases of the skin
    Mixed items
    Images.
  • Digital
    Douglas H. Richie, Jr.
    Summary: This new book consolidates the current knowledge of lower extremity biomechanics and pathomechanics and makes this information relevant to the study of common foot and ankle pathologies. The content is presented in a language and format that allows the clinician to review current evidence explaining the etiology of these disorders in order to formulate effective treatment interventions. In order to understand pathomechanics, the clinician must also become versed in the normal, healthy biomechanics of the lower extremity. A review of gait, muscle function and forces acting on the lower extremities during physical activity will be the focus of the first part of this book. The second part of the book will study the common, challenging pathologies treated on a daily basis by foot and ankle clinicians: hallux abducto valgus, hallux rigidus, metatarsalgia, digital deformities, adult acquired flatfoot, and plantar heel pain. These chapters discuss all the relevant factors contributing to these conditions, evaluating and exposing myths and misconceptions about the pathomechanics and treatments of these conditions. For each disorder, a comprehensive review of published research provides a foundation for an updated, valid description of etiology and risk factors. Providing a fresh approach to lower extremity pathomechanics and management strategies, Pathomechanics of Common Foot Disorders is a valuable resource for podiatrists and orthopedic foot and ankle surgeons at all levels. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Pathomechanics
    References
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    1: Comparative Anatomy and Introduction to the Twisted Plate Mechanism
    The Specialization of the Human Foot
    Ontogeny of the Human Foot
    Does Ontogeny Recapitulate Phylogeny of the Human Foot?
    Ankle and Hindfoot Development: Twisting the Plate of Bones
    Ontogeny of the Forefoot
    Rotation of Segments
    The Twisted Plate Provides the Specialized Function of the Human Foot
    Clinical Application of the Twisted Plate Mechanism
    Twisting the Plate and Locking for Optimal Foot Function High-Gear Push Off
    What Initiates High-Gear Push Off?
    Testing the Theory of High-Gear Push Off
    What Is the Ideal Alignment of the Human Foot?
    The Myth of Midfoot "Locking"
    What Stiffens the Human Foot?
    The Springlike Function of the Human Foot
    Summary
    References
    2: Human Walking: The Gait Cycle
    Introduction
    Kinetics
    Key Events in the Walking Gait Cycle
    Phase 1 Initial Contact 0- 2% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.3)
    Phase 2 Loading Response 2-12% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.4)
    Phase 3 Midstance 12- 31% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.5) Phase 4 Terminal Stance 31-50% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.6)
    Phase 5 Pre-swing 50-62% of the Gait Cycle
    Phase 6 Initial Swing 62-75% of the Gait Cycle Events (Fig. 2.8)
    Phase 7 Mid-swing 75-87% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.9)
    Phase 8 Terminal Swing 87-100% of the Gait Cycle (Fig. 2.10)
    Common Compensatory Changes Observed in Gait
    References
    3: Motion of the Foot: Joints, Muscles, and Sensorimotor Control
    Introduction
    General Motion of the Foot Segments
    The Bone Pin Studies
    The Lateral Metatarsals Move More than the Medial The Navicular-Cuneiform Joints Move More than the Midtarsal Joint
    The Midfoot Joints Contribute More Sagittal Plane Motion than the Ankle
    The Medial Column Moves More than the Ankle
    Pure Ankle Joint Motion Can Now Be Measured
    The Ankle Moves in the Transverse and Frontal Planes
    There Is more Frontal Plane Motion in the Ankle than the Subtalar Joint
    The Talonavicular Joint and the Calcaneocuboid Joints Move More than the Subtalar Joint
    Majority of First Ray Motion Is as the Naviculocuneiform Joint
    The Lateral Metatarsals Move More than the Medial Metatarsals The Lateral and Medial Columns Have the Same Sagittal Plane Motion
    How Does the "Normal" Foot Function in Gait?
    Neuromuscular Control
    Do Joint Axes Determine Direction and Range of Motion?
    Muscle Function in the Lower Extremity
    Phasic Activity
    Muscle Strength
    Moment Arm
    Major Muscle Contributors in Six Planes of Motion (Summary of Table 3.2)
    Sagittal Plane
    Frontal Plane
    Transverse Plane
    Muscle Activity/Demand and Foot Type
    The Plantar Intrinsic Muscles
    Storage and Return of Energy
    Twisting the Plate Stores and Releases Energy
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Abdelhamid H. Elgazzar, editor.
    Summary: This book, now in its third edition, aims to promote a deeper understanding of the scientific and clinical basis of nuclear medicine and the new directions in medical imaging, which will lead to better utilization of nuclear medicine techniques in patient management and to further modifications and innovations in the field. The new edition has been revised and updated to reflect recent changes and to ensure that the contents are in line with likely future directions. The book starts by providing essential basic information on general pathophysiology, cell structure, and cell biology as well as the mechanisms of radiopharmaceutical localization in different tissues and cells. The clinical applications of nuclear medicine are then presented in a series of chapters covering every major organ system. These chapters relate the basic relevant knowledge of anatomy, physiology, and pathology to the clinical utilization of various scintigraphic modalities. The therapeutic applications of nuclear medicine, including recent advances, are discussed in a separate chapter. The final chapter is devoted to the biologic effects of ionizing radiations, including radiation from medical procedures. A glossary at the end of the book has been expanded with clear explanations of certain terms and uncommon disease conditions that will help students and trainees in understanding pertinent concepts. It is hoped that this book will continue to help nuclear medicine practitioners, trainees, students, and researchers, as well as professionals in various other medical fields.

    Contents:
    The Cell: Structure, Function, and Molecular Biology
    Pathophysiology and Mechanisms of Radiopharmaceutical Localization
    Inflammation
    Musculoskeletal System
    Thyroid Gland
    Parathyroid Gland
    Adrenal Gland
    Genitourinary system
    Oncology 1: Basic Principles of Tumor Pathology and Biology
    Oncology 2: Tumor Imaging: Scintigraphic and Pathophysiologic Correlation
    Respiratory System
    Cardiology 1: Myocardial Contractility and Assessment of Cardiac Function
    Cardiology 2: Basis of Myocardial Perfusion, Metabolism, Infarction and Receptor imaging
    Digestive system 1: Gastrointestinal Tract
    Digestive system 2: Liver and Biliary Tract
    Central Nervous System
    Nuclear Hematology
    Lymphoscintigraphy
    Basis of Therapeutic Nuclear Medicine
    Biological Effects of Ionizing Radiation.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Abdelhamid H. Elgazzar, editor.
    Summary: This book, now in its fourth edition, aims to promote a deeper understanding of the scientific and clinical basis of nuclear medicine and the new directions in medical imaging. The new edition has been revised and updated significantly to reflect recent changes and to ensure that the contents are in line with likely future directions. In addition to that, chapters have been reorganized in order to simplify the contents and to increase the readability. The book starts by providing essential information on general pathophysiology, cell biology and biologic effects of ionizing radiation followed by the mechanisms of radiopharmaceutical localization in different tissues and cells. This is followed by a series of chapters that covers all relevant organ systems presenting the basic knowledge of anatomy, physiology, and pathology and relating them to the clinical utilization of various scintigraphic modalities. The final chapter is devoted to the basis of therapeutic applications of nuclear medicine. The book will prove invaluable to all with an interest in the pathophysiologic basis of Nuclear Medicine, including nuclear medicine professionals, radiologists, surgeons, pediatricians and internal medicine physicians.

    Contents:
    General Concepts of Pathophysiology
    Cell Biology and Biologic Effects of Ionizing Radiation
    Basis of Radiopharmaceutical Uptake
    Basis of Inflammation Imaging
    Basis of Musculoskeletal Imaging
    Basis of Endocrine System Imaging
    Basis of Genitourinary System Imaging
    Basis of Respiratory System Imaging
    Basis of Cardiovascular System Imaging
    Basis of Digestive System Imaging
    Basis of CNS Imaging
    Basis of Oncologic Imaging
    Basis of Therapeutic Radionuclide Therapy. .
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Lachel Story.
    Summary: "Story, Pathophysiology: A Practical Approach, is a solid undergraduate text for a course of the same name. It is a fourteen-chapter text attractive to the modern student: concise, well-written, focused on the essential, and applicable to practice"-- Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Cellular function
    Immunity
    Hematopoietic function
    Cardiovascular function
    Respiratory function
    Fluid, electrolyte, and acid-base homeostasis
    Urinary function
    Reproductive function
    Gastrointestinal function
    Endocrine function
    Neural function
    Musculoskeletal function
    Integumentary function
    Sensory function.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    volume editors, Jeffrey S. Borer, O. Wayne Isom.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
  • Digital
    Gowraganahalli Jagadeesh, Pitchai Balakumar, Khin Maung-U, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Jon C. Aster, H. Franklin Bunn.
    Summary: "Introduction to the physiological principles underlying the regulation and function of blood cells and hemostasis, as well as the pathophysiologic mechanisms responsible for the development of blood disorders. Featuring a strong emphasis on key principles, the book covers diagnosis and management primarily within a framework of pathogenesis." -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Contributors
    1 Introduction to blood and hematopoietic tissues
    2 Hematopoiesis
    PART I ANEMIA AND RED CELL DISORDERS
    3 Overview of the anemias
    4 Anemias due to bone marrow failure or infiltration
    5 Iron homeostasis: deficiency and overload
    6 Megaloblastic anemias
    7 Anemias associated with chronic illness
    8 Thalassemia
    9 Sickle cell disease
    10 Inherited hemolytic disorders of the red cell membrane and red cell metabolism
    11 Acquired hemolytic anemias
    12 Erythrocytosis
    PART II HEMOSTASIS AND THROMBOSIS
    1 Overview of hemostasis
    14 Platelet disorders
    15 Inherited coagulation disorders
    16 Acquired coagulation disorders
    17 Thrombotic disorders
    PART III WHITE BLOOD CELL DISORDERS
    18 Leukocyte function and nonmalignant leukocyte disorders
    19 Introduction to hematologic malignancies
    20 Myeloproliferative neoplasms and myelodysplastic syndromes
    21 Acute leukemias
    22 Non-Hodgkin lymphomas and chronic lymphocytic leukemias
    23 Hodgkin lymphoma
    23 Multiple myeloma and related disorders
    PART IV TRANSFUSION MEDICINE
    25 Blood transfusion
    26 Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessMedicine
    AccessHemOnc
  • Digital/Print
    McPhee, Stephen J.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessMedicine
    AccessMedicine
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RB113 .P365
    3
  • Digital
    Messoud Ashina, Pierangeo Geppetti, editors.
    Contents:
    1 Anatomy of headache
    2 Animal models of migraine
    3 Animal models of other primary headaches
    4 Genetics of headache
    5 Human models of primary headaches
    6 Imaging of migraine
    7 Imaging of other primary headaches
    8 Neurophysiology of migraine
    9 Neurophysiology of other primary headaches
    10 Biochemistry of primary headaches
    11 Pathophysiology of migraine: current status and future directions
    12 Pathophysiology of TTH: current status and future directions
    13 Pathophysiology of cluster headache: current status and future directions
    14 Pathophysiology of MOH: current status and future directions.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editor, Leonard S. Lilly.
    Contents:
    Normal cardiac structure and function / Jacob E. Lemieux, Elazer R. Edelman, Gary Strichartz, and Leonard S. Lilly
    The cardiac cycle: mechanisms of heart sounds and murmurs / David B. Fischer and Leonard S. Lilly
    Cardiac imaging and catheterization / Diana M. López and Patricia Challender Come
    The electrocardiogram / David B. Fischer and Leonard S. Lilly
    Atherosclerosis / SarrahShahawy and Peter Libby
    Ischemic heart disease / Jayme Wilder, Marc S. Sabatine, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Acute coronary syndromes / Jayme Wilder, Marc S. Sabatine, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Valvular heart disease / Elizabeth Ryznar, Patrick T. O'Gara, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Heart failure / David Miranda, Gregory Lewis and Michael A. Fifer
    The cardiomyopathies / P. Connor Johnson, G. William Dec, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Mechanisms of cardiac arrhythmias / Morgan J. Prust, William G. Stevenson, Gary R. Strichartz, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Clinical aspects of cardiac arrhythmias / Morgan J. Prust, William G. Stevenson, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Hypertension / Joshua Drago, Gordon H. Williams, and Leonard S. Lilly
    Diseases of the pericardium / Leonard S. Lilly
    Diseases of the peripheral vasculature / SruthiRenati and Mark A. Creager
    Congenital heart disease / Zena L. Knight and David W. Brown
    Cardiovascular drugs / Andrey V. Dolinko, Michael T. Kuntz, Elliott M. Antman, Gary R. Strichartz, and Leonard S. Lilly.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library (Medical Education)
  • Digital
    Leonard S. Lilly.
    Summary: Enthusiastically acclaimed by medical students and faculty worldwide, this text is specifically designed to prepare students for their first encounters with patients with cardiovascular disease. Thoroughly revised by internationally recognized Harvard Medical School faculty and a team of select cardiology fellows and internal medicine residents, this seventh edition equips students with a clear, complete, and clinically relevant understanding of cardiovascular pathophysiology, setting a strong foundation for patient diagnosis and management. Review questions and answers in each chapter prepare students for course and board exams. Updated content reflects the latest understanding of mechanisms of cardiac disease and technological advances. Medical imaging and color clinical photographs show real-world examples of many clinically relevant cardiovascular conditions. Introductory chapter outlines and end-of-chapter summaries provide organized, quick review of core information.

    Contents:
    Normal Cardiac Structure and Function
    The Cardiac Cycle: Mechanisms of Heart Sounds and Murmurs
    Cardiac Imaging and Hemodynamic Assessment
    The Electrocardiogram
    Atherosclerosis
    Ischemic Heart Disease
    Acute Coronary Syndromes
    Valvular Heart Disease
    Heart Failure
    The Cardiomyopathies
    Mechanisms of Cardiac Arrhythmias
    Clinical Aspects of Cardiac Arrhythmias
    Hypertension
    Diseases of the Pericardium
    Diseases of the Peripheral Vasculature
    Congenital Heart Disease
    Cardiovascular Drugs
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2021
  • Digital
    Paramjit S. Tappia, Bram Ramjiawan, Naranjan S. Dhalla, editors.
    Summary: According to the World Health Organization, the epidemic of global obesity has nearly tripled since 1975. In 2016, more than 1.9 billion adults were overweight, over 650 million of which were obese. Being overweight and obese has been linked to a number of non-communicable, chronic diseases. Pathophysiology of Obesity-Induced Health Complications is a compilation of review articles dedicated to describe co-morbidities associated with obesity. The wide range that is covered is of significant interest to basic research scientists, clinicians and graduate students who are engaged in studying obesity-induced health complications. Furthermore, this book highlights the potential of novel approaches for the prevention and treatment of obesity and its related illnesses. Nineteen articles in this book are organized in four sections that are designed to provide an overview of obesity-induced health complications. The first section serves as an introductory section on the prevalence, causes, consequences, treatments and preventive approaches for obesity. Section two covers the metabolic disturbances and inflammation due to obesity. The third section is focused on neurological and visceral complications as a consequence of obesity. The final section covers strategies for the prevention of obesity-induced complications. The book illustrates that obesity can result in a diverse range of pathophysiological conditions that adversely affect health.

    Contents:
    Prevalence, consequences, causes and management of obesity
    Adipocytes Under Environmental Assault: Targets for Obesity?
    Obesity and its Complications Pathogenesis
    Extracellular Vesicles and Circulating miRNAs
    Exercise -Induced Mitigation of Obesity and Associated Metabolic Diseases
    Pathophysiology of Obesity Induced Hyperglycemia and Insulin Resistance
    Obesity and Osteoarthritis: Are Adipokines Bridging Metabolism, Inflammation, and Biomechanics
    Understanding the Initiation and Progression of Diet-Induced Obesity and Associated Pathophysiology: Lessons Learned from a Rat Model
    Immune Modulation and Macrophage Polarization in Pathogenesis of Pancreatic Dysfunction in Obesity
    Association Between Obesity and Poor Sleep: A Review of Epidemiological Evidence
    Exploration of the Bidirectionality of Obesity and Depression by means of the Neuropsychological Model of Obesity Genesis
    Obesity-Induced Non-Alcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD): role of hyperhomocystenemia
    Mechanisms of Obesity Related Kidney Disease
    Consequences of Maternal Obesity on Neonatal Outcomes and Cardio-Metabolic Health in Infancy
    The Developmental Mechanisms of Obesity by Maternal Obesity
    Diet Induced Maternal Hypercholesterolemia and In Utero Fetal Programming
    Modified Denouement in Bariatric Surgery due to Genetic Polymorphism
    Anti-Inflammatory Components from Functional Foods for Obesity
    Attenuation of Obesity-Associated Oxidative Stress by Cucurbita maxima Seed Oil in High Fat Diet Induced Obese Rats
    Pathophysiology of Obesity-Related Non-Communicable Chronic Diseases and Advancements in Preventive Strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital/Print
    Mieczyslaw Pokorski, editor.
    Contents:
    Lund-Mackay system for computed tomography evaluation of paranasal sinuses in patients with granulomatosis and poliangitis
    Oxidative stress and nitric oxide in sedentary older adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities
    Foreign body in the airway a female patient with myasthenia gravis
    Relevance of immune-sympathetic nervous system interplay for the development of hypertension
    The influence of insulin therapy on the course of acute exacerbation of bronchial asthma
    Association of allergic rhinitis in female university students with socio-economic factors and markers of estrogens levels
    Psychosocial context of differences between asthma and diabetic patients in adaptation to the disease
    Exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and quality of life of patients
    Effects of glucocorticosteroids on myocardial ultrastructure in experimentally-induced acute myocardial ischemia
    Breathing in Parkinsonism.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    edited by Carly Meyer, Nerina Scarinci, Louise Hickson.
    Contents:
    Principles and outcomes of patient- and family-centered care / Carly Meyer, Nerina Scarinci, Caitlin Barr
    Getting ready to be a patient- and family-centered clinician / Caitlin Barr
    Getting the environment ready for patient- and family-centered care / Nerina Scarinci, Carly Meyer
    Planning a patient- and family-centered approach to service delivery / Carly Meyer, Nerina Scarinci
    Identifying patient and family member needs through assessment / Louise Hickson, Tanya Rose, Nerina Scarinci, Carly Meyer
    Meeting patient and family member needs through collaborative management planning / Louise Hickson
    Consideration of cultural and linguistic diversity in patient- and family-centered care / Nerina Scarinci, Carly Meyer, Leanne Sorbello.
  • Digital
    Pranavi V. Sreeramoju, Stephen G. Weber, Alexis A. Snyder, Lynne M. Kirk, William G. Reed, Beverly A. Hardy-Decuir, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on the interface between the patient and the healthcare system as the entryway to high-quality care and improved outcomes. Unlike other texts, this book puts the patient back in the center of care while integrating the various practices and challenges. Written by interdisciplinary experts, the book begins by evaluating the entire quality landscape before giving voice to all parties involved, including physicians, nurses, administrators, patients, and families. The text then focuses on how to develop a structure that meets needs of all of these groups, effectively addressing common threats to positive outcomes and patient satisfaction. The text tackles the most common challenges clinicians face in a hospital setting, including infection prevention, medication error and stewardship that may jeopardize recovery, complex care, and employee-patient engagement. The Patient and Healthcare System: Perspectives on High-Quality Care is an excellent resource for physicians across broad specialties, nurses, hospital administrators, social workers, patient caregivers and all healthcare professionals concerned with infection prevention, quality and safety of care delivery, and patient satisfaction.

    Contents:
    Voice of the Patient
    Voice of the Physician
    Voice of the Nurse
    The Quality Landscape
    Access to Affordable Health Care Coverage
    Access to Affordable Healthcare: Healthcare Executive Perspective
    Health and Healthcare Disparities: The Next Frontier in Population Health?
    Preventing Mistakes in Health Care
    Timeliness of Care
    Effectiveness of Care
    Improving the Efficiency of Care
    Quality Assurance of Data
    Patient-Centeredness through Shared Decision Making
    Relationship-based Care
    When Technical Solutions are not Enough: Engaging Everyone in Improving Healthcare.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Richard N. Herrier, Pharm. D., FAPhA, CAPT., USPHS (Ret.), Professor, Department of Pharmacy Practice and Science, College of Pharmacy, University of Arizonia, Tuscon, Arizonia, David A. Apgar, Pharm D., PA-C (1976-78), CAPT., USPHS (Ret.), Assistant Professor, Department of Pharmacy Practice and Science, College of Pharmacy, University of Arizona, Tucson, Arizona, Robert W. Boyce, RPh, FASHP, CAPT., USPHS, (Ret.), Director of Pharmacy, Plageman Student Health Center, College of Pharmacy, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oregon, Stephan L. Foster, Pharm. D., FAPhA, FNAP, CAPT., USPHS (Ret.), Professor and Vice Chair, Department of Clinical Pharmacy, College of Pharmacy, University of Tennessee Health Sciences Center, Memphis, Tennessee.
    Summary: This unique text explains how to integrate pathophysiology, medical history, physical findings, and laboratory test results to accurately assess and monitor patient problems.

    Contents:
    Approach to differential diagnosis
    Obtaining a patient history
    Documentation
    Dealing with patients and health care providers
    Dealing with patient adherence issues
    Organizing patient visits
    Symptoms related to the ear, nose and throat
    Cough
    Chestpain
    Heartburn and abdominal pain
    Nausea and vomiting
    Diarrhea and constpation
    Headache
    Inflamed (red) eye
    Musculoskeletal symptoms
    Dysuria and vaginal discharge
    Common skin disorders
    Essential hypertension
    Hyperlipidemia
    Diabetes mellitus
    Asthma/COPD
    Heart failure
    Seizure disorders
    Liver and renal disease
    Anemia, bleeding and infection.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Hans Gombotz, Kai Zacharowski, Donat Rudolf Spahn ; translator, Sarah Venkata.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2016
  • Digital
    Christian von Heymann, Christa Boer, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a multidisciplinary approach to the maintenance of hemostasis and minimisation of blood loss in patients undergoing cardiac surgery. All aspects of patient blood management are covered that may contribute to a reduction in perioperative bleeding and transfusion requirements in cardiac surgery. This is achieved through practical cases and a theoretical background that gives a better understanding of patient hemostasis and the occurrence of bleeding complications. This book is relevant to cardiac surgeons, anesthesiologists, clinical perfusionists, hematologists and intensivists.

    Contents:
    Team Approach
    Identification of patients at high risk for bleeding
    Definition and Risk Factors of Bleeding
    Relevance of Blood Loss and Economic Impact
    Preoperative measures to reduce anemia
    Risk of Anemia
    Therapy of Anemia
    Perioperative drug management to prevent bleeding and thrombosis
    Antiplatelet Drug Management
    Preoperative Management of Anticoagulants
    Bridging
    Monitoring of coagulation and hemostasis
    Platelet Function Monitoring
    Coagulation Monitoring
    Intraoperative measures to reduce bleeding and maintain hemostasis
    Anticoagulant Management
    Fibrinolysis
    Cardiopulmonary Bypass
    Blood Conservation Strategies
    Minimally Invasive Extracorporeal Circulation Systems
    Volume Replacement
    The Jehovah's Witness
    Postoperative treatment of coagulopathy and microvascular bleeding
    Treatment Algorithms for Bleeding
    Treatment with Procoagulants
    Transfusion Thresholds for Packed Red Blood Cells
    Bleeding Management in the Intensive Care Unit
    Venous Thromboembolism Prophylaxis.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Catherine D. DeAngelis.
    Contents:
    Medical professionalism from the patient's perspective: is there an advocate in the house? / Martha E. Gaines, Rachel Grob, Mark J. Schlesinger, and Sarah Davis
    The Hippocratic Oath as an example of professional conduct / Howard Markel
    Professionalism and politics in the United Kingdom / Carol Black, Cyril Chantler
    The role of specialty boards in promoting professionalism: the case of the American Board of Internal Medicine / Clarence H. Braddock III, Eric S. Holmboe, Christine K. Cassel
    Medical professionalism in the twenty-first century / Catherine D. DeAngelis
    Professionalism and nursing: a quest or an accomplishment? / Kathleen M. White
    Public health: the "population" as patient / Lawrence O. Gostin
    Exploring the role of law and legal systems in the therapeutic relationship / James G. Hodge, Jr.
    Professionalism and fiduciary responsibilities in health care leadership / Phil B. Fontanarosa
    Professionalism, medicine, and religion / Patricia M. Fosarelli
    Professionalism: the science of care and the art of medicine / James C. Harris.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    R727.3 .P3634 2014
    1
  • Print
    edited by Alice D. Domar, Denny Sakkas, Thomas L. Toth.
    Summary: "Most chromosomal abnormalities are incompatible with life, but a small minority of them leads to normal development and lifespan (e.g., balanced Robertsonian translocations), while others, although life-compatible, have appreciable effects on the individual's phenotype (e.g., sexual chromosomes imbalances). Because of their compatibility with life, some aneuploidies may be present in the karyotype of individuals in reproductive age and therefore be transmitted to their offspring. The presence of a balanced or unbalanced translocation in the oocyte or spermatozoon that will form the embryo will determine embryo and fetus' karyotype (normal or abnormal) for that chromosome. The ability to evaluate the presence of structural rearrangements in individuals looking to conceive a baby would determine whether they require ART (and screening of the specific condition in embryos generated through IVF) or if they are not at risk for that determined condition. In this case, the use of ARTs will drastically reduce the chance of miscarriage, fetal death, abnormal conception, and birth defects. Age-related chromosomal conditions are not inheritable. They are caused by defects in the chromosomal set of germinal cells due to various reasons. The most common one is the accumulation of errors in the meiotic machinery, which results in a significantly inefficient process of germinal cell maturation during meiosis. This defective process is significantly more common in females than males due to the lengthy oocyte maturation progression[2]. According to standard scientific evidence, the number of female germinal cells is determined at birth and from this point in time they suspend their maturational process at an early stage of the first meiosis (dictyotene), which resumes during ovulation. There is solid evidence that the incidence of aneuploidy in embryos generated by women of advanced maternal age is significantly higher than in younger patients. This suggests that the longer the oocytes remain in this suspended maturational state, the higher the chance that the meiotic machinery accumulates defects and is unable to complete the process without resulting in the formation of chromosomal abnormalities. This defective process impacts the ability of females of advanced maternal age to naturally conceive a healthy baby. Since the occurrence of these chromosomal defects is not hereditary, ECS programs cannot precisely identify the risk of an individual to generate chromosomally abnormal gametes or embryos. The only effective strategies to assess the presence of nonhereditary chromosomal abnormalities in embryos and fetuses remain preimplantation and prenatal genetic testing"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Access to Infertility Care / Kevin Doody and Kaitlin Doody
    The Patient Evaluation of the Future : Genetics, New Diagnostics, and Prediction Modeling / Maurizio Poli, Monica Clemente, Carmen Rubio, Antonio Capalbo, and Carlos Simon
    Advances in ART Pharmacology : Drug Delivery Systems and the Pipeline / Colin M Howles
    ART Monitoring : An End to Frequent Clinic Visits and Needle
    Sticks / Jan Gerris
    The IVF Cycle to Come : Laboratory Innovations / Denny Sakkas and David K Gardner
    Integrative Care / Sarah R Holley and Lauri A Pasch
    Psychological Counseling : Ethical Challenges of the Future / Elizabeth Grill and Lindsay Childress-Beatty
    Using Technology to Enhance Communication in Medically Assisted Reproductive Care / Karin Hammarberg, Lone Schmidt, Gritt Malling, and Emily Koert
    The Economics of IVF : Evaluating the Necessity and Value of Public Funding / Evelyn Verbeke, Jeroen Luyten, and Thomas D'Hooghe
    Medical and Elective Fertility Preservation : Options and Suggestions for a Patient-Centered Approach / Pasquale Patrizio and Marcia Inhorn
    Patient Retention, Nursing Retention : The Importance of Empathic Communication and Nursing Support / Alice D Domar
    Patient-Centered IVF Care / Sofia Gameiro
    The IVF Patient Journey of the Future / Thomas Toth and Angela Leung.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    by Gregory L. Hall.
    Summary: This title is an easy-to-read guide outlining specific differences in communication, clinical therapies, medications, protocols, and other critical approaches to the care of African Americans. The book discusses a wide range of disorders impacting African Americans and takes a comprehensive and evidence-based approach to the clinical support of providers that see African American patients. Recording the worst medical outcomes of any racial/ethnic group in America, African Americans have the highest mortality, longest hospital length of stay, worst compliance with medications and referrals, and the lowest trust of the healthcare system. Indeed, there are countless well-designed studies that validate verified differences in the clinical care of a number of pervasive diseases in African Americans, including hypertension, heart disease, kidney disease, obesity, cancer, and more. Despite the widespread acknowledgement of the existence of health disparities among racial/ethnic groups, the overall outcomes for African Americans are still the most shocking. From high infant mortality to death by almost any cause, African Americans have the worst data of any other racial or ethnic group. Patient-Centered Clinical Care for African Americans, a highly practical and first-of-its-kind title, illuminates these alarming issues and represents a major contribution to the clinical literature. It will be of significant interest to all physicians, clinicians, and allied health personnel.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 Why is Patient-Centered Culturally Competent Care important?
    Chapter 2 Establishing Trust
    Chapter 3 Deliver Consistent and Equitable Care
    Chapter 4 Important Differences in Cardiovascular Care
    Chapter 5 Important Differences in the Care of Obesity and Diabetes
    Chapter 6 Important Differences in Cancer Care
    Chapter 7 Important Differences in Renal Disease
    Chapter 8 Important Differences in Rheumatological Diseases
    Chapter 9 Important Differences in Pulmonary Diseases
    Chapter 10 Other Important Differences in Clinical Care
    Chapter 11 Dietary Differences and Ways to Impact Choices
    Chapter 12 Connect with Stories: Improving Patient Adherence and Compliance
    Chapter 13 Our Hippocratic Oath
    Appendix: Instructors Notes.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Natacha J. Moreno.
    Summary: "A practical resource that provides keys to improved patient-provider communication in healthcare "Engages its readers not only on an intellectual level but also on an emotional one.... This is a must read for everyone in the healthcare field and also for those involved in any form of caregiving. Natacha has written an inspiring book!" George Kohlrieser, PhD, Distinguished Professor of Leadership and Organizational Behavior Patient-Centered Communication: The Seven Keys to Connecting with Patients by Natacha Moreno supports and enhances caring communication and empathetic dialogue between providers and patients, an extremely important topic that exemplifies excellence in medical practice. The book focuses on seven essential components which form the foundation of compassionate communication. These are mindfulness, intention to bond, positive body language, empathetic vocal tone, attending to the patient's state and perspective, and listening with the heart and mind. The chapters provide instruction on effective verbal and nonverbal skills that support each vital key to connection. Key Highlights Opening vignettes provide an example of each chapter's topic in practice Imagine This and Take Action boxes stimulate thinking, motivate action, and provide an opportunity to apply knowledge and communication skills Videos demonstrate how to nonverbally reflect engagement, openness, kindness, and compassion, and also provide positive and negative examples of tone and vocal style This highly compelling and inspirational book is an essential read for all healthcare professionals and caregivers and serves as a vital teaching guide. Natacha J. Moreno, MS, CCC-SLP, is a Speech-Language Pathologist, Private Practice, Moreno SLP, Largo, Florida"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Being mindful of personal state
    Attending to the patient's state
    Considering the patient's perspective
    Addressing the patient with the intention to bond
    Employing positive body language
    Listening with the heart and the mind
    Using vocal tone that reflects empathy.
  • Digital
    David H. Rosen, Uyen B. Hoang.
    Contents:
    Medicine as a human experience
    Clinical application of the biopsychosocial model / George L. Engel
    The care of the patient : art or science / George L. Engel
    The doctor-patient relationship
    The patient-centered interview
    The experience of illness and hospitalization
    The nature of the healing process.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    by Alan Bleakley.
    Summary: The recent history of medicine is one of great biological and technological advances. Diagnoses are being made earlier, diseases caught sooner, patients living longer. And yet there is one area that lags behind the rest of the field: despite the efforts of graduate courses and training manuals, too many doctors still find communication a challenge. In Patient-Centered Medicine in Transition, the focus is not on skills or tools but on context to improve communication not only with patients, but between colleagues, with management, and within and across teams. Rigorous and readable, this timely manifesto presents new models of team process in patient-centered care, emphasizing their value in reducing harmful medical errors and improving patient care, safety, and outcomes. Further, the author provides significant research evidence supporting democratic approaches to communication in medicine while also addressing vital questions of ethics, empathy, gender dynamics, and physician self-care. Included in the coverage: The epidemic of communication hypocompetence. Patient-centeredness without a center. How doctors think can be judged from how they listen and speak. Working and learning in teams in the new era of health care. Blunting Occam's Razor: team process and complexity theory. Building a collaborative community in medical education research. Patient-Centered Medicine in Transition offers a bold new reconceptualization of an important topic and a roadmap to new frontiers in practice to be read and discussed by researchers and practitioners in medical education.

    Contents:
    Communication hypocompetence--an iatrogenic epidemic
    Democracy in medicine
    Patient-centeredness without a center
    How doctors think can be judged from how they listen and speak
    A new wave of patient-centeredness
    Models of patient-centered care
    What is meant by empathy?
    Gender matters in medical education
    Working and learning in teams in a new era of health care.-Theorizing team process through cultural-historical activity theory (CHAT): networking and knotworking
    Theorizing team process through a Foucauldian perspective: gaining a voice in team activity at the clinical coalface
    Theorizing team process through actor-network-theory (ANT): communication practice as a theory in action
    Theorizing team process through Deleuzean rhizomatics: becoming a medical professional in nomadic teams
    Team process and complexity theory: blunting Occams Razor
    Building a collaborative community in medical education research
    Conclusion: professing medical identities in the liquid world of teams.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Alexander Blount ; foreword, Frank deGruy, MD, MSFM.
    Summary: "There have been great strides made in designing the administrative structures of patient-centered care, but it is still difficult to design truly patient-centered clinical routines that the entire healthcare team can enact. The kind of partnership, in which patients are fully part of the team that guides their own care, goes against so much of the training and socialization of health professionals and, for that matter, the expectations of many patients. This is particularly true for patients we sometimes call "complex." In other contexts, we call them "high utilizers," "disadvantaged," "heartsink patients," or "people with trauma histories." Blount calls them "multiply-disadvantaged" patients. To successfully serve these patients requires our best versions of team-based care, including behavioral health and care management team members, though every member of the team needs help in engaging these patients and mutual support in adapting to the rapid changes in roles that new team approaches are creating. This book offers a summary of the approaches that are currently in growing use, such as health literacy assessment, motivational interviewing, appreciative inquiry, shared decision making, minimally disruptive care, trauma informed care, enfranchisement coaching, relationship-centered care, and family-informed care. Finally, it offers a transformative method, based on familiar elements, that is Transparent, Empowering, Activating, and Mutual: the T.E.A.M. Way."--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Foreword / Frank deGruy
    Getting to Patient-Centered Care
    From a Squad to a Team: Creating Team-Based Care
    Behavioral Health and Care Enhancement: Building a Team to Do the Whole Job
    Getting from "Delivering Care to Patients" to "Partnership with Patients"
    When the Doctor-Patient Divide is a Chasm
    Bridging the Chasm: The Current State of the Art
    "T" is for Transparent
    "E" is for Empowering
    "A" is for Activating
    "M" is for Mutual
    Growing and Retaining an Expert Team
    Quality Improvement, Data, and Partnership
    Articulating the Model.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Yuzhuo Wang, Dong Lin, Peter W. Gout, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Print
    Thom J. Mansen, Julieta Gabiola.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC71.3 .M2745 2015
    1
  • Digital
    Karen M. Facey, Helle Ploug Hansen, Ann N.V. Single, editors.
    Summary: "If you're not involving patients, you're not doing HTA!"--Dr. Brian O'Rourke, President and CEO of CADTH, Chair of INAHTA This is the first book to offer a comprehensive guide to involving patients in health technology assessment (HTA). Defining patient involvement as patient participation in the HTA process and research into patient aspects, this book includes detailed explanations of approaches to participation and research, as well as case studies. Patient Involvement in HTA enables researchers, postgraduate students, HTA professionals and experts in the HTA community to study these complementary ways of taking account of patients' knowledge, experiences, needs and preferences. Part I includes chapters discussing the ethical rationale, terminology, patient-based evidence, participation and patient input. Part II sets out methodology including: Qualitative Evidence Synthesis, Discrete Choice Experiments, Analytical Hierarchy Processes, Ethnographic Fieldwork, Deliberative Methods, Social Media Analysis, Patient-Reported Outcome Measures, patients as collaborative research partners and evaluation. Part III contains 15 case studies setting out current activities by HTA bodies on five continents, health technology developers and patient organisations. Each part includes discussion chapters from leading experts in patient involvement. A final chapter reflects on the need to clearly define the goals for patient involvement within the context of the HTA to identify the optimal approach. With cohesive contributions from more than 80 authors from a variety of disciplines around the globe, it is hoped this book will serve as a catalyst for collaboration to further develop patient involvement to improve HTA.

    Contents:
    1. Health Technology Assessment
    2. Exploring Ethical Rationales
    3. Reflections on Terms, Goals and Organisation
    4. Patient-Based Evidence in HTA
    5. Developing the Mosaic of Patient Participation in HTA
    6. Patient Input to HTA
    7. Discussion
    Attending to Values and Quality of Patient Involvement in HTA
    8. Patients as Collaborative Partners in Clinical Research to Inform HTA
    9. Developing Patient-Reported and Relevant Outcome Measures
    10. Discrete Choice Experiments
    11. Analytic Hierarchy Process
    12. Ethnographic Fieldwork
    14. Deliberative Methods to Involve Patients in HTA
    15. Qualitative Evidence Synthesis
    16. Evaluation of Patient Involvement in HTA
    17. Discussion
    Making Sense of Patients' Perspectives, Experiences and Preferences in HTA
    18. Discussion
    Research to promote patient-based HTA
    19. Australia
    20. Brazil
    21. Canada
    22. Denmark
    23. England
    24. EUnetHTA
    Patients' Perspectives in the HTA Core Model®
    25. Germany
    26. Italy
    27. Scotland
    28. Sweden
    29. Taiwan
    30. USA
    Comparative Effectiveness Research
    31. Discussion of Approaches in Different Countries
    32. Discussion
    Patient Participation in HTA; Evidence of Real Change?
    33. Patient Involvement in Medicine Development and Assessment
    34. Medical Technologies: Involving Patients in Development and Assessment
    35. Role of Patient Organisations
    36. Discussion
    Perspective of an HTA Appraisal Committee Chair
    37. Reflections for Future Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Muhammad Saad, Timothy J. Vittorio, Manoj Bhandari.
    Contents:
    10 real cases on acute coronary syndrome : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Nisha Ali, MD, Timothy. J. Vittorio, MD
    10 real cases on arrhythmias : diagnosis of tachyarrhythmia and bradyarrhythmia with management / contributed by Nisha Ali, MD, Manoj Bhandari, MD
    10 real cases on syncope and dizziness : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Nikhitha Mantri, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD, Timothy. J. Vittorio, MD
    10 real cases on valvular heart disease : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Nikhitha Mantri, MD, Ayyadurai Pavanalingam, MD, Marin Nicu, MD
    10 real cases on acute heart failure syndrome : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Swathi Roy, MD, Gayathri Kamalakkannan, MD
    10 real cases on hypertensive emergency and pericardial disease : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Niel Shah, MD, Fareeha S. Alavi, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10 real cases on transient ischemic attack and stroke : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Miranda Jeirym, MD, Fareeha S. Alavi, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10 real cases on peripheral artery disease and carotid artery disease : diagnosis, management and follow up / contributed by Niel Shah, MD, Muhammad Ameen, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10 real cases on electrolyte management and miscellaneous cases on telemetry / contributed by Niel Shah, MD, Nisha Ali, MD, Miranda Jeirym, MD, Muhammad Saad, MD
    10x10 abnormal electrocardiogram, echocardiogram and miscellaneous imaging / contributed by Vincent S. Prawoko, MD, Ayyadurai Pavanalingam, MD, Marin Nicu, MD.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessCardiology
    AccessMedicine
  • Digital
    Peter N. Benotti.
    Summary: "Patient Preparation for Bariatric Surgery provides a comprehensive and state of the art review of all aspects of the patient preparation process, The text reviews current literature and controversies involving sources of referrals and the difficulties encountered by primary care physicians in managing patients with extreme obesity. Strategies for addressing this problem and integrating primary care physicians in comprehensive obesity programs are presented. The text also reviews current indications for surgery and the current patient access limitations that have resulted in the need for revised surgical indications based more on medical need than mere extent of obesity. Written by an authority in the field, Patient Preparation for Bariatric Surgery is a valuable resource for bariatric surgeons, bariatric physicians and all allied health personnel who manage patients with extreme obesity and will assist in the advancement of this area of surgery as well as stimulate new discovery."--Publisher's website.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction
    Chapter 2. Indications and Patient Referrals for Bariatric Surgery
    Chapter 3. Patient Education and Informed Consent
    Chapter 4. Initial Medical Evaluation
    Chapter 5. Psychological and Behavioral Evaluation
    Chapter 6. Comprehensive Medical Evaluation
    Chapter 7. Nutrition I: Protein and Vitamins
    Chapter 8. Nutrition II: Minerals
    Chapter 9. Pregnancy
    Chapter 10. Diagnostic Endoscopy: Perioperative
    Chapter 11. Therapeutic Endoscopy
    Chapter 12. Risk Assessment in Bariatric Surgery
    Chapter 13. Management of the High-Risk Bariatric Surgery Candidate
    Chapter 14. Anesthesia Considerations in Bariatric Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Yasser El Miedany, editor.
    Contents:
    PROMs and Quality of Care
    A Guide to PROMs Methodology and Selection Criteria
    PROMs (MDHAQ/RAPID3) and Physician RheuMetric Measures
    PROMs in Rheumatoid Arthritis
    PROMs in Spondyloarthritis
    PROMs in Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
    PROMs in Fibromyalgia
    PROMs in Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    PROMs in Gouty Arthritis
    PROMs for Osteoarthritis
    PROMs in Systemic Sclerosis (Scleroderma)
    PROMs in Sjögren's Syndrome
    PROMs in Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
    PROMs in Polymyalgia Rheumatica
    Electronic Patient Reported Outcome Measures (ePROMs) in Rheumatology
    PROMs and Patient Education
    PROMs vs. PREMs (Patient Reported Experience Measures)
    PROMs and Musculoskeletal Ultrasonography. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Tim Benson.
    Summary: This book shows how PROMs and PREMs can help improve patient experience and outcomes. Part 1 covers the core principles of PROMs and PREMs, including their strengths and weaknesses, reporting and analysis, data sharing and valuation. Part 2 covers measures of patient experience, health status, wellbeing, self-efficacy, individualized measures, social determinants of health and impact evaluation. It concludes with a discussion of staff-reported measures, proxies and caregivers. Patient-Reported Outcomes and Experience: Measuring What We Want with PROMs and PREMs concisely covers how to use these measures successfully to improve patient experience of healthcare services and associated outcomes. It is a critical resource for trainee and practicing clinicians, managers, analysts and policymakers seeking an up-to-date reference on the latest developments in this rapidly expanding field.

    Contents:
    Why PROMs and PREMs matter?
    History
    Terminology
    Why PROMs are Hard: People
    Noise and complexity
    Analysis
    Interoperability
    Value of health and lives
    Patient-reported measures
    Patient experience
    Health status
    Wellbeing
    Patient-centred Care
    Individualised Measures
    Social factors
    Innovation Evaluation
    Staff-reported measures
    Proxies, caregivers and care home residents.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Thanos Athanasiou, Ara Darzi, Aung Ye Oo, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a guide to the assessment of patient reported outcomes measures and quality of life in cardiovascular interventions, which have become a fundamental component of decision making in bedside medicine, health policy, health economics, and public health. Cardiac surgery, cardiovascular interventions, vascular interventions, and the core principles of quality of life are all covered. This book is the first book to demonstrate how clinicians and policy makers can easily get access to a single source of quality of life and patient reported outcomes measures evidence to help them make the best informed decisions in the field of cardiovascular interventions. This is a rapidly emerging field and the book would be relevant to doctors, healthcare scientists, allied-health professionals, healthcare managers, medical statisticians, healthcare economists, and consultants working in healthcare.

    Contents:
    Unveiling the concept of minimal clinically important difference (MCID) in cardiac surgery
    Quality of life following the use of mechanical circulatory support devices
    What Factors Predict an Improved Quality of Life Outcome Following Coronary Artery Bypass Graft Surgery? A Systematic Review
    Thoracic Aortic Surgery
    Patient Reported Outcomes and Quality of Life following Heart Transplantation
    QOL and PROMS following Transcatheter Aortic Valve Implantation
    Patient-Reported Quality of Life after Stand-alone and Concomitant Arrhythmia Surgery: a systematic review and meta-analysis
    Transcatheter Mitral Valve Procedures
    Percutaneous Interventions in Adult Congenital Heart Disease
    The Impact of Valve Surgery on the Health-Related Quality of Life of Elderly Patients: Systematic Review
    Quality of life after mitral valve and tricuspid valve surgery
    Quality of Life and patient reported outcomes in Paediatric Cardiac Surgery patients
    Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Quality of Life and Patient Reported Outcome Measures Following Carotid Artery Intervention
    Quality of Life and Patient Reported Outcome Measures Following Percutaneous Aortic Intervention for Aortic Aneurysms and Dissection
    QOL and PROMS in Catheter Ablation of Cardiac Arrhythmia
    Patient Reported Outcomes and Quality of Life following Percutaneous and Surgical Intervention for Subclavian Artery Disease
    QoL and PROMS following Percutaneous and Surgical Intervention for Renal Artery Disease
    Health-Related Quality of Life Outcomes for Endovascular and Open Surgical Interventions in Aortoiliac and Femoropopliteal Steno-occlusive Arterial Disease
    Infrapopliteal arteries (classical and percutaneous)
    Quality-of-life (QOL) and Patient-Reported Outcome Measures (PROMs) following intervention for Chronic Venous Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Krisa Tailor.
    Summary: "The future of the health care industry rests on advanced analytics Health Data's Destiny provides a visionary overview of how advanced analytics is set to transform the health care industry. Beginning with the plethora of opportunities already in place, this book addresses the ways in which each stakeholder--payers, providers, governments, consumers, entrepreneurs, employers, and others--can benefit from the next generation of health data. The future of the industry is laid out in terms of technology, data sources, and integrated systems, giving you an expansive, holistic, yet reality-based preview of what's to come. Claims and clinical data are only the beginning; upcoming sources like mobile applications, wearable technology, and more are beginning to provide the kind of patient data that will lead to an integrated, connected health care system in which advanced analytics is key in establishing premier patient care. The health care industry's size, scope, and sheer complexity make developing an integrated system all the more difficult. This book shows how big data and advanced analytics can streamline the process and make the vision a reality. Improve outcomes, reduce cost, and establish the best patient care Learn how data is being used, and how it will continue to evolve Discover how up-and-coming data sources will revolutionize health care Stay on the front lines of innovation with mobile and "wearable" data Data is the future of health care, and smart organizations are putting systems and strategies in place now to continue providing top-of-the-line care as technology evolves and the environment changes. Health Data's Destiny gives you a preview of the future, so you can stay out in front and not get left behind"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Wiley 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Christoph Rehmann-Sutter, Heike Gudat, and Kathrin Ohnsorge.
    Summary: Wish to die statements are becoming a frequent phenomenon in terminally ill patients. Those confronted by these statments need to understand the complexity of such wishes, so they can respond competently and compassionately to the requests. If misunderstood, the statements can be taken at face-value and the practitioner may not recognise that a patient is in fact experiencing ambivalent feelings at the end of life, or they may misinterpret the expressed wish to die as a sign of clinical depression. Public debate about the morality and ethics of various end-of-life care options has exploded in recent years. However, it has never been sensitive to the finer aspects of clinical reality or the experiences of patients. The Patient's Wish to Die: Research, Ethics, and Palliative Care brings together that reality and the patient's voice, combining them with different research approaches. It presents the best available knowledge and research methodologies about patients' wishes at the end-of-life, together with a series of ethical views and a discussion about the clinical implications for palliative care. The book presents material in an open and unbiased manner whilst remaining sensitive to the spiritual and existential dimensions of dying, and to the different cultural views that provide meaning to the individual. Written by the best specialists and ethics scholars from around the world, including palliative care practitioners and end-of-life scholars from countries where assisted dying practices are legalized and from those where it isn't, The The Patient's Wish to Die: Research, Ethics, and Palliative Care will prove essential reading for all those working or studying in the field of palliative care.--Description from back cover.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Research
    Ethics
    Practice
    Conclusion.
    Digital Access Oxford 2015
  • Digital
    Abha Agrawal, editor.
    Summary: Despite the evolution and growing awareness of patient safety, many medical professionals are not a part of this important conversation. Clinicians often believe they are too busy taking care of patients to adopt and implement patient safety initiatives and that acknowledging medical errors is an affront to their skills. Patient Safety provides clinicians with a better understanding of the prevalence, causes and solutions for medical errors; bringing best practice principles to the bedside. Written by experts from a variety of backgrounds, each chapter features an analysis of clinical cases based on the Root Cause Analysis (RCA) methodology, along with case-based discussions on various patient safety topics. The systems and processes outlined in the book are general and broadly applicable to institutions of all sizes and structures. The core ethic of medical professionals is to do no harm. Patient Safety is a comprehensive resource for physicians, nurses and students, as well as healthcare leaders and administrators for identifying, solving and preventing medical error.

    Contents:
    Concepts
    Examples
    Special considerations
    Organizational issues
    Appendix.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Deborah Sesok-Pizzini, editor
    Summary: Patient Safety in Anatomic & Clinical Pathology Laboratories describes patient safety culture in the laboratory and how it fits in with the larger mission and purposes of the health care enterprise. The text addresses common types of errors seen in pathology and the role of cognitive bias in contributing to these errors, reducing errors through communication and technology, and tools and methods to improve patient safety. Also addressed are building high-reliability teams and the role of the patient navigator in addressing patient safety issues through continuity, coordination, and care. The book also describes developing and implementing a patient safety curriculum in order to fulfill ACGME training requirements to meet standards for resident and fellow education for anatomic pathology and laboratory medicine -- Back cover

    Contents:
    Introduction / Tina Ipe, Lee Hilborne
    The Culture of Patient Safety in the Laboratory / Frederick L. Kiechle
    Human Factors and Patient Safety in the Laboratory / Scott R. Owens
    Communication, Handoffs, and Transitions / Virginia Elizabeth Duncan, Suzanne Renee Thibodeaux, Gene P Siegal
    Utilizing Technology to Improve Laboratory Patient Safety / Anand S. Dighe
    Tools and Methods to Improve and Evaluate Patient Safety in the Laboratory / Tina Ipe, Lee Hilborne
    Diagnostic Errors and Cognitive Bias / Stephen S. Raab
    Building High-Reliability Teams in the Laboratory / Nicole D. Riddle
    Developing a Patient Safety Curriculum for Resident and Fellow Education / Deborah Sesok-Pizzini
    Patient Safety and the Patient Navigator / Elizabeth A. Wagar
  • Digital
    Rahul K. Shah, Sandip A. Godambe, editors.
    Summary: This text uses a case-based approach to share knowledge and techniques on how to operationalize much of the theoretical underpinnings of hospital quality and safety. Written and edited by leaders in healthcare, education, and engineering, these 22 chapters provide insights as to where the field of improvement and safety science is with regards to the views and aspirations of healthcare advocates and patients. Each chapter also includes vignettes to further solidify the theoretical underpinnings and drive home learning. End of chapter commentary by the editors highlight important concepts and connections between various chapters in the text. Patient Safety and Quality Improvement in Healthcare: A Case-Based Approach presents a novel approach towards hospital safety and quality with the goal to help healthcare providers reach zero harm within their organizations.

    Contents:
    Introduction: A Case-Based Approach to Quality Improvement
    Organizational Safety Culture: The Foundation for Safety and Quality Improvement
    Creation of Quality Management Systems: Frameworks for Performance Excellence
    Reliability, Resilience, and Developing a Problem-Solving Culture
    Building an Engaging Toyota Production System Culture to Drive Winning Performance for our Patients, Caregivers, Hospitals, and Communities
    What to Do When an Event Happens: Building Trust in Every Step
    Communication with Disclosure and Its Importance in Safety
    Using Data to Drive Change
    Quality Methodology
    Designing Improvement Teams for Success
    Handoffs: Reducing Harm Through High Reliability and Inter-Professional Communication
    Safety II: A Novel Approach to Reducing Harm
    Bundles and Checklists
    Pathways and Guidelines: An Approach to Operationalizing Patient Safety and Quality Improvement
    Accountable Justifications and Peer Comparisons as Behavioral Economic Nudges to Improve Clinical Practice
    Diagnostic Errors and Their Associated Cognitive Biases
    An Improvement Operating System: A Case for a Digital Infrastructure for Continuous Improvement
    Patient Flow in Healthcare: A Key to Quality
    It Takes Teamwork: Consideration of Difficult Hospital-Acquired Conditions
    Human Factors in Healthcare
    Workforce Safety
    Changing the Improvement Paradigm for Our Kids.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Christopher E. Dandoy, Joanne M. Hilden, Amy L. Billett, Brigitta U. Mueller, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    volume editors, Matthias K. Widmer, Jan Malik.
    Contents:
    Patient safety: what is it all about? / Schwappach, D.
    Patients with chronic kidney disease : safety aspects in the preoperative management / Malovrh, M.
    What every doctor should know about drug safety in patients with chronic kidney disease / Paparella, M., Martina, V., Rizzo, M.A., Gallieni, M.
    Patient safety in vascular access patients on hemodialysis : contrast agents and renal function / Vogt, B.
    Contrast agents and ionization with respect to safety for patients and doctors / von Tengg-Kobligkl, H., Karal, L., Klinkl, T., Khanichehl, E., Heverhagenl, J.T., Böhml, I.B.
    Cardiac safety in vascular access surgery and maintenance / Malik, J., Kudlicka, J., Tesar, V., Linhart, A.
    Simulation in vascular access surgery / Widmer, M.K., Widmer, L.W., Schmidli, J., Wyss, T.R., Davidson, I.
    Team training to establish a safety culture in dialysis access surgery / Davidson, I., Slakey, D., Widmer, M.K., Nolen, B., Ross, J.
    How to perform safe anesthesia in patients with end-stage renal disease / Seidl C., Eberle B.
    Careful and safe vascular access creation / Wyss, T.R., Widmer, M.K.
    Improving patient safety in vascular access : a role for individualization and patient preferences / Roy-Chaudhury, P., Verma, A.
    How to prolong the patency of vascular access / Glazer S., Saint, L., Shenoy, S.
    Safety issues in surgical and endovascular techniques to rescue failing or failed arteriovenous fistulas and arteriovenous grafts / Lazarides, M., Georgiadis, G., Argyriou, C.
    Vascular access-induced hand ischemia : risks and safe management / Sessa, C., De Lambert, A., Pirvu, A., Palacin, P., Pichot, O.
    Patient safety in peritoneal dialysis / Slakey, D.P., Davidson I.
    Safety aspects in patients on hemodialysis with catheters / Polakovi, V., Lopot, F.
    Nosocomial infections in dialysis access / Schweiger, A., Marschall, J., Trevino, S.
    How to improve vascular access care? / van Loon, M.
    The patient's role in patient safety and the importance of a dedicated vascular access team / Shemesh, D., Olsha, O., Goldin, I., Danin, S.
    Patient safety in dialysis access : education and research / Tordoir, Jan H.M., Widmer M.K.
    Digital Access Karger 2015
  • Digital
    Philip F. Stahel, Cyril Mauffrey, editors.
    Contents:
    Part 1. General Aspects
    1: Quality Assessment in Surgery: Mission Impossible?
    2. Incidence of 'Never Events' and Common Complications
    3. Cognitive Errors
    4. Diagnostic Errors
    5. Technical Errors
    6. The Missed Injury: A 'Preoperative Complication'
    7. Non-Technical Aspects of Safe Surgical Performance
    8. Postoperative Monitoring for Clinical Deterioration
    9. Effective Communication- Tips and Tricks
    10. Professionalism in Health Care
    11. Accountability in the Medical Profession
    12. The Role of the Surgical Second Opinion
    13. Compliance to Patient Safety Culture
    14. The Universal Protocol: Pitfalls and Pearls
    15. Patient Safety in Graduate and Continuing Medical Education
    16. Translation of Aviation Safety Principals to Patient Safety in Surgery
    17. Handovers: The 'Hidden Threat' to Patient Safety
    18. Public Safety-Net Hospitals- The Denver Health Model
    19. Electronic Health Records and Patient Safety
    20. Research and Patient Safety
    Part 2. The Surgeon's Perspective
    21. The Surgery Morbidity and Mortality Conference
    22. Reporting of Complications
    23. Disclosure of Complications
    24. Surgical Quality Improvement
    25. Surgical Safety Checklists
    Part 3. Other Perspectives
    26. The Anesthesia Perspective
    27. The Nursing Perspective
    28. The Patient's and Patient Family's Perspective
    29. The Ethical Perspective
    30. Patient Safety- A Perspective from the Developing World
    Part 4. Case Scenarios
    31. Improving Operating Room Safety: A Success Story
    32. Management of Unanticipated Outcomes: A Case Scenario
    33. The Preventable Death of Michael Skolnik: An Imperative for Shared Decision-Making
    Epilogue
    Appendices.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Andras Nagy, Kursad Turksen.
    Contents:
    Generation of patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell from peripheral blood mononuclear cells by Sendai reprogramming vectors / Oscar Quintana-Bustamante and Jose C. Segovia
    Doxycycline-inducible system for genetic correction of iPSC disease models / Xiuli Sim ... [et al.]
    Generation and characterization of patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell for disease modeling / Renuka Sivapatham and Xianmin Zeng
    Modeling genomic imprinting disorders using induced pluripotent stem cells / Stormy J. Chamberlain ... [et al.]
    Generation and characterization of induced pluripotent stem cells from patients with mtDNA mutations / Riikka H. Hssamssalssainen and Anu Suomalainen
    Skin biopsy and patient-specific stem cell lines / Yao Li, Huy V. Nguyen, and Stephen H. Tsang
    Directed myogenic differentiation of human induced pluripotent stem cells / Emi Shoji, Knut Woltjen, and Hidetoshi Sakurai
    Using human induced pluripotent stem cells to model skeletal diseases / Emilie Barruet and Edward C. Hsiao
    Modeling cardiovascular diseases with patient-specific human pluripotent stem cell-derived cardiomyocytes / Paul W. Burridge ... [et al.]
    Calcium imaging in pluripotent stem cell-derived cardiac myocytes / Anna Walter ... [et al.]
    Patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell models : generation and characterization of cardiac cells / Fabian Zanella and Farah Sheikh
    Differentiation of human pluripotent stem cells to cardiomyocytes under defined conditions / Cathelijne W. van den Berg ... [et al.]
    Generation of cardiomyocytes from pluripotent stem cells / Hiroko Nakahama and Elisa Di Pasquale
    Generation and characterization of patient-specific iPSC model for cardiovascular disease / Yee Ki Lee ... [et al.]
    Transgene-free disease-specific iPSC generation from fibroblasts and peripheral blood mononuclear cells / Kerem Fidan ... [et al.]
    Generation and neuronal Differentiation of patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cells derived from Niemann-Pick type C1 fibroblasts / Michaela Trilck, Rayk Hubner, and Moritz J. Frech
    Multisystemic disease modeling of liver-derived protein folding disorders using induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) / Amy Leung and George J. Murphy
    In vitro modeling of alcohol-induced liver injury using human-induced pluripotent stem cells / Lipeng Tian, Neha Prasad, and Yoon-Young Jang
    Generation of human induced pluripotent stem cells using RNA-based sendai virus system and pluripotency validation of the resulting cell population / Valeria Chichagova ... [et al.]
    Modeling axonal phenotypes with human pluripotent stem cells / Kyle R. Denton, Chong-Chong Xu, and Xue-Jun Li
    Mitochondrial disease-specific induced pluripotent stem cell models : generation and characterization / Xuan Zhang ... [et al.]
    Patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell models : characterization of iPS cell-derived cardiomyocytes / Toru Egashira ... [et al.]
    Generation of integration-free patient specific iPS cells using episomal plasmids under feeder free conditions / Sara Caxaria ... [et al.].
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Air & Surface Transport Nurses Association ; edited by Reneé Semonin Hollera, Allen C. Wolfe, Jr., Michael A. Frakes.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2018
  • Digital
    Almut Böer-Auer, Harald Kittler, Philipp Tschandl.
    Summary: Pattern analysis is a powerful method that changed dermatopathology, nowadays an indispensable tool in the diagnostic workup of inflammatory and neoplastic lesions. The diagnosis of melanocytic lesions can also be mastered by pattern analysis, which is the link between pathology, dermatoscopy, and clinical dermatology and supports the integration of all views. The histopathologic diagnosis of melanocytic lesions can be challenging for novices and experts alike. While classifications of melanocytic lesions come and go, pattern analysis is timeless; it can be assigned to any classification, current or future, and provides a framework that allows to address complex and uncertain cases in a repeatable manner. While uncertainty cannot be totally eliminated, pattern analysis helps to express this uncertainty in a meaningful way. Written by expert dermatopathologists with experience in dermatoscopy, this book is dedicated to young colleagues and to those who have not yet settled on one of the competing schools of thought; it is intended as a practical guide to help making correct observations, to describe them with a well-defined terminology, and to yield critical decisions in the face of incomplete or conflicting information. The illustrations contained in the volume are all original pictures in high-quality and full-color: reproductions of histopatological cuts in low and high magnification will assist pathologists, dermatologists, and dermatopathologists in interpreting histological slides of melanocytic skin lesions.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Historical perspective
    Classifications
    Pattern analysis
    Integration of patterns
    Integration of context
    Pattern analysis in practice
    Bias, Noise, and Error.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Dewen Hu, Ling-Li Zeng.
    Summary: This book presents recent advances in pattern analysis of the human connectome. The human connectome, measured by magnetic resonance imaging at the macroscale, provides a comprehensive description of how brain regions are connected. Based on machine learning methods, multiviarate pattern analysis can directly decode psychological or cognitive states from brain connectivity patterns. Although there are a number of works with chapters on conventional human connectome encoding (brain-mapping), there are few resources on human connectome decoding (brain-reading). Focusing mainly on advances made over the past decade in the field of manifold learning, sparse coding, multi-task learning, and deep learning of the human connectome and applications, this book helps students and researchers gain an overall picture of pattern analysis of the human connectome. It also offers valuable insights for clinicians involved in the clinical diagnosis and treatment evaluation of neuropsychiatric disorders.

    Contents:
    Intro; Contents; 1 Introduction; 1 Multimodal Brain Imaging; 2 sMRI-Based Structural Connectivity; 3 DTI-Based Anatomical Connectivity; 4 fMRI-Based Functional Connectivity; 5 Dynamic Functional Connectivity; 6 Multivariate Pattern Analysis; 7 Feature Extraction; 8 Dimensionality Reduction; 9 Classifier Design and Performance Evaluation; 10 The Content of the Book; References; 2 Multivariate Pattern Analysis of Whole-Brain Functional Connectivity in Major Depression; 1 Introduction; 2 Subjects; 3 Image Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 Identification of Features with High Discriminative Power 2 Participants3 Image Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 ALFF-FC Map of Dynamic Functional Connectivity; 5 Partial Least-Squares Analysis and Age Prediction; 6 Age-Dependent Changes in the Variability of the Dynamic FC During Maturation; 7 Control Analysis; 8 Reproducibility; 9 Discussion; Functional Connectivity Fluctuations Decode Individual Brain Maturity; Specific Brain Networks Exhibit Changed Connectivity Fluctuation with Age; Inter-network Rather Than Within-Network Connectivity Dynamics Shows Strong DevelopmentalTrends; Control Analysis, Limitations, and Directions for Future Research 5 DiscussionReferences; 7 Locality Preserving Projection of Functional Connectivity for Regression; 1 Introduction; 2 Data Acquisition and Preprocessing; 3 Parametric Curve Fitting and Age-Related Changes in Interregional Functional Connectivity; 4 Low-Dimensional Embeddings; 5 Locally Adjusted Support Vector Regression (LASVR) for Age Prediction; 6 Discussion; References; 8 Intrinsic Discriminant Analysis of Functional Connectivity for Multiclass Classification; 1 Introduction; 2 Participants; 3 Data Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 IDA Algorithm and Intrinsicconnectomes 5 Support Vector Classification and Performance Evaluation6 Altered Resting-State Functional Connectivityin Major Depression; 7 Discussion; References; 3 Discriminative Analysis of Nonlinear Functional Connectivity in Schizophrenia; 1 Introduction; 2 Participants; 3 Imaging Acquisition and Preprocessing; 4 MIC and eMIC; 5 High Discriminative Connectivity Features; 6 Support Vector Classification and Performance Evaluation; 7 Functional Connectivity Changes; 8 Discussion; References; 4 Predicting Individual Brain Maturity Using Window-Based Dynamic Functional Connectivity; 1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Leslie C. Grammer with Paul A. Greenberger.
    Digital Access Ovid 2018
  • Print
    George D. Clayton and Florence E. Clayton, editors ; contributors, M. C. Battigelli ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    v. 1. General principles
    v. 2A, Toxicology ; v. 3. Theory and rationale of industrial hygiene practice.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC967 .P37
    3
  • Print
    George D. Clayton, Florence E. Clayton, editors ; contributors, R.E. Allan ... [et al.].
    Contents:
    v. 1, pt. A-B. General principles
    v. 2, pt. A-F. Toxicology.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC967 .P37
    8
  • Digital
    [edited by] Martin F. Flajnik, Nevil J. Singh, Steven M. Holland.
    Summary: "Selected as a Doody's Core Title for 2022!Defining the field of immunology for 40 years, Paul's Fundamental Immunology continues to provide detailed, authoritative, up-to-date information that uniquely bridges the gap between basic immunology and the disease process. The fully revised 8th edition maintains the excellence established by Dr. William E. Paul, who passed away in 2015, and is now under new editorial leadership of Drs. Martin F. Flajnik, Nevil J. Singh, and Steven M. Holland. It's an ideal reference and gold standard text for graduate students, post-doctoral fellows, basic and clinical immunologists, microbiologists and infectious disease physicians, and any physician treating diseases in which immunologic mechanisms play a role. Reflects the latest advances in the field, including current insights on immune system function, both basic and translational. Contains 50 chapters written by leaders in all subfields of immunology. Provides extensive coverage of the molecular biology that explains the dynamics underlying immune disorders and their treatment. Includes 10 entirely new chapters covering invertebrate and plant immunity, eosinophils, innate lymphoid cells, gamma/delta T cells, NKT and MAIT cells, immunometabolism, maternal-fetal immunology and more. Contains abundant full-color illustrations and tables that provide essential information at a glance. Features annual updates from the authors to the VST version, keeping you current with changes in this dynamic field from the experts. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. "-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2023
  • Print
    Contents:
    Introduction: Certification Examination and Tips for Preparation
    Part I: Practice Questions and Answers With Rationales
    Chapter 1: Cardiovascular Questions
    Chapter 2: Pulmonary Questions
    Chapter 3: Endocrine, Hematologic, Neurologic, Gastrointestinal, and Renal Questions
    Chapter 4: Musculoskeletal, Multisystem, and Psychosocial Questions
    Chapter 5: Professional Caring and Ethical Practice Questions
    Part II: Practice Test and Answers With Rationales
    Chapter 6: Practice Test
    Chapter 7: Answers With Rationales.
    Digital Access R2Library [2022]
  • Digital
    Ann J. Brorsen, RN, MSN, PHIN, CCRN, CEN, Keri R. Rogelet, RN, MSN, MBA/HCM, CCRN, RNC-NIC.
    Summary: "PCCN Certification Review, Third Edition is the ideal study guide for nurses preparing to take the Progressive Care Certified Nurse (PCCN) exam administered by the American Association of Critical-Care Nurses (AACN). It includes more than 1,100 questions and comprehensive answers with rationales. The Third Edition has been updated and revised in all sections to reflect changes in the new PCCN test plan, including gerontological issues, cardiac surgery, pacemakers, infectious diseases, and palliative care"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    History
    Exam
    Test-taking strategies
    Cardiovascular
    Pulmonary
    Endocrine
    Hematology/immunology
    Neurology
    Gastrointestinal
    Renal
    Multisystem
    Behavioral.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    editors, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm.
    Summary: This popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering neonatal care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes. This book features 11 units covering information and skills assessment and initial management of frequently encountered neonatal illnesses, plus a brand-new unit on how to care for babies with neonatal abstinence syndrome (neonatal opioid withdrawal syndrome).

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Oxygen
    Unit 2: Respiratory Distress
    Unit 3: Umbilical Catheters
    Unit 4: Low Blood Pressure (Hypotension)
    Unit 5: Intravenous Therapy
    Unit 6: Feeding
    Unit 7: Hyperbilirubinemia
    Unit 8: Infections
    Unit 9: Identifying and Caring for Sick and At-Risk Babies
    Unit 10: Preparation for Neonatal Transport
    Unit 11: Neonatal Abstinence Syndrome (Neonatal Opioid Withdrawal Syndrome)
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm
    Summary: The fourth edition of this popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering maternal and fetal evaluation and immediate newborn care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Is the Mother Sick? Is the Fetus Sick?
    Skill Unit: Determining Fetal Presentation With Leopold Maneuvers
    Unit 2: Fetal Age, Growth, and Maturity
    Unit 3: Fetal Well-being
    Skill Unit: Electronic Fetal Monitoring
    Unit 4: Is the Baby Sick? Recognizing and Preventing Problems in the Newborn
    Skill Unit: Electronic Cardiorespiratory Monitoring
    Skill Unit: Pulse Oximetry
    Unit 5: Resuscitating the Newborn
    Skill Unit: Suctioning
    Skill Unit: Management of Oxygen in the Delivery Setting
    Skill Unit: Free-Flow Oxygen and Positive-Pressure Ventilation
    Skill Unit: Endotracheal Intubation
    Skill Unit: Chest Compressions
    Skill Unit: Emergency Medications
    Skill Unit: Apgar Score
    Unit 6: Gestational Age and Size and Associated Risk Factors
    Skill Unit: Estimating Gestational Age by Examination of a Newborn
    Unit 7: Thermal Environment
    Skill Unit: Radiant Warmers
    Skill Unit: Incubators and Neutral Thermal Environment
    Unit 8: Hypoglycemia
    Skill Unit: Blood Glucose Screenings
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm
    Summary: The fourth edition of this popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering maternal and fetal care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes. This book features 12 units containing information and skills essential for the recognition and initial management of high-risk and sick pregnant women and their fetuses. In this updated fourth edition, new units have been added on psychosocial risk factors in pregnancy and obstetric risk.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Hypertension in Pregnancy
    Unit 2: Obstetric Hemorrhage
    Unit 3: Infectious Diseases in Pregnancy
    Unit 4: Other Medical Risk Factors in Pregnancy
    Unit 5: Obstetric Risk Factors: Prior or Current Pregnancy
    Unit 6: Psychosocial Risk Factors in Pregnancy
    Unit 7: Gestational Diabetes
    Unit 8: Prelabor Rupture of Membranes and Intra-amniotic Infection
    Skill Unit: Sterile Speculum Examination
    Skill Unit: Tests for Suspected or Proven Rupture of Membranes
    Unit 9: Preterm Labor
    Unit 10: Inducing and Augmenting Labor
    Unit 11: Abnormal Labor Progress and Difficult Deliveries
    Unit 12: Imminent Delivery and Preparation for Maternal/Fetal Transport
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Robert A. Sinkin, Christian A. Chisholm
    Summary: This fourth edition of this popular resource features step-by-step skill instruction and practice-focused exercises covering maternal and fetal evaluation and immediate newborn care. Developed by a distinguished editorial board, the Perinatal Continuing Education Program (PCEP) is a comprehensive, self-paced education program in 4 volumes. This book features 8 units on complex neonatal therapies, including 2 new units on neonatal encephalopathy and the ethical issues surrounding perinatology, especially when caring for fetuses of periviable gestational ages.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Unit 1: Direct Blood Pressure Measurement
    Unit 2: Exchange, Reduction, and Direct Transfusions
    Unit 3: Continuous Positive Airway Pressure
    Unit 4: Assisted Ventilation With Mechanical Ventilators
    Unit 5: Surfactant Therapy
    Unit 6: Therapeutic Hypothermia for Neonatal Hypoxic-Ischemic Encephalopathy
    Unit 7: Continuing Care for At-Risk Babies
    Unit 8: Biomedical Ethics and Perinatology
    Pretest Answer Key
    Glossary
    Index.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Print
    [editors-in-chief Andrew Wilcock, Paul Howard, Sarah Charlesworth].
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM301.12 .P35 2020
    1
  • Print
    [edited by] Andrew Wilcock, Paul Howard and Sarah Charlesworth.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM301.12 .P46 2022
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Chhandak Basu.
    Summary: "This volume provides an overview on design PCR primers for successful DNA amplification. Chapters focus on primer design strategies for quantitative PCR, in silico PCR primer design , and primer design using software. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls." -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Fast masking of repeated primer binding sites in eukaryotic genomes / Reidar Andreson, Lauris Kaplinksi, and Maido Remm
    Primer design for PCR reactions in forensic biology / Kelly M. Elkins
    Design of primers and probes for quantitative real-time PCR methods / Alicia Rodríguez, Mar Rodríguez, Juan J. Córdoba, and María J. Andrade
    Large-scale neucleotide sequence alignment and sequence variability assessment to identify the evolutionarily highly conserved regions for universal screening PCR assay design: an example of influenza A virus / Alexander Nagy, Tomáš Jiřinec, Lenka Černíková, Helena Jiřincová, and Martina Havlíčková
    Low-concentration initiator primers improve the amplification of gene targets with high sequence variability / Kenneth E. Pierce and Lawrence J. Wangh
    Multiplex PCR primer design for simultaneousu detection of multiple pathogens / Wenchao Yan
    Degenerate primer design for highly variable genomes / Kelvin Li, Susmita Shrivastava, and Timothy B. Stockwell
    Allele-specific real-time polymerase chain reaction as a tool for urate transporter 1 mutation detection / Juliet O. Makanga, Antonius Christianto, and Tetsuya Inazu
    MultiPLX: automatic grouping and evaluation of PCR primers / Lauris Kaplinski and Maido Remm
    In silico PCR primer designing and validation / Anil Kumar and Nikita Chrodia
    Primer design using Primer Express® for SYBR green-based quantitative PCR / Amarjeet Singh and Girdhar K. Pandey
    Designing primers for SNaPshot technique / Greciane Gaburro Paneto and Francisco de Paula Careta
    Rapid and simple method of qPCR primer design / Brenda Thornton and Chhandak Basu
    PRIMEGENSw3: a web-based tool for high-throughput primer and probe design / Garima Kushwaha, Gyan Prakash Srivastava, and Dong Xu
    Selecting specific PCR primers with MFEprimer / Wubin Qu and Chenggang Zhang.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Reynaldo R. Rivera, Joyce J. Fitzpatrick.
    Summary: "Nurses are in charge of the patients and their families throughout the hospital and health system experience. They assist patients through illness to achieve higher levels of health. They coordinate the care throughout the patients' experiences with the healthcare system. Nurses are the leaders of patient care at the bedside and beyond. It is important that as clinical leaders, nurses have the most accurate, most up-to-date, and evidence-based information available so that they can always do the right thing. The PEACE model develops clinical nurses as leaders in care of both patients and their families. Clinical nurses, those at the point of care, have embraced this model for guiding their practice. The PEACE model helps clinical nurses solve challenging problems through a rigorous evidence-based practice process-from problem identification to evaluation and dissemination. The crux of the PEACE model is the mnemonic that simplifies the evidence-based practice (EBP) process for clinical nurses. The PEACE model is used across New York-Presbyterian (NYP), one of the nation's most comprehensive academic healthcare delivery systems. NYP is composed of 10 hospitals in New York and employs more than 11,000 nurses across the enterprise. One striking advantage of the model is that it emerged from the work of clinical nurses who were struggling to find a way to remember and apply the components of other EBP models. The mnemonic PEACE promotes understanding and application by clinical nurses, providing a way to easily remember the EBP component stages. The uniqueness of the PEACE model is its simplicity. This relevance leads to continued application in day-to-day nursing practice. As we strive for peace at many levels of our lives and work, the mnemonic is easy to remember. The PEACE model may be adapted to any setting where nurses practice"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1: Evidence-Based Practice, Research, and Quality Improvement
    Chapter 2: Problem Identification
    Chapter 3: Evidence Review
    Chapter 4: Appraise the Evidence
    Chapter 5: Change Practice
    Chapter 6: Conduct Research
    Chapter 7: Evaluation
    Chapter 8: Disseminate Findings
    Chapter 9: Resources
    Chapter 10: Practice Exemplars
    Index.
    Digital Access R2Library 2021
  • Digital
    editor, Schuyler S. Korban.
    Summary: Addressing the pear genome, this book covers the current state of knowledge regarding genetic and genomic resources, breeding approaches and strategies, as well as cutting-edge content on how these tools and resources are being / soon will be utilized to pursue genetic improvement efforts that will combine fruit quality, high productivity, precocious fruit bearing, and long postharvest storage life, along with elevated levels of resistance to various major diseases and insect pests. Throughout, the book also explores potential opportunities and challenges in genomic analysis, sequence assembly, structural features, as well as functional studies that will assist in future genetic improvement efforts for pears. The pear (Pyrus), an important tree fruit crop, is grown worldwide, and has several economically relevant cultivars. In recent years, modern genetic and genomic tools have resulted in the development of a wide variety of valuable resources for the pear. In the past few years, completion of whole genome assemblies of 'Dangshansuli', an Asian pear, and 'Bartlett', a European pear, have paved the way for new discoveries regarding for example, the pear's genomic structure, chromosome evolution, and patterns of genetic variation. This wealth of new resources will have a major impact on our knowledge of the pear genome; in turn, these resources and knowledge will have significant impacts on future genetic improvement efforts.

    Contents:
    Botany and taxonomy of pear
    Pear germplasm resources: origin, characterization, and conservation
    Genetics and breeding of pears
    Using genetic data for taxonomic, diversity, and domestication assessments in pear
    Genetic linkage maps in pear
    Molecular mapping of major genes and QTLs in pear
    Whole genome sequencing strategy, and genome assembly of Asian pear
    Whole genome sequencing strategy, and genome assembly of European pear
    Repetitive sequences in pear
    Regulatory sequences in pear.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Morris E. Hartstein, Guy G. Massry, John B. Holds, editors.
    Summary: Pearls and Pitfalls in Cosmetic Oculoplastic Surgery, Second Edition addresses the need among surgeons for cleanly distilled and clinically relevant information. The second edition of this popular text highlights the changes and updates to the ever expanding field of facial cosmetic surgery. There are updates regarding the advances, for example in blepharoplasty techniques, fillers and filler techniques, periorbital fat grafting, brow lifting techniques, and midface rejuvenation. Additionally, nearly every chapter has full color illustrations to bring each one to life. This concise and practical "how to" book is written and edited by experts in their fields and offers "here?s how I do it" advice on the most commonly performed procedures. Each chapter becomes the voice of an expert and experienced colleague, reminding readers of the pearls and pitfalls of each procedure. These pearls will lead to more efficient techniques, fewer complications, and enhance outcomes for physicians and their patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Alessandro Franchi, University of Florence, Italy.
    Summary: Avoid unnecessary diagnostic markers, and pathology pitfalls with this practical approach to head and neck surgical pathology. Written by experts in the field, this book features practical algorithms and ninety illustrative cases, guiding the reader through neoplastic and non-neoplastic head and neck pathology, with ease. With additional access to the full online version, including expandable images on Cambridge Core, achieve accuracy every time. Master practical challenges of efficiently diagnosing diseases in lesions of the nasopharynx, sinonasal tract, salivary glands, oral cavity lesions and soft tissues of the neck. Confidently provide all aspects of care, in tackling new entities in the field, through to reviewing appropriate ancillary studies. Discover a clinical history, histopathology, differential diagnosis and teaching points with each case, alongside working with state-of-the-art immunohistochemistry and molecular technologies. Equipping the reader to make successful diagnoses, maximise surgery time, and avoid common errors, this invaluable guide supports busy practitioners worldwide.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Ophelia E. Dadzie and Meera Mahalingam.
    Summary: This practical book takes the challenge of the dermatopathology sign-out and walks the reader through a diagnostic approach, explaining how to distinguish between benign and malignant lesions and identifying histopathologic features unique to each entity. Through discussion of some 150-200 lineage-unrelated cutaneous neoplastic disorders (primary and secondary), the reader will become familiar with common and sometimes uncommon but clinically relevant conditions. Each chapter adopts a consistent style for quick and easy reading, covering typical microscopic features, clinical vignettes, histological variations, diagnostic pitfalls and differentials, and key diagnostic pearls. Chapters also explain general pathological principles, laboratory processing of specimens and medico-legal aspects of neoplastic dermatopathology. Each copy of the book is packaged with a password, providing online access to all text and images. Written by leading pathologists and educators, this is an essential resource for trainees and more experienced pathologists tackling the daily sign-out as well as board exams in dermatopathology.

    Contents:
    Keratinocytic tumors / Ophelia E. Dadzie
    Melanocytic tumors / Meera Mahalingam
    Adnexal tumors / Dorendra Maisnam and Ophelia E. Dadzie
    Hematolymphoid tumors / Brett Mahon and Vijaya B. Reddy
    Fibrous and myofibroblastic tumors and reactive lesions / Diana Murro and Vijaya B. Reddy
    Neural tumors / Meera Mahalingam
    Smooth and striated muscle tumors / Mark Jabbour and Ossama Abbas
    Vascular and perivascular tumors, and tumor-like conditions / Ophelia E. Dadzie
    Adipocytic tumors / Mark Jabbour and Ossama Abbas
    Bone and cartilage / Mark Jabbour and Ossama Abbas
    Uncommon lineage-unrelated tumors / Meera Mahalingam
    Cutaneous metastases / Meera Mahalingam
    Medicolegal pitfalls in dermatopathology : perspectives from the USA and the UK / Ophelia E. Dadzie and Meera Mahalingam.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2016
  • Digital
    Martin Lacher, Shawn D. St. Peter, Augusto Zani, editors.
    Summary: Providing core information on pediatric surgery, this book serves as a supplement to standard pediatric surgical textbooks. It offers pearls of wisdom that will help those who participate in pediatric surgical care, as well as to provide state-of-the-art insights based on physiological principles, literature reviews, and clinical experience. This book is an ideal tool to help readers prepare for questions they will be asked on ward rounds, in the OR, or in oral exams. The depth of exploration is intended for medical students, residents in pediatrics and pediatric surgery, pediatric surgical trainees, pediatric nurse practitioners, primary care pediatricians, and family practitioners.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword by Benno Ure
    Foreword by George W. Holcomb
    Foreword by Agostino Pierro
    Preface
    Contents
    Chapter 1 Evaluation of the Pediatric Surgical Patient
    Abstract
    1.1 Introduction
    References
    Chapter 2 Nutrition, Fluids and Electrolytes for the Pediatric Surgical Patient
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 3 Chest Wall Deformities
    Abstract
    Bibliography
    Chapter 4 Congenital Diaphragmatic Hernia
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 5 Esophageal Atresia With or Without Tracheoesophageal Fistula
    Abstract
    References Chapter 6 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 7 Caustic Ingestion of the Esophagus
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 8 Esophageal Foreign Bodies
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 9 Congenital Lung Malformations
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 10 Acquired Lung and Pleural Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 11 Tracheobronchial Foreign Bodies
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 12 Pediatric Surgical Diseases of the Larynx, Trachea, and Bronchi
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 13 Mediastinal Masses
    Abstract
    References Chapter 14 Congenital Cardiac Anomalies
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 15 Hemangiomas and Vascular Malformations
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 16 Umbilical Problems
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 17 Hernias-Epigastric, Inguinal and Incisional
    Abstract
    17.1 Inguinal Hernia
    17.2 Epigastric Hernia
    17.3 Incisional Hernia
    References
    Chapter 18 Abdominal Wall Defects, Gastroschisis and Omphalocele
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 19 Exstrophy-Epispadias Complex
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 20 Prune Belly Syndrome
    Abstract
    References Chapter 21 Normal Embryology, Anatomy, and Physiology of the Gastrointestinal Tract
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 22 Small Intestinal Obstruction
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 23 Intestinal Atresia and Webs
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 24 Malrotation and Midgut Volvulus
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 25 Gastrointestinal Surgical Aspects of Cystic Fibrosis
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 26 Necrotizing Enterocolitis (NEC)
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 27 Meckel's Diverticulum & Vitelline Duct Remnants
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 28 Appendicitis Abstract
    References
    Chapter 29 Intussusception
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 30 Small Left Colon Syndrome (SLCS)
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 31 Disorders of Colonic Motility/Hirschsprung Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 32 Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 33 Gastrointestinal Bleeding
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 34 Anorectal Malformations
    Abstract
    References
    Chapter 35 Anorectal Complaints (Proctology): Hemorrhoids, Fissures, Abscesses, Fistulae
    Abstract
    35.1 Hemorrhoids
    35.2 Anal Fissures
    35.3 Abscesses
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jean-Pierre Chavoin, editor.
    Summary: This book with accompanying videos focuses on pectus excavatum correction using custom-made silicone implants. It discusses patient evaluation, the minimally invasive procedure and follow-up care. It also describes in detail, and in a way that is comprehensible for practicing clinicians, the procedure for creating silicone implants using a scanner (computer-aided design). Further, the book presents the possibility of using fat grafting to correct this congenital deformity and highlights secondary surgical procedures and complications (e.g. infections). Correcting pectus excavatum using a computer-aided design silicone implant is a simple and reliable technique that yields high-quality, aesthetic results. In the medium term, the approach may render invasive techniques obsolete, however, these operations remain risky.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    Paulo Freire ; translated by Myra Bergman Ramos ; with an introduction by Donaldo Macedo and an afterword by Ira Shor.
    Summary: "First published in Portuguese in 1968, [this book] was translated and published in English in 1970. Paulo Freire's work has helped to empower countless people throughout the world and continues to possess a special urgency as the creation of a permanent underclass among the underprivileged and minorities in urban centers around the world continues. The 50th anniversary edition includes a new introduction by Donaldo Macedo, an afterword by Ira Shor, and interviews with Marina Aparicio Barberán, Noam Chomsky, Gustavo E. Fischman, Ramón Flecha, Ronald David Glass, Valerie Kinloch, peter Mayo, Peter McLaren, and Margo Okazawa-Rey to inspire a new generation of educators, students, and general readers for years to come."--Page [4] of cover.

    Contents:
    Introduction to the 50th Anniversary Edition / Donaldo Macedo
    Preface
    Chapter 1
    Chapter 2
    Chapter 3
    Chapter 4
    "A luta continua": Afterword to Pedagogy of the Oppressed / Ira Shor
    Interviews with Contemporary Scholars : Marina Aparicio Barberan ; Noam Chomsky ; Gustavo E. Fischman ; Ramon Flecha ; Ronald David Glass ; Valerie Kinlock ; Peter Mayo ; Peter McLaren ; Margo Okazawa-Rey
    Foreword to the Original English Edition (1970) / Richard Shaull.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    LB880.F73 P4313 2018
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Beth Nachtsheim Bolick, Karin Reuter-Rice, Maureen A. Madden, Paul N. Severin.
    Summary: "Pediatric Acute Care: A Guide for Interprofessional Practice takes an evidence-based, interprofessional approach to pediatric acute care as it exemplifies the depth and diversity that's needed for the dynamic healthcare environments in which acutely ill children receive care. Coverage includes how to work with the pediatric patient and family, major acute care disorders and their management, emergency preparedness, common acute care procedures, and much more. With contributions from more than 200 practicing clinicians and academic experts, it represents a wide variety of disciplines including medicine, nursing, pharmacy, child life, nutrition, law, integrative medicine, education, public health, and psychology, among others. The second edition also features the addition of new physician and nurse practitioner co-editors as well as extensive content updates including updated evidence-based content throughout the text, the integration of the 2016 IPEC Core Competencies for Interprofessional Collaborative Practice, a new full-color design, and new vivid illustrations throughout"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Part I. Interprofessional patient care. The interprofessional team
    Research and evidence-based practice
    Certification, licensure, and credentialing/privileging for the healthcare professional
    Documentation and coding
    Team communication and handoffs
    Patient safety
    Part II. Approach to the pediatric patient and family
    Child life: developmental considerations
    Patient- and family-centered care
    Communicating bad news
    Ethical considerations
    Care of the minor and legal considerations
    Transition to adulthood
    Care of children with medical complexity
    Management in the emergency setting
    Management in the inpatient setting
    The premature infant in the pediatric acute care setting
    Management of the chronically ill child
    Transport of the ill of injured pediatric patient
    Rehabilitation
    Palliative care and integrative medicine
    Part III. Selected disorders and their management. Analgesia, paralytics, sedation, withdrawal, and opioid disorders
    Cardiac disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Endocrine disorders
    Fluid, electrolytes, and nutrition
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Genetic and metabolic disorders
    Hematologic and oncologic disorders
    Immunologic/autoimmune and rheumatologic disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Kidney and genitourinary disorders
    Musculoskeletal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Orofacial disorders
    Pulmonary disorders
    Child maltreatment
    Toxicologic exposure
    Traumatic injuries
    Part IV. Emergency preparedness. Principles of disaster management and clinical practice
    Part V. Procedures. Arterial catheter insertion
    Central venous catheter insertion and removal
    Chest tube insertion and removal
    Intracardiac line removal
    Intraventricular catheter insertion and shunt access
    Lumbar puncture
    Postpyloric feeding tube insertion
    Peripherally inserted central venous catheter insertion and removal
    Peritoneal catheter insertion
    Rapid sequence intubation
    Ultrasound
    Wound closure
    Part VI. Laboratory values. Laboratory values
    Part VII. Learning and evaluation. Simulation
    The role of assessment in teaching and learning.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    Motohiro Kato, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses key aspects of childhood acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), presenting the latest research on the biology and treatment of the disease and related issues. The cure rate for ALL has improved dramatically due to advances such as supportive care, treatment stratification based on relapse risk, and the optimization of treatment regimens. Gathering contributions by eminent scholars Pediatric Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia is a valuable resource for pediatric hematologists as well as for medical students, interns, residents and fellows. It not only offers comprehensive insights, but also provides a springboard for future research.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface; Contents; Part I: Epidemiology and Diagnosis of Pediatric ALL;
    Chapter 1: Overview; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Symptoms and Diagnosis; 1.3 Treatment; 1.4 Future Directions; References;
    Chapter 2: Genetic Alterations of Pediatric Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia; 2.1 B Precursor ALL with Recurrent Fusion or Chromosomal Abnormality; 2.1.1 KMT2A Rearrangement; 2.1.2 ETV6-RUNX1 and High Hyperdiploid; 2.1.3 TCF3 Rearrangement; 2.1.4 Hypodiploid; 2.1.5 BCR-ABL1; 2.2 New Subtype of B-ALL; 2.2.1 IKZF1 Deletion, CRLF2 Deregulation, and Ph-Like ALL; 2.2.2 iAMP21 2.2.3 MEF2D and ZNF384 Rearranged ALL2.2.4 DUX4 Rearranged ALL; 2.2.5 Others; 2.3 Genetic Alterations of T-ALL; 2.4 Genetic Alterations of Acute Leukemia Ambiguous Lineage; 2.5 Genetic Alterations of Relapsed B-ALL; 2.6 Clinical Implications of Genetic Studies; References;
    Chapter 3: Germline Biology of Pediatric ALL; 3.1 Importance of Germline Variants in Leukemia Biology; 3.2 Germline Biology for Drug Response; 3.2.1 Pharmacogenomics of Adverse Events; 3.3 Germline Biology for Leukemogenesis; 3.3.1 Leukemia Predisposing Syndrome; 3.3.2 Leukemia Predisposing in Non-syndromic ALL; References
    Chapter 4: Immunophenotype of Pediatric ALL4.1 Diagnostic Criteria of Pediatric ALL According to Immunophenotyping; 4.2 Immunophenotyping of B-Lineage ALL; 4.3 Immunophenotyping of T-Lineage ALL; 4.4 Relationship Between Immunophenotyping and Cytogenetic Abnormalities; References;
    Chapter 5: MRD in Pediatric ALL; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Detection Methods of Minimal Residual Disease; 5.2.1 PCR-Based MRD Detection; 5.2.2 FCM-Based MRD Detection; 5.3 Clinical Impact of MRD; 5.4 Future of Minimal Residual Disease Detection; References; Part II: Treatment of Pediatric ALL
    Chapter 6: B-Cell Precursor ALL6.1 Risk Stratification of B-Cell Precursor ALL; 6.2 Treatment Backbone of B-Cell Precursor ALL; 6.2.1 Induction Therapy; 6.2.2 Consolidation Therapy; 6.2.3 Maintenance Therapy; 6.2.4 CNS Directed Therapy; 6.2.5 Immunotherapy; References;
    Chapter 7: Pediatric T-Cell Acute Lymphobastic Leukemia; 7.1 Epidemiology; 7.2 Diagnosis; 7.3 Clinical and Biological Characteristics; 7.4 Treatment; 7.5 Prognostic Factors; 7.6 Future Directions; 7.7 Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 8: Mature B-Cell Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia; 8.1 Epidemiology; 8.2 Pathology/Biology 8.3 Clinical Presentation8.4 Treatment; 8.4.1 Standard Treatments; 8.4.2 Relapsed or Refractory Disease; References;
    Chapter 9: Infant ALL; 9.1 Introduction; 9.2 Risk Stratifications in Infant ALL; 9.3 Treatment of Infant MLL-r ALL; 9.3.1 Chemotherapy; 9.3.2 Hematopoietic Stem Cell Transplantation; 9.3.3 Novel Therapies; 9.3.3.1 Nucleoside Analogues; 9.3.3.2 FLT3 Inhibitors; 9.3.3.3 Epigenetic Agents; 9.3.3.4 BCL-2 Inhibitors; 9.3.3.5 Immunotherapies; 9.4 Treatment of Infant MLL-g ALL; 9.5 Treatment of Relapsed Infant ALL; 9.6 Acute and Late Toxicities on Infant ALL Treatment; References
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Steven L. Shein, Alexander T. Rotta, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a concise yet comprehensive overview of pediatric acute respiratory distress syndrome (PARDS). The text reviews the emerging science behind the new PARDS definition; explores epidemiology, pathobiology, etiologies, and risk factors; reviews state-of-the-art treatment modalities and strategies; and discusses clinical outcomes. Written by experts in the field, Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome: A Clinical Guide is a valuable resource for clinicians and practitioners who specialize in pediatric critical care.

    Contents:
    The History of ARDS and the Need for a Pediatric Definition
    Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome: Definition and Epidemiology
    Pathobiology of the Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Risk Factors and Etiologies of Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Imaging and Monitoring in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Conventional Mechanical Ventilation in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Non-conventional Mechanical Ventilation for Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome: High-frequency Oscillatory Ventilation and Airway Pressure Release Ventilation
    Ventilator Weaning and Extubation Strategies for Children with PARDS
    Non-Invasive Respiratory Support in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Ancillary Pulmonary Treatments for Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Analgesia, Sedation and Neuromuscular Blockade in PARDS
    Fluids, Nutrition, and Acute Kidney Injury in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Heart-Lung Interactions and Cardiovascular Support in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Red Blood Cell Transfusion in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome in Immunocompromised Patients
    ECMO for Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome
    Clinical Outcomes in Pediatric Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    American Heart Association.
    Contents:
    Part 1: Course overview
    Part 2: Review of BLS and AED for Infants and Children
    Part 3: Systematic Approach to the Seriously ill or Injured Child
    Part 4: Recognition and Management of Cardiac Arrest
    Part 5: Effective Resuscitation Team Dynamics
    Part 6: Recognition of Respiratory Distress and Failure
    Part 7: Management of Respiratory Distress and Failure
    Resources for Management of Respiratory Emergencies
    Part 8: Recognition of Shock
    Part 9: Management of Shock
    Resources for Management of Circulatory Emergencies
    Part 10: Recognition of Arrhythmias
    Part 11: Management of Arrhythmias
    Part 12: Post-Cardiac Arrest Care
    Appendix
    Index.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC87.9 .P35 2016
    1
  • Digital
    American Heart Association.
    Contents:
    Part 1: Course overview. Course objectives ; Precourse preparation ; Course materials ; Course completion requirements ; Science update ; The chain of survival
    Part 2: Review of BLS and AED for infants and children. Learning objectives ; BLS for infants and children ; AED for infants and children younger than 8 years
    Part 3: High-performance teams. High-performance team roles and dynamics
    Part 4: Systematic approach to the seriously ill or injured child. Learning objective ; Initial assessment to identify a life-threatening condition ; Initial assessment ; Evaluate-Identify-Intervene ; Primary assessment ; Secondary assessment ; Diagnostic assessments
    Part 5: Recognizing and managing cardiac arrest. Learning objective ; Rapidly intervene to prevent cardiac arrest ; Life-threatening problems ; Cardiac arrest in infants and children ; Definition of cardiac arrest ; Pathways to cardiac arrest ; Causes of cardiac arrest ; Recognizing cardiac arrest ; Managing cardiac arrest
    Part 6: Effective high-performance team dynamics. Learning objective ; Roles in a high-performance team ; Elements of effective high-performance team dynamics
    Part 7: Recognizing respiratory distress and failure. Learning objective ; Fundamental issues associated with respiratory problems ; Identifying respiratory problems by severity ; Identifying respiratory problems by type ; Summary: recognizing respiratory problems flowchart
    Part 8: Managing respiratory distress and failure. Learning objective ; Rescue breating ; Initial management of respiratory distress and failture ; Principles of targeted management ; Managing upper airway obstruction ; Managing lower airway obstruction ; Managing lunch tissue disease ; Managing disordered control of breathing ; Summary: managing respiratory emergencies flowchart ; Resources for managing respiratory emergencies
    Part 9: Recognizing shock. Learning objective ; Defining shock ; Pathophysiology of shock ; Identifying shock by severity (effect on blood pressure) ; Identifying shock by type ; Recognizing shock flowchart
    Part 10: Managing shock. Learning objective ; Goals of shock management ; Fundamentals of shock management ; General management of shock ; Fluid therapy ; Glucose ; Management according to type of shock ; Managing shock flowchart ; Resources for managing circulatory emergencies
    Part 11: Recognizing arrhythmias. Learning objectives ; Bradycardia definitions ; Recognizing bradycardia ; Tachyarrhythmias
    Part 12: Managing arrhythmias. Learning objectives ; Principles of managing pediatric arrhythmias ; Management: pediatric bradycardia with a pulse ; Managing tachyarrhythmias ; Summary of emergency interventions ; Pediatric tachycardia with a pulse algorithm
    Part 13: Post-cardiac arrest care. Learning objective ; Goals of therapy ; Respiratory system ; Cardiovascular system ; Neurologic system
    Appendices: BLS skills testing checklists ; Initial assessment: pediatric assessment triangle ; Primary assessment ; Skills station competency checklists ; Rhythm recognition review ; Learning station competency checklists and PALS case scenario testing checklists.
    Digital Access AHA 2020
  • Print
    American Academy of Pediatrics.
    Summary: This convenient reference provides clinicians with point-of-care guidance on the assessment and treatment of pediatric allergies in children of all ages, from infants to young adults

    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Tab 1. Allergic Conjunctivitis
    Tab 2. Allergic Rhinitis
    Tab 3. Respiratory Exposures
    Tab 4. Remediation Strategies for Common Respiratory Allergens
    Tab 5. Mold Exposures
    Tab 6. Mold-Related Illness and Health Effects
    Tab 7. Hymenoptera Venom Allergy
    Tab 8. Classic Reactions to Antibiotics
    Tab 9. Immediate Reactions to Antibiotics
    Tab 10. Nonimmediate Reactions to Antibiotics
    Tab 11. Nickel Allergy
    Tab 12. Latex Allergy
    Tab 13. Diagnosis of Atopic Dermatitis
    Tab 14. Treatment of Atopic Dermatitis
    Tab 15. Avoiding Eczema Triggers Tab 16. Food Allergies
    Tab 17. Cow's Milk Allergy
    Tab 18. Peanut Allergy
    Tab 19. Anaphylaxis Recognition
    Tab 20. Anaphylaxis Treatment
    Tab 21. AAP Allergy and Anaphylaxis Emergency Plan
    Tab 22. Allergy testing
    Tab 23. Immunotherapy
    Digital Access AAP ebooks [2023]
  • Digital
    Nima Rezaei, editor.
    Summary: This book comprises a collection of case-based chapters, submitted by physicians and pediatricians in all specialties and meticulously refined and selected to cover the most common and important aspects of Pediatric Allergy knowledge. Commonly encountered disorders such as allergic rhinitis, food allergy, and atopic dermatitis are covered among many others. Each chapter starts with a brief of the initial presentation and lab data of the patient, followed by a series of 3-6 multiple choice questions (MCQs), leading the reader to the diagnosis and best of practice in a step-wise manner. Clinical pearls presented as "practical points", and the MCQ format along with detailed answers, makes Pediatrc Allergy an essential reading material that a pediatric allergologist cannot afford to miss.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Donald Y.M. Leung, Cezmi A. Akdis, Stanley J. Szefler, Hugh A. Sampson, Francisco A. Bonilla.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Donald Y.M. Leung, Cezmi A. Akdis, Leonard B. Bacharier, Charlotte Cunningham-Rundles, Scott H. Sicherer, Hugh A. Sampson.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo Foresta, Daniele Gianfrilli, editors.
    Summary: This book addresses and summarizes the main andrological disorders (genital, reproductive or sexual diseases) that may originate in childhood or adolescence. Since many of the andrological diseases that occur in adulthood originate before the age of 18 and sometimes even during gestation, andrological evaluation is essential during childhood to highlight anomalies in the genital organs. During puberty, evaluation can help to monitor growth and secondary sex characteristics, and to assess e.g. the possible presence of an eunucoid habitus, gynecomastia, testicular hypotrophy or varicocele, a very common pathology in young people. During adolescence, the assessment of risk factors, such as those related to certain lifestyles, is of fundamental importance for primary prevention. Moreover, in late adolescence the focus shifts to preventing sexually transmitted infections, or to dealing with possible discomforts related to the sexual sphere. Finally, ensuring young people's genital and sexual health also means protecting their fertility. Written by respected experts in the field, this book constitutes an innovative resource, combining updated, reliable and comprehensive information with agile consultation in order to provide a streamlined approach to the care of children and adolescents with such disorders.

    Contents:
    Genetics and alterations in the development of reproductive systems: diagnosis and clinical management
    Impact of endocrine disruptors on male sexual development
    Risk factors affecting male reproductive health, role of epigenetics
    Congenital anomalies of the penis
    Disorders of pubertal development: from hypogonadotrophic hypogonadism to constitutional delay of puberty
    Disorders of pubertal development: precocious puberty
    Clinical management and treatment of varicocele in the adolescence
    Congenital causes of hypergonadotropic hypogonadism: Klinefelter syndrome
    Acquired testicular disorders (trauma, torsion, orchitis, iatrogenic damage)
    Risk factors affecting puberty: environment, obesity and lifestyles
    Sexually transmitted infections and risk behaviors in the adolescence
    Sexual disorders in adolescents and young adults
    Diagnosis and management of testicular tumors
    Gender dysphoria: management in the transition age.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Sarah M. Creighton, Adam Balen, Lesley Breech, Lih-Mei Liao.
    Summary: "Pediatric and Adolescent Gynecology (PAG) is now a recognized sub-speciality which encompasses a spectrum of conditions affecting gynecological health from birth through to adulthood. Serious and life threatening diseases may be relatively rare, but problems such as atypical development of the genital tract are highly complex. The development of specialist centers is important for appropriate and timely referral. For conditions that affect fertility, sexuality, health and well-being, multi-disciplinary care is the gold standard. In addition, for conditions requiring life-long care, the development of methodical transition from pediatric to adolescent and adult services is necessary. Collaborative clinical networks not only promote quality and consistency in care delivery, they also improve professional learning and raise the standard of research"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Sattar Alshryda, Jason J. Howard, James S. Huntley, Jonathan G. Schoenecker, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an evidence-based approach to treating the increasing number of children and adolescents presenting with hip disorders. It integrates the most up-to-date data with essential knowledge, gleaned from decades of previous research and practice. Each chapter provides a comprehensive text which integrates relevant pathophysiology, clinical assessment, and imaging, with an evidence-based approach to non-operative and operative management, authored by globally recognized experts in the field of pediatric hip surgery. Detailed surgical techniques, illustrated with original medical drawings and accompanied by their respective indications, anticipated outcomes, and potential complications, are also featured, in this first orthopedic text dedicated solely to the pediatric and adolescent hip. The Paediatric and Adolescent Hip: Essentials and Evidence will be an indispensable resource for wide spectrum of audience including paediatric orthopaedic surgeons, general practitioners, general orthopaedic surgeons, trauma surgeons, orthopaedic residents, emergency department doctors, and physiotherapists seeking a clear and consistent evidence-based guide to treating the paediatric hip. .

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; Part I: Foundational Aspects;
    1: The History of Pediatric Hip Surgery: The Past 100 Years; Scientific Developments That Have Allowed Childhood Hip Surgery to Advance; Anesthesia; Bacterial Basis for Surgical Infection; Unfortunate Timing: Discovery of Anesthesia vs. Discovery of Antiseptic Technologies; Röntgen and Radiographs (X-Rays); Stainless Steel Implants; Antibiotics; Hospitals and Children's Orthopedic Hip Surgery; Congenital Dysplasia of the Hip 'First CDH-Now DDH'; Anatomy; First Treatment: Pravaz, France; Surgical Methods; Open Reduction for CDH Boston ContributionsMedial vs. Anterior Approach for Hip Reduction; Osteotomies to Stabilize Reduction; Surgical Improvements: Deepening the Acetabulum Along with Open Reduction; Femoral Shortening for Older Children; Extreme Cases; Traction Prior to Reduction Surgery; Osteotomies for Residual Hip Dysplasia; Perthes Disease 'Also Legg-Calvé-Perthes Disease'; Non-operative Treatment; Surgical Containment; Newer Methods; Slipped Capital Femoral Epiphysis (SCFE); Surgical Stabilization; In-Situ Pinning vs. Reduction; Societal Change and Surgical Choices Stable vs. Unstable Slip and Surgical ChoicesUnstable Slips; The Move Towards Anatomic Reduction; Less Complete Reduction/Monitoring Blood Supply; The "Athletic Hip": Deformity Due to Extreme Training; Hip Preservation Surgery; Summary; References;
    2: Anatomy and Physiology of the Pediatric Hip; Introduction; Prenatal Development of the Hip Joint; The Embryonic Phase of Hip Joint Development; The Fetal Phase of Hip Joint Development; Postnatal Development of the Hip Joint; Acetabulum; Femur; Normal Hip Joint Anatomy and Geometry; Acetabular Depth; Acetabular Diameter; Femoral Head Diameter The Neck-Shaft AngleFemoral Anteversion Angle; Postnatal Ossification of the Femoral Head; Periarticular Muscles About the Hip Joint; Functional Muscle Groups About the Hip Joint; Surgical Considerations for Muscles About the Hip Joint; Surgical Approaches to the Hip Joint; Vascular Supply to the Hip Joint; Vascular Supply of the Femoral Head; Prenatal Development of the Femoral Blood Supply; Postnatal Development of the Femoral Blood Supply; Surgical Implications for the Femoral Vascular Supply; Vascular Supply of the Acetabulum Surgical Implications for the Vascular Supply of the AcetabulumReferences;
    3: Biomechanics of the Hip During Gait; Introduction; Functional Anatomy; Bony Structures; Passive Soft Tissues; Muscles and Moments; Biomechanics of the Hip During Gait; Gait Terminology; Kinematics; Typical Gait Kinematics; Kinetics; Altered Kinematics and Kinetics of the Hip Joint; Joint Contact Forces; Final Note; Classic Literature; Key Evidence; References; Part II: Developmental Dysplasia of the Hip;
    4: Developmental Dysplasia of the Hip in Young Children; Introduction; Pathophysiology
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Branski, D.
    Digital Access Karger v. 1-, 1991-
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Periodicals (Downstairs)
    8
  • Digital
    Teresa K. Woodruff, Yasmin C. Gosiengfiao, editors.
    Summary: Reflecting the increasing interest in fertility management for pediatric and adolescent patients and fulfilling an urgent need to have a comprehensive guide to the management of these individuals, this is the first book of its kind to present a comprehensive discussion of pediatric and adolescent oncofertility. It carefully examines the impact of pediatric cancer and cancer therapy on fertility and presents both current and emerging fertility preservation techniques for both males and females, such as cryopreservation. Fertility concerns beyond cancer are also discussed, including disorders of sexual differentiation, gender dysphoria and thalassemia. Practical chapters on pediatric oncofertility in the clinic round out the book, covering setting up a practice, counseling and consent, disclosure and insurance considerations. Concluding chapters document fertility preservation techniques and outcomes internationally, with contributions from Portuguese, Brazilian and Japanese authors. Timely and wide-ranging, Pediatric and Adolescent Oncofertility is an ideal resource for reproductive medicine specialists, pediatric oncologists, and primary care physicians treating pediatric and adolescent cancer patients looking to protect fertility options.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Aleksandar M. Vlahovic, Emir Q. Haxhija.
    Summary: This book describes plastic surgery treatments in children for e.g. cleft lip and palate, polydactyly and syndactyly, pigment lesions, benign and malign skin and soft tissue tumors, and vascular anomalies. Every chapter starts with a short introduction, followed by sections on patient evaluation, treatment options and postoperative care. Supporting images and pitfalls are also included. Based on the authors experience, the book offers pediatric plastic surgeons a valuable guide in their everyday work, while also introducing interested practitioners to the field. Pediatric plastic surgery is a specific field of surgery which includes reconstructive and aesthetic-cosmetic procedures in children. The majority of procedures are reconstructive in nature, making aesthetic considerations especially important. As aesthetic procedures in children are not so frequent, only a small group of clinicians are familiar with this part of surgery.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Otoplasty
    Microtia and other congenital auricular deformities
    Breast augmentation in children
    Breast reconstruction in congenital deformities
    Male breast reduction
    Cleft lip and palate
    Polydactyly
    Syndactyly
    Pigment lesions
    Benign soft tissue tumors
    Malign soft tissue tumors
    Hemangiomas
    Lymphatic malformation
    Venous malformation.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Vincenzo Guzzanti, editor.
    Summary: This handy volume focuses on the evaluation and treatment of a wide range of sports injuries, in relation to the Tanner stage of sexual development in young athletes. Recognized leaders in each subspecialty illustrate their own treatment preferences, and a series of detailed chapters address the injuries likely to be encountered in different parts of the body, including the spine, shoulder, elbow, wrist and hand, hip, knee, ankle, and feet. Among the topics that receive particular attention are epiphyseal-physeal injuries, the still controversial issue of capsular ligament tears and the impact of their treatment on joint and bone development, and stress syndromes of the musculoskeletal system. Helpful algorithms covering the diagnosis and treatment of ligament tears are included, and advice is provided on when to return an athlete to training. One chapter is devoted to non-sports-related pathologies that have to be considered in the differential diagnosis of sports injuries in adolescents. Written by a multidisciplinary team of experts, this volume will be an excellent guide in diagnosis and in evaluating the impact of treatments for all professionals dealing with young athletes; orthopedic surgeons, physiotherapists, general practitioners and athletic trainers.

    Contents:
    Basic science and injury in growing athletes: Cartilage, Menisci and Bone
    Muscle, Tendon and Ligament
    Evaluation of the pediatric and adolescent athlete
    Overuse injuries
    Physeal and epiphyseal cartilage injury
    The Spine: Sports-related pathology
    The Shoulder: skeletal injuries and ligamentous instability
    The Elbow: Ligamentous and skeletal injuries
    Wrist and Hand: Ligamentous and skeletal injuries
    The Hip: Femoro-acetabular Impingement
    The Knee: Ligamentous tears
    Meniscal Lesions
    Osteochondritis Dissecans of the Knee
    Patello-femoral disorders
    Osteochondritis Dissecans of the Talus
    Acute ligamentous tears of the Ankle
    Chronic instability of the Ankle
    Foot Abnormalities and Pathologies
    Non-sports-related pathologies in young athletes
    Imaging and techniques.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Lane S. Palmer, Jeffrey S. Palmer, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive reference for health care providers of children and adolescents with urologic conditions. The first section covers the principles of each radiologic modality as well as radiation safety and the history of uroradiology. The second section integrates the lessons of the first section into specific urologic conditions arranged anatomically and includes additional unique conditions.

    Contents:
    Part I. Radiology principles
    part II. Clinical imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Claire Sampankanpanich Soria, Suraj Trivedi, editors.
    Summary: Of Clinical Teaching Points -- Reference -- Chapter 6: Awake Tracheostomy (Adult) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Case Narrative -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 7: Brain Code (Adult) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Case Narrative -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 8: Bronchospasm (Pediatric) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Scenario Development -- Scoring Rubric. Of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 9: Burn Resuscitation (Pediatric) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Scenario Development -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 10: Button Battery Foreign Body (Pediatric) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors -- Case Narrative -- Scoring Rubric -- Summary of Clinical Teaching Points -- References -- Chapter 11: Code Sepsis (Adult) -- Case Outline -- Learning Objectives -- Simulator Environment -- Actors.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    References
    Contents
    Contributors
    Chapter 1: Automatic Implantable Cardioverter Defibrillator (AICD) Misfiring (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 2: Amniotic Fluid Embolism (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 3: Anaphylaxis (Adult)
    Case Outline Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 4: Anterior Mediastinal Mass (Pediatric)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    Preparation and Anticipation
    In Summary
    References
    Chapter 5: APNEA in Post-Anesthesia Care Unit (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Scenario Development
    Scoring Rubric Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 12: Craniosynostosis (Pediatric)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 13: Delivery Room Resuscitation (Pediatric)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    Simulator Environment
    Actors
    Case Narrative
    Scoring Rubric
    Summary of Clinical Teaching Points
    References
    Chapter 14: Difficult Airway in Obstetrics (Adult)
    Case Outline
    Learning Objectives
    methods
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Hakan Ilaslan, Murali Sundaram.
    Summary: MRI is the only imaging technique that allows direct visualization of bone marrow and its components with good spatial and contrast resolution. Accordingly, it is an optimal imaging modality for bone marrow assessment in both adults and children. This comprehensive atlas is unique in being devoted to the MRI appearances of bone marrow in the axial and appendicular skeleton of adults and children. Normal MRI findings, including common variants and degenerative changes, are first documented. MRI appearances in the entire spectrum of neoplastic and non-neoplastic infiltrative marrow disorders are then presented, with accompanying explanatory text. Among the conditions considered are multiple myeloma, the acute and chronic leukemias, diffuse metastases, diffuse lymphomas, the anemias, polycythemia vera, myelofibrosis, storage disorders, and infections. Characteristic changes to bone marrow following various forms of treatment are also displayed and discussed. The selected images reflect the use of a variety of sequences and techniques, such as fat suppression, and contrast-enhanced imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Paul R. Barach Jeffery P. Jacobs, Steven E. Lipshultz, Peter C. Laussen, editors.
    Summary: This book is the first in a two-volume set of textbooks and focuses on outcomes analysis in pediatric cardiac care, supporting the coverage of quality improvement and patient safety in its sister title. There has been a huge research effort undertaken in pediatric and congenital cardiac care to understand and measure what is done, to establish collaborative definitions and tools of measurement, and to determine robust benchmarks and methodologies to analyze outcomes. This book concentrates on implementation science in terms of continuous quality improvements and safety science and systems. Pediatric and Congenital Cardiac Care: Volume 1 ? Outcomes Analysis reveals the remarkable developments that have been seen in the fields of pediatric cardiology and cardiac surgery. This unique collaboration between four Editors from disparate medical disciplines (cardiac surgery, cardiology, anesthesia, and critical care) incorporates an international community of scholarship with articles by luminaries and cutting edge thinkers on the current and future status of pediatric and congenital cardiac care. The goal of this and its companion volume is to understand and advance the profession and its activities, to use common terms, and to improve the management of risk and safety in order to enhance pediatric and congenital cardiac care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Paul R. Barach, Jeffery P. Jacobs, Steven E. Lipshultz, Laussen, Peter C. Laussen, editors.
    Summary: This book is the second in a two-volume set of textbooks and focuses on quality improvement and patient safety, supporting the coverage of outcomes analysis in its sister title. There has been a huge research effort undertaken in pediatric cardiac care to understand and measure what is done, to establish collaborative definitions and tools of measurement, and to determine robust benchmarks and methodologies to analyze outcomes. This book concentrates on implementation science in terms of continuous quality improvements and safety science and systems. Pediatric and Congenital Cardiac Care: Volume 2 - Quality Improvement and Patient Safety reveals the remarkable developments that have been seen in the fields of pediatric cardiology and cardiac surgery. This unique collaboration between four Editors from disparate medical disciplines (cardiac surgery, cardiology, anesthesia, and critical care) incorporates an international community of scholarship with articles by luminaries and cutting edge thinkers on the current and future status of pediatric and congenital cardiac care. The goal of this and its companion volume is to understand and advance the profession and its activities, to use common terms, and to improve the management of risk and safety in order to enhance pediatric and congenital cardiac care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Selection, Training and Mentoring of Cardiac Surgeons
    Improving Pediatric Cardiac Care with Continuous Quality Improvement Methods and Tools
    Quality Improvement in Pediatric Cardiology: The National Pediatric Cardiology Quality Improvement Collaborative
    Teams, Team Training, and the Role of Simulation
    The Cardiac Intensive Care Unit and Operating Room Continuum: Quality and Safety in the Cardiac Intensive Care Unit
    Professional Formation of Physicians Focused on Improving Care
    Surgical Volume and Outcome Relationship in Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    The Pediatric Perioperative Cardiac Arrest (POCA) Registry
    Reporting in Pediatric Resuscitation: Get With the Guidelines-Resuscitation Registry
    Addressing Nutrition and Growth in Children with Congenital Heart Disease
    Patients as Observers and Reporters in Support of Systems and Patient Safety
    Failure to Rescue and Failure to Perceive in Pediatric Cardiac Surgery: Lessons Learned from Aviation
    Quality Improvement in Noninvasive Imaging?Present and Future Initiatives
    Improving Clinical Outcomes in Pediatric Cardiology
    The Impact of Continuous Quality Improvement on Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    Leadership and Quality Improvement
    A Brief Description of the Role of the Federal Government in the Improvement of Healthcare Costs and Quality in the United States
    Lessons Learned from the Public
    Inquiry into Children's Heart Surgery at the Bristol Royal Infirmary and the English Safe and Sustainable Cardiac Review
    Lean in the Cardiac Intensive Care Unit
    Local Improvement Teams
    Implementation Science?The Next Frontier
    Leadership, Surgeon Well-Being and Other Non-Technical Aspects of Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    Quality and Safety in a Children's Hospital
    The Children?s Hospital of Michigan Quality and Safety Journey: Making Safety First and Making It Last
    Resilience and Systems Engineering
    Measuring and Assessing Adverse Medical Events
    The Role of Communication and Patient Handovers in Pediatric Cardiac Care Centers
    The Role of Technology and Medical Devices in Enhancing Pediatric Cardiac Critical Care Outcomes
    Human Factors and Outcomes in Pediatric Cardiac Surgery
    Information Management and Hospital Enterprise Information Systems
    Towards Effective Data Utilization in Congenital Cardiac Critical Care
    Clinical Decision Making
    Design of Cardiac Surgery Operating Rooms and the Impact of the Built Environment
    Simulation-Based Training to Enhance Patient Safety in Pediatric Cardiovascular Care
    Epilogue ?A Vision for the Future.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Eduardo M. Da Cruz, Dunbar Ivy, James Jaggers, editors.
    Summary: Pediatric and Congenital Cardiology, Cardiac Surgery and Intensive Care provides a consistent and comprehensive approach to multiple congenital and acquired cardiac pathologies pre, peri and postoperatively, with the use of algorhythms, guidelines and current research issues. Included with this book are interactive videos with the most common interventions, online access to practical learning activities, and to the comprehensive Aristotle score and database. This reference work satisfies the need for a universal and practical review of management of critically ill children and adults with congenital heart disease, based upon taskforce decisions and the cumulative experience of the world leaders in the field.

    Contents:
    General aspects
    Fetal cardiology
    Assessment of the cardiac patient
    Preventive cardiology
    Cardiovascular anesthesia
    Cardio-pulmonary bypass
    Monitoring of the cardiac patient
    Cardiopulmonary and intracardiac interactions
    Cardiovascular pharmacology
    General principles of interventional cardiac catheterization
    Innovative interventional techniques
    Cardiopulmonary resuscitation
    Nursing issues related to the cardiac patient
    Congenital cardiovascular diseases in pediatrics
    Cardiovascular dysfunction in infants, children and adolescents
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Systemic vasculopathies
    Acquired cardiac diseases
    The adult with congenital cardiac defects
    Extracorporeal life support (ecls) of the cardiac patient
    Heart and lung transplant
    Arrhythmias and conductive disorders
    Upper airway and tracheal pathology
    Extra-cardiac issues and complications
    Outcomes, long term follow-up and cardiac recovery
    Leadership issues of a pediatric heart center
    Miscellaneous.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Kirk Lalwani, Ira Todd Cohen, Ellen Y. Choi, and Vidya T. Raman
    Summary: This volume, part of the Problem-Based Learning series, reviews key topics in Pediatric Anesthesia found on the American Board of Anesthesiology's Pediatric Anesthesiology Certification Exam using illustrative clinical cases. With real-world clinical cases and discussion questions that guide case progression, this book facilitates both individual and small-group learning. Each case is further broken down to include additional related subtopics for maximum yield. Evidence-based reviews and multiple-choice self-assessment questions follow each case, making this book ideal for continuing education in pediatric anesthesia for the generalist and specialist practitioner. Teachers and trainees in anesthesiology will take advantage of this book's features for targeted teaching, learning, and retention.
    Digital Access Oxford 2018